nortel bs425

Part No. 320985-ANovember 2005

4655 Great America ParkwaySanta Clara, CA 95054

*320985-A*

System Configuration GuideNortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Software Release 3.6

2

320985-A

Copyright © 2005 Nortel Networks. All rights reserved.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical data, and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document. The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that license. The software license agreement is included in this document.

Trademarks

*Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, Unified Networks, and BayStack are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

The asterisk after a name denotes a trademarked item.

Restricted rights legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013.

Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to, or accompany the delivery of, this computer software, the rights of the United States Government regarding its use, reproduction, and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19.

Statement of conditions

In the interest of improving internal design, operational function, and/or reliability, Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice.

Nortel Networks does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product(s) or circuit layout(s) described herein.

Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright © 1988, Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission.

SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

In addition, the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure (that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties).

3

System Configuration Guide

Nortel Networks software license agreement

This Software License Agreement (“License Agreement”) is between you, the end-user (“Customer”) and Nortel Networks Corporation and its subsidiaries and affiliates (“Nortel Networks”). PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY. YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE THE SOFTWARE. USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, return the Software, unused and in the original shipping container, within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price.

“Software” is owned or licensed by Nortel Networks, its parent or one of its subsidiaries or affiliates, and is copyrighted and licensed, not sold. Software consists of machine-readable instructions, its components, data, audio-visual content (such as images, text, recordings or pictures) and related licensed materials including all whole or partial copies. Nortel Networks grants you a license to use the Software only in the country where you acquired the Software. You obtain no rights other than those granted to you under this License Agreement. You are responsible for the selection of the Software and for the installation of, use of, and results obtained from the Software.

1. Licensed Use of Software. Nortel Networks grants Customer a nonexclusive license to use a copy of the Software on only one machine at any one time or to the extent of the activation or authorized usage level, whichever is applicable. To the extent Software is furnished for use with designated hardware or Customer furnished equipment (“CFE”), Customer is granted a nonexclusive license to use Software only on such hardware or CFE, as applicable. Software contains trade secrets and Customer agrees to treat Software as confidential information using the same care and discretion Customer uses with its own similar information that it does not wish to disclose, publish or disseminate. Customer will ensure that anyone who uses the Software does so only in compliance with the terms of this Agreement. Customer shall not a) use, copy, modify, transfer or distribute the Software except as expressly authorized; b) reverse assemble, reverse compile, reverse engineer or otherwise translate the Software; c) create derivative works or modifications unless expressly authorized; or d) sublicense, rent or lease the Software. Licensors of intellectual property to Nortel Networks are beneficiaries of this provision. Upon termination or breach of the license by Customer or in the event designated hardware or CFE is no longer in use, Customer will promptly return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction. Nortel Networks may audit by remote polling or other reasonable means to determine Customer’s Software activation or usage levels. If suppliers of third party software included in Software require Nortel Networks to include additional or different terms, Customer agrees to abide by such terms provided by Nortel Networks with respect to such third party software.

2. Warranty. Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between Nortel Networks and Customer, Software is provided “AS IS” without any warranties (conditions) of any kind. NORTEL NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES (CONDITIONS) FOR THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT. Nortel Networks is not obligated to provide support of any kind for the Software. Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties, and, in such event, the above exclusions may not apply.

3. Limitation of Remedies. IN NO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: a) DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM; b) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, CUSTOMER’S RECORDS, FILES OR DATA; OR c) DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS, ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. The foregoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and/or supplier of the Software. Such developer and/or supplier is an intended beneficiary of this Section. Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions and, in such event, they may not apply.

4. General

a. If Customer is the United States Government, the following paragraph shall apply: All Nortel Networks Software available under this License Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation and, in the event Software is licensed for or on behalf of the United States

4

320985-A

Government, the respective rights to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U.S. Federal Regulations at 48 C.F.R. Sections 12.212 (for non-DoD entities) and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202 (for DoD entities).

b. Customer may terminate the license at any time. Nortel Networks may terminate the license if Customer fails to comply with the terms and conditions of this license. In either event, upon termination, Customer must either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction.

c. Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from Customer’s use of the Software. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all applicable export and import laws and regulations.

d. Neither party may bring an action, regardless of form, more than two years after the cause of the action arose.e. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between

Customer and Nortel Networks.f. This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software. If

the Software is acquired in the United States, then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of the state of New York.

5


Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

How to get help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Getting help from the Nortel web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chapter 1About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

New features in software release 3.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (IEEE 802.1ab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

LLDP operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Connectivity and management information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Transmitting LLDPDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

TLV system MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

LLDPDU and TLV error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Configuring LLDP using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Ethernet Switch 425-48T stacking support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Username and password enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Radius password fallback enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

SNMP trap port enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

EAPoL with Guest VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

shutdown command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

reload command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

show mac-address-table enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

6 Contents

320985-A

restore factory-default command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Ping enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

show interfaces config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Autosave enable/disable enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Download without reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

write memory and save config commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Daylight savings time enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

BootP when needed as default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

VLAN tagging enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

VLAN Configuration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Port mirroring configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Other features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

SFP GBIC Support on the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Flash memory storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Switch software image storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Autosensing, and autonegotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

RFCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

BootP automatic IP configuration/MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Configuration and switch management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Console port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Port connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Cooling fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

AC power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

User Interface button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Setting the unit as the Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Setting the unit as the non-base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Setting the unit as a standalone unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Resetting the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Contents 7


Resetting the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Aborting a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Setting the default IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . 73

Console port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Gigabit Interface Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Port connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Cascade Up and Down connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Cooling fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

AC power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Network configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Desktop switch application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Segment switch application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

High-density switched workgroup application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Stack operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Initial installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Stack MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Removing a unit from the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Stack configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Stack up configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Stack down configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 2Using the console interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Accessing the CI menus and screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Using the CI menus and screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Navigating the CI menus and screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Screen fields and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Switch Configuration Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Port list syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

8 Contents

320985-A

Accelerator keys for repetitive tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Adding a new port to an existing port number list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Removing a port from an existing port number list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Port Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Choosing a high speed flow control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Symmetric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Asymmetric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Rate Limiting Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chapter 3CLI Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

CLI command modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Port numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Port numbering in standalone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Port numbering in stacked mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Accessing CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Setting the system username and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Getting help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Basic navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

General navigation commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Keystroke navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

help command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

no command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

default command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

logout command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

configure command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

interface command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

disable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

end command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

exit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

shutdown command for the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

reload command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Managing basic system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Contents 9


show sys-info command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

show tech command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

show stack-info command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

show stacking-mode command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

renumber unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Managing MAC address forwarding database table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

show mac-address-table command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

mac-address-table aging-time command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

default mac-address-table aging-time command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Chapter 4Getting Started with Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Installing Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

JDM installation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Installing the Device Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Installing JDM on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Windows minimum requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Installing JDM on Windows from the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Installing JDM on Windows from the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Executing the JDM installation software on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Minimum requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Installing JDM on HP-UX from the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Installing JDM on Linux from the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Removing JDM in Unix or Linux environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Device Manager basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Starting Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Setting the Device Manager properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Opening a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Device Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

10 Contents

320985-A

Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Device view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Selecting a single object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Selecting multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Viewing information about a GBIC port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

LEDs and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Shortcut menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Using the buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Editing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Working with statistics and graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Types of statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Types of graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Statistics for single and multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Viewing statistics as graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Telnet session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Opening an SSH connection to the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Opening the Web-based management home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Trap log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Chapter 5Using the Web-based management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Logging in to the Web-based management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Viewing summary information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Viewing summary switch information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Viewing stack information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Changing stack numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Identifying unit numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Contents 11


Chapter 6System configuration using the Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

IP Configuration/Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Choosing a BootP request mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

BootP When Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

BootP Always . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

BootP Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

BootP or Last Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

SNMP Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Console/Comm Port Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Renumber Stack Units screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Hardware Unit Information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Software Download screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

LED Indications during the download process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Configuration File Download/Upload screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Binary configuration download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

ASCII Configuration file Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Enabling and disabling autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Using SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Configuring with CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Setting local time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Using DNS to ping and Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Configuring with CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Chapter 7System configuration using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and default gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 252

IP notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Assigning and clearing IP addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

ip address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

no ip address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

12 Contents

320985-A

ip default-gateway command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

no ip default-gateway command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

show ip command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

show ip address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Assigning and clearing IP addresses for specific units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

ip address unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

no ip address unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

default ip address unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Pinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

ping command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Resetting the switch to default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Using DNS to ping and telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

show ip dns command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

ping command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

ip name-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

no ip name-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

ip domain-name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

no ip domain-name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

default ip domain-name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Configuration Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Automatically loading Configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

configure network command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

show config-network command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

ASCII Configuration Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

show running-config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

copy running-config tftp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Customizing your system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Setting the terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

show terminal command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

terminal command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

show cli command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Displaying system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Setting boot parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

boot command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

ip bootp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Contents 13


no ip bootp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

default ip bootp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Setting TFTP parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

show tftp-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

tftp-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

no tftp-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

copy config tftp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

copy tftp config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Setting the default management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

cmd-interface command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Customizing the opening banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

banner command for displaying banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

show banner command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

no banner command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Displaying the ARP table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Displaying interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

show interfaces command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

show interfaces config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Saving the configuration to NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

copy config nvram command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

write memory command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

save config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Enabling and disabling autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

show autosave command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

autosave enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

no autosave enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

default autosave enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol . . . . . . . . . . 289

show sntp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

sntp enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

no sntp enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

sntp server primary address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

sntp server secondary address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

no sntp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

sntp sync-now command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

14 Contents

320985-A

sntp sync-interval command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Setting local time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

clock time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

no clock time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

no clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

show clock time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

show clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Enabling Autopology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

autotopology command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

no autotopology command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

default autotopology command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

show autotopology settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

show autotopology nmm-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Configuring LLDP using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

lldp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

default lldp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

lldp port config notification command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

no lldp port config notification command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

default lldp port config notification command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

lldp tx-tlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

no lldp tx-tlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

default lldp tx-tlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

lldp port status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

no lldp port status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

default lldp port status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

show lldp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

show lldp port command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Configuring LEDs on the display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Configuring UI button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

ui-button enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

ui-button unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

show ui-button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

default ui-button command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

no ui-button command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Contents 15


Upgrading software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

download command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Chapter 8Ethernet port management using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Enabling or disabling a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

shutdown command for the port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

no shutdown command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Naming ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

no name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

default name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Setting port speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

speed command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

default speed command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

duplex command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

default duplex command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Enabling flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

flowcontrol command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

no flowcontrol command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

default flowcontrol command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Enabling rate-limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

show rate-limit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

rate-limit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

no rate-limit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

default rate-limit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

show auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

show auto-negotiation-capabilities command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

no auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

default auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

16 Contents

320985-A

Chapter 9Configuring the switch using Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Viewing Unit information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Unit tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Rate Limit tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Viewing switch IP information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Globals tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Addresses tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

ARP tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Editing the chassis configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

System tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Base Unit Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Stack Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Agent tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

PowerSupply tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Fan tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Custom Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Working with configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

FileSystem dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

ASCII config file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Working with SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Configuring SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Displaying topology information using Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Topology tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Topology Table tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Chapter 10Configuring ports using Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Viewing and editing a single port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Interface tab for a single port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Viewing and editing multiple port configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Interface tab for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Contents 17


Chapter 11Administering the switch using Web-based management. . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Viewing system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Configuring system security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Rebooting the Ethernet Switch 325/425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Changing the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to system defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Logging out of the management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Chapter 12Configuring the switch using Web-based management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Modifying system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Configuring switch port autonegotiation speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Configuring high speed flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Downloading switch images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Downloading ASCII configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Requirements for storing and retrieving configurationparameters on a TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Enabling and disabling autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Configuring port communication speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Configuring Rate Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Configuring Rate Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Chapter 13Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Interpreting the LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Diagnosing and correcting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Normal power-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Port connection problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Autonegotiation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Port interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Appendix A

18 Contents

320985-A

Installing an SFP Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Locking/extractor mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

SFP labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

SFP models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

CWDM SFP models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Installing SFPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Removing an SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

SFP physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

1000BASE-SX (LC Type) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

1000BASE-LX (LC Type) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

CWDM SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

How to get help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Hard-copy technical manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Appendix BConnectors and pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

RJ-45 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) port connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

MDI and MDI-X devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

MDI-X to MDI cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

DB-9 (RS-232-D) Console/Comm Port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

1000Base-T pinouts for the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Appendix CDefault settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Appendix DSample BootP configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Appendix E

Contents 19


Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Appendix FTechnical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Electrical parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Data rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Network protocol and standards compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Safety agency certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Electromagnetic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Electromagnetic immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

20 Contents

320985-A

21


Figures

Figure 1 LLDP — how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Figure 2 Ethernet Switch 325-24G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Figure 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Figure 4 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Figure 5 Ethernet Switch 325-24T back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Figure 6 Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Figure 7 Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Figure 8 Ethernet Switch 425 LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Figure 9 Ethernet Switch 425 back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Figure 10 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a desktop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Figure 11 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a desktop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Figure 12 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a segment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Figure 13 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a segment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Figure 14 Configuring power workgroups and a shared media hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Figure 15 Stack up configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Figure 16 Stack down configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Figure 17 Map of console interface screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Figure 18 Console interface main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Figure 19 System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Figure 20 Switch Configuration Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Figure 21 MAC Address Security Port Lists screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Figure 22 Port Configuration screen (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Figure 23 Port Configuration screen (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Figure 24 High Speed Flow Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Figure 25 Rate Limiting Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Figure 26 CLI command mode hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Figure 27 Ethernet Switch 425-48T banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Figure 28 Main Menu for Ethernet Switch 425-48T console interface . . . . . . . . . . 127

Figure 29 help command output in privExec mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

22 Figures

320985-A

Figure 30 show sys-info command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Figure 31 show tech command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Figure 32 show tech command output (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Figure 33 show tech command output (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Figure 34 show stack-info command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Figure 35 show stacking-mode command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Figure 36 show mac-address-table command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Figure 37 mac-address-table aging-time output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Figure 38 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Figure 39 License Agreement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Figure 40 Choose Install Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Figure 41 Feature Sets dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Figure 42 Choose Install Folder dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Figure 43 Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Figure 44 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Figure 45 Install Complete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Figure 46 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Figure 47 License Agreement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Figure 48 Choose Install Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Figure 49 Feature Sets dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Figure 50 Choose Install Folder dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Figure 51 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Figure 52 Installing Java Device Manager dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Figure 53 Install Complete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Figure 54 Device Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Figure 55 Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Figure 56 Open Device dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Figure 57 Device view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Figure 58 Parts of the Device Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Figure 59 Objects in the device view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Figure 60 Interface tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Figure 61 Color port legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Figure 62 Switch unit shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Figure 63 Port shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Figure 64 Line graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Figures 23


Figure 65 Area graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Figure 66 Bar graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Figure 67 Pie graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Figure 68 Interface statistics for a single port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Figure 69 Interface statistics for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Figure 70 Statistics dialog box for a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Figure 71 Web-based management home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Figure 72 Web-based management interface home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Figure 73 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Figure 74 Console page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Figure 75 Switch Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Figure 76 Stack Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Figure 77 Stack Numbering Setting page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Figure 78 Identify Unit Numbers page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Figure 79 IP Configuration/Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Figure 80 SNMP Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Figure 81 System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Figure 82 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Figure 83 Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Figure 84 Renumber Stack Units screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Figure 85 Hardware Unit Information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Figure 86 TELNET Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Figure 87 Software Download screen for an Ethernet Switch 325/425 stack . . . . . 239

Figure 88 Configuration File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Figure 89 Configuration File Download/Upload screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Figure 90 ASCII Configuration File Download screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Figure 91 Autosave Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Figure 92 show ip command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Figure 93 show ip address command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Figure 94 ping command responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Figure 95 show ip dns command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Figure 96 ping command responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Figure 97 show config-network command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Figure 98 Output of the show running-config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Figure 99 show terminal command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

24 Figures

320985-A

Figure 100 show cli command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Figure 101 show sys-info command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Figure 102 show tftp-server command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Figure 103 show arp-table command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Figure 104 show interfaces names command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Figure 105 show interfaces command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Figure 106 show interfaces config command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Figure 107 show autosave command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Figure 108 show sntp command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Figure 109 show clock time-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Figure 110 show clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Figure 111 show autotopology settings command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Figure 112 show autotopology nmm-table command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Figure 113 show lldp local-sys-data command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Figure 114 show lldp mgmt-sys-data command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Figure 115 show lldp stats command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Figure 116 show lldp port neighbor command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Figure 117 show lldp port neighbor-mgmt-addr command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Figure 118 show lldp port rx-stats command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Figure 119 show lldp port tx-stats command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Figure 120 show lldp port tx-tlv command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Figure 121 ui-button enable command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Figure 122 show ui-button command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Figure 123 download message for Ethernet Switch 425-48T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Figure 124 shutdown [port <portlist>] command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Figure 125 show rate-limit command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Figure 126 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command output . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Figure 127 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Figure 128 Unit dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Figure 129 Rate Limit tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Figure 130 Globals tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Figure 131 Edit IP dialog box — IP Address tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Figure 132 Edit IP dialog box — ARP tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Figure 133 Edit Chassis dialog box — System tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Figure 134 Edit Chassis dialog box — Base Unit Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Figures 25


Figure 135 Edit Chassis dialog box — Stack Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Figure 136 Edit Chassis dialog box — Agent tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Figure 137 Edit Chassis dialog box — Power Supply tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Figure 138 Edit Chassis dialog box — Fan tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Figure 139 Edit Chassis dialog box — Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Figure 140 Telnet window with default banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Figure 141 Telnet window without banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Figure 142 Edit Chassis dialog box — Custom Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Figure 143 Telnet window with custom banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Figure 144 FileSystem - Config/Image/Diag File tab dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Figure 145 File system - ASCII Config File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Figure 146 SNTP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Figure 147 Diagnostics dialog box — Topology tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Figure 148 Diagnostics dialog box — Topology Table tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Figure 149 Port dialog box — Interface tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Figure 150 Interface tab fields for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Figure 151 System Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Figure 152 Quick Start page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Figure 153 Reset page message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Figure 154 Reset page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Figure 155 Reset to Default page message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Figure 156 Reset to Default page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Figure 157 Logout message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Figure 158 IP page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Figure 159 System page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Figure 160 Port Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Figure 161 High Speed Flow Control page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Figure 162 Software Download page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Figure 163 Ascii Configuration file download page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Figure 164 Configuration File Download/Upload page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Figure 165 Console/Communication Port page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Figure 166 Rate Limiting page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Figure 167 Locking/extractor mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Figure 168 Nortel SFP label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Figure 169 Inserting an SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

26 Figures

320985-A

Figure 170 Removing an SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Figure 171 RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Figure 172 MDI-X to MDI cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Figure 173 MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Figure 174 DB-9 Console port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

27


Tables

Table 1 VLAN Tagging mode definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Table 2 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 switch front panel . . . . . . . . . . 58

Table 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Table 4 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Table 5 International power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Table 6 Components of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Table 7 UI button LEDs on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Table 8 UI button LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask . . . 74

Table 9 Ethernet Switch 425 LED descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Table 10 Components on the Ethernet Switch 425 back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Table 11 International power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Table 12 Stack up configuration description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Table 13 Stack down configuration description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Table 14 Console interface main menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Table 15 System Characteristics screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Table 16 Switch Configuration Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Table 17 Port Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Table 18 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Table 19 Rate Limiting Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Table 20 Command mode prompts and entrance/exit commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Table 21 Keystroke navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Table 22 configure command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Table 23 interface command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Table 24 shutdown command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Table 25 reload command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Table 26 show mac-address-table command parameters and variables . . . . . . . 144

Table 27 mac-address-table aging-time command parameters and variables . . . 145

Table 28 Properties dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Table 29 SNMP community string default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

28 Tables

320985-A

Table 30 Open Device dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Table 31 Menu bar commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Table 32 Toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Table 33 Selecting multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Table 34 Port color codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Table 35 Switch unit shortcut menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Table 36 Port shortcut menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Table 37 Device Manager buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Table 38 Types of statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Table 39 Graph dialog box buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Table 40 Help file locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Table 41 Main headings and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Table 42 Menu icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Table 43 Page icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Table 44 Switch Information page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Table 45 Stack Information page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Table 46 Stack Numbering Setting page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Table 47 IP Configuration/Setup screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Table 48 SNMP Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Table 49 System Characteristics screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Table 51 Renumber Stack Units screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Table 52 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Table 53 Software Download screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Table 54 Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Table 55 Parameters not saved to the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Table 56 ASCII Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Table 57 Autosave Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Table 58 ip address command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Table 59 no ip address command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Table 60 ip default-gateway command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Table 61 show ip command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Table 62 show ip address command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Table 63 ip address unit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Table 64 no ip address unit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Tables 29


Table 65 default ip address unit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . 259

Table 66 ping command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Table 67 ping command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Table 68 ip name-server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Table 69 no ip name-server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Table 70 ip domain-name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Table 71 configure network command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Table 72 copy running-config tftp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . 270

Table 73 terminal command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Table 74 show cli command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Table 75 boot command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Table 76 ip bootp server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Table 77 tftp-server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Table 78 copy config tftp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Table 79 copy tftp config command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Table 80 cmd-interface command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Table 81 banner command parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Table 82 show banner command parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Table 83 show interfaces command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Table 84 show interfaces config command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . 285

Table 85 sntp server primary address command parameters and variables . . . . . 291

Table 86 sntp server secondary address command parameters and variables . . 292

Table 87 no sntp server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Table 88 sntp sync-interval command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Table 89 clock time-zone command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Table 90 clock summer-time command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Table 91 lldp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Table 92 default lldp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Table 93 lldp port config notification command parameters and variables . . . . . . 302

Table 94 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables . . . . 303

Table 95 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables . . . . 303

Table 96 lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Table 97 no lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Table 98 default lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Table 99 lldp port status command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

30 Tables

320985-A

Table 100 no lldp port status command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Table 101 default lldp port status command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . 307

Table 102 show lldp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Table 103 show lldp port command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Table 104 blink-leds command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Table 105 download command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Table 106 shutdown [port <portlist>] command parameters and variables . . . . . . 320

Table 107 no shutdown command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Table 108 name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Table 109 no name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Table 110 default name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Table 111 speed command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Table 112 default speed command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Table 113 duplex command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Table 114 default duplex command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Table 115 flowcontrol command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Table 116 no flowcontrol command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Table 117 default flowcontrol command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Table 118 rate-limit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Table 119 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Table 120 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Table 121 auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Table 122 no auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Table 123 default auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Table 124 Unit tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Table 125 Rate Limit tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Table 126 Globals tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Table 127 Addresses tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Table 128 ARP tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Table 129 System tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Table 130 Base Unit Info tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Table 131 Stack Info tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Table 132 Agent tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Table 133 Power Supply tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Table 134 Fan tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Tables 31


Table 135 FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Table 136 ASCII Config File tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Table 137 SNTP dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Table 138 Topology tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Table 139 Topology Table tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Table 140 Interface tab fields for a single port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Table 142 System Information page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Table 143 Items on the Quick Start page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Table 144 IP page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Table 145 System page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Table 146 Port Management page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Table 147 High Speed Flow Control page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Table 148 Software Download page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Table 149 LED Indications during the software download process . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Table 150 Ascii Configuration file download page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Table 151 Configuration File Setting items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Table 152 Parameters not saved to the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Table 153 Console/Communication Port page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Table 154 Rate Limiting page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Table 155 Corrective actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Table 156 1000BASE-SFP models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Table 157 Nortel CWDM SFP transceiver list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Table 158 Technical specifications for 1000BASE-SX, and 1000BASE-LX SFPs . 417

Table 159 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Table 160 1000BASE-LX SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Table 161 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Table 162 CWDM SFP (70 km) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Table 163 CWDM SFP (40 km) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Table 164 RJ-45 port connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Table 165 DB-9 Console port connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Table 166 Pin descriptions for 1000Base-T pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Table 167 Factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Table 168 CLI command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Table 169 Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

32 Tables

320985-A

Table 170 Electrical parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Table 171 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Table 172 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Table 173 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Table 174 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

33


Preface

This guide provides information about configuring and managing basic switching features on the Nortel Ethernet Switch 325 and Nortel Ethernet Switch 425.

This guide describes the features of the following Nortel switches.

• Nortel Ethernet Switch 325-24T

• Nortel Ethernet Switch 325-24G



The term “Ethernet Switch 325/425” is used in this document to describe the features common to the switches mentioned above.

The term “Ethernet Switch 325” is used to describe features of the Ethernet Switch 325-24G and Ethernet Switch 325-24T collectively.

Similarly the term “Ethernet Switch 425” is used to describe the features of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and the Ethernet Switch 425-48T collectively.

A switch is referred to by its specific name while describing a feature exclusive to the switch.

You can use the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and the Ethernet Switch 425-48T in the standalone and stack configuration mode. The Ethernet Switch 325 operates only in the standalone mode.

34 Preface

320985-A

Before you begin

This guide is intended for network administrators who have the following background:

• basic knowledge of networks, Ethernet bridging, and IP routing

• familiarity with networking concepts and terminology

• basic knowledge of network topologies

Text conventions

This guide uses the following text conventions:

angle brackets (< >) Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets. Do not type the brackets when entering the command.Example: If the command syntax isping <ip_address>, you enterping 192.32.10.12

bold body text Indicates objects such as window names, dialog box names, and icons, as well as user interface objects such as buttons, tabs, and menu items.

braces ({}) Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where there is more than one option. You must choose only one of the options. Do not type the braces when entering the command.Example: If the command syntax isshow ip {alerts|routes}, you must enter eithershow ip alerts or show ip routes, but not both.

brackets ([ ]) Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions. Do not type the brackets when entering the command.Example: If the command syntax isshow ip interfaces [-alerts], you can entereither show ip interfaces or show ip interfaces -alerts.

Preface 35


Related publications

For more information about using the Ethernet Switch 325/425, refer to the following publications:

• Release Notes for the Nortel Ethernet Switch 325/425, Software Release 3.6 (217155-C)

Documents important changes about the software and hardware that are not covered in other related publications.

• Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

Describes how to configure Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN), Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), and MultiLink Trunk (MLT) features for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.

italic text Indicates variables in command syntax descriptions. Also indicates new terms and book titles. Where a variable is two or more words, the words are connected by an underscore.Example: If the command syntax isshow at <valid_route>, valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it.

plain Courier text

Indicates command syntax and system output, for example, prompts and system messages.Example: Set Trap Monitor Filters

separator ( > ) Shows menu paths. Example: Protocols > IP identifies the IP command on the Protocols menu.

vertical line ( | ) Separates choices for command keywords and arguments. Enter only one of the choices. Do not type the vertical line when entering the command.Example: If the command syntax isshow ip {alerts|routes}, you enter eithershow ip alerts or show ip routes, but notboth.

36 Preface

320985-A

• Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A)

Describes how to configure and manage Quality of Service and IP Filtering features for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.

• Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

Describes how to configure and manage security for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.

• System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

Describes how to configure system logging and network monitoring, and how to display system statistics for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.

• Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A)

Describes how to configure IP Multicast Routing Protocol features for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.

You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free, directly from Internet. Go to www.nortel.com/support. Find the product for which you need documentation. Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product. Use Adobe* Reader* to open the manuals and release notes, search for the sections you need, and print them on most standard printers. Go to www.adobe.com to download a free copy of Adobe Reader.

How to get help

This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.

Getting help from the Nortel web site

The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support web site:

www.nortel.com/support

http://www.nortel.com/support

http://www.adobe.com


Preface 37


This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products. More specifically, the site enables you to:

• download software, documentation, and product bulletins

• search the Technical Support web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues

• sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment

• open and manage technical support cases

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller

If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.

Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center

If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support web site, and have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center.

In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).

Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the phone number for your region:

www.nortel.com/callus

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code

An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel products and services. When you use an ERC, your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to:

www.nortel.com/erc

http://www.nortel.com/callus

http://www.nortel.com/erc

38 Preface

320985-A

39


Chapter 1About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

This chapter provides an introduction to the Ethernet switch software release 3.6. This version of the Ethernet switch software supports the following devices:

• Ethernet Switch 325

• Ethernet Switch 425

This chapter describes the hardware components and features of the Ethernet Switch 325/425, and covers the following topics:

• “New features in software release 3.6”

• “Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 325” on page 57

• “Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 425” on page 67

• “Network configuration examples” on page 83

• “Stack operation” on page 87

New features in software release 3.6

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 provides wire-speed switching for high-performance, low-cost connections to full-duplex and half-duplex 10/100/1000 Mb/s Ethernet Local Area Networks (LANs).

The following is the list of new features introduced in the Ethernet Switch 325/425 software release 3.6.

• “Link Layer Discovery Protocol (IEEE 802.1ab)” on page 40

• “Ethernet Switch 425-48T stacking support” on page 44

• “Username and password enhancement” on page 44

40 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

320985-A

• “Radius password fallback enhancement” on page 45

• “SNMP trap port enhancement” on page 46

• “EAPoL with Guest VLAN” on page 46

• “shutdown command” on page 46

• “reload command” on page 47

• “show mac-address-table enhancement” on page 48

• “restore factory-default command” on page 48

• “Ping enhancement” on page 49

• “show interfaces config command” on page 49

• “Autosave enable/disable enhancement” on page 49

• “Download without reset” on page 50

• “write memory and save config commands” on page 50

• “Daylight savings time enhancement” on page 50

• “BootP when needed as default” on page 51

• “VLAN tagging enhancement” on page 51

• “VLAN Configuration Control” on page 52

• “Port mirroring configuration rules” on page 53

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (IEEE 802.1ab)

Release 3.6 software supports the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) (IEEE 802.1ab), which allows stations connected to a LAN to advertise their capabilities to each other, enabling the discovery of physical topology information for network management. LLDP-compatible stations can consist of any interconnection device including PCs, IP Phones, switches, and routers. Each LLDP station stores LLDP information in a standard Management Information Base (MIB), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a network management system (NMS) or application.

Each LLDP station:

• advertises connectivity and management information about the local station to adjacent stations on the same 802 LAN (802.3 Ethernet with Ethernet Switches 325 and 425).

Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 41


• receives network management information from adjacent stations on the same LAN.

LLDP also makes it possible to discover certain configuration inconsistencies or malfunctions that can result in impaired communications at higher layers. For example, it can be used to discover duplex mismatches between an IP Phone and the connected switch.

LLDP is compatible with IETF PROTO MIB (IETF RFC 2922).

Figure 1 shows an example of how LLDP works in a network.

Figure 1 LLDP — how it works

1 The Ethernet Switch and router advertise chassis/port IDs and system descriptions to each other.

2 The devices store the information about each other in local MIB databases, accessible using SNMP.

3 A network management system retrieves the data stored by each device and builds a network topology map.

TM

Ethernet Switch 425

IP PhoneManagement Workstation

Router 1

33

22


320985-A

LLDP operational modes

LLDP is a one-way protocol. An LLDP agent can transmit information about the capabilities and current status of the system associated with its MAC service access point (MSAP) identifier. The LLDP agent can also receive information about the capabilities and current status of the system associated with a remote MSAP identifier. However, LLDP agents cannot solicit information from each other.

You can set the local LLDP agent to transmit only, receive only, or to both transmit and receive LLDP information. You can configure the state for LLDP reception and transmission using SNMP or CLI commands.

Connectivity and management information

The information fields in each LLDP frame are contained in a Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Unit (LLDPDU) as a sequence of short, variable length, information elements known as TLVs (type, length, value).

Each LLDPDU includes the following four mandatory TLVs:

• Chassis ID TLV

• Port ID TLV

• Time To Live TLV

• End Of LLDPDU TLV

The chassis ID and the port ID values are concatenated to form a logical MSAP identifier that is used by the recipient to identify the sending LLDP agent and port.

A non-zero value in the Time to Live (TTL) field of the TTL TLV indicates to the receiving LLDP agent how long the LLDPDU information from the MSAP identifier remains valid. All LLDPDU information is automatically discarded by the receiving LLDP agent if the sender fails to update it in a timely manner. A zero value in TTL field of Time To Live TLV tells the receiving LLDP agent to discard the information associated with the LLDPDU MSAP identifier.



In addition to the four mandatory TLVs, Release 3.6 software supports the basic management TLV set. You can specify which of these optional TLVs to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs for each port.

The optional management TLVs are as follows:

• Port Description TLV

• System Name TLV

• System Description TLV

• System Capabilities TLV (indicates both the system supported capabilities and enabled capabilities, such as end station, bridge, or router)

• Management Address TLV

Transmitting LLDPDUs

When a transmit cycle is initiated, the LLDP manager extracts the managed objects from the LLDP local system MIB and formats this information into TLVs. The TLVs are then inserted into the LLDPDU.

LLDPDU are regularly transmitted at a user-configurable transmit interval (tx-delay), or when any of the variables contained in the LLPDU is modified on the local system (such as system name or management address). Tx-delay is the minimum delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions.

TLV system MIBs

The LLDP local system MIB stores the information for constructing the various TLVs to be sent. The LLDP remote systems MIB stores the information received from remote LLDP agents.

LLDPDU and TLV error handling

LLDPDUs and TLVs that contain detectable errors are discarded. TLVs that are not recognized, but that also contain no basic format errors, are assumed to be validated and are stored for possible later retrieval by network management.


320985-A

Configuring LLDP using the CLI

For information about configuring LLDP using the CLI, refer to “Configuring LLDP using the CLI” on page 300.

Ethernet Switch 425-48T stacking support

With Release 3.6 software, the Ethernet Switch 425-48T can be stacked together with the Ethernet Switch 425-24T up to eight units high. You can stack the units using the Ethernet Switch 425 stack cables, which are available in 30 cm (1 foot) and 1 m (3 foot) lengths. These cables can be ordered separately (order number AL2018005 and AL2018006, respectively).

For more information about stacking the Ethernet Switch 425-48T and Ethernet Switch 425-24T devices, see “Stack operation” on page 87.

Username and password enhancement

With Release 3.6 software, you can use the CLI to set usernames as well as passwords for system access through the Console Interface, CLI, Telnet, and Web-based management. The syntax for the new username command is:

username <username> <password> [ro|rw]

Note: With Release 3.6 software, the Ethernet Switches 425-24T and 425-48T have stacking enabled by default, which means that ports 26 and 50, respectively, are disabled by default. This is because the cascade port shares resources with port 26 on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and port 50 on the Ethernet Switch 425-48T. Either the cascade port can be active, or port 26 or 50 can be active. If you want to use port 26 or port 50 in standalone mode, disable stacking and reboot the switch.



If you set a password using the cli password command, the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen, or the Password Setting Web-based management page, the next time you log in to the switch, you are prompted to enter a valid username. Therefore, ensure you are aware of the valid usernames (default RW and RO) before you change passwords.

For more information, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

Radius password fallback enhancement

With Release 3.6 software, you can configure RADIUS password fallback as an option when you use RADIUS authentication for login and password.

When RADIUS password fallback is enabled and the RADIUS server is unavailable or unreachable, you can use the local switch or stack password to log in to the switch or stack.

When RADIUS password fallback is disabled, you must specify the RADIUS username and password from the NetLogin screen. You cannot log in to the switch or stack unless the RADIUS server is configured and reachable in order to authenticate the login and password.

The Radius password fallback feature is disabled by default.

You can use the Console Interface or the radius-server password fallback CLI command to enable this feature.

For more information, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).


320985-A

SNMP trap port enhancement

The SNMP trap port enhancement allows you to configure the SNMP trap port. The default SNMP trap port used for communicating with the trap receiver is port 162. You can now configure a different SNMP trap port using the following CLI command:

snmp-server host <host-ip> [port <1-65535>] {<community-string>|v2c <community-string>| v3 {auth|no-auth|auth-priv} <username>}

For more information, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

EAPoL with Guest VLAN

Prior to Release 3.6, EAP (802.1x) Authentication supported Port Based User Access. At any time, only one user (MAC) could be authenticated on a port, and the port could be assigned to only one Port-based VLAN. Only the MAC address of the device/user that completed the EAP negotiations on the port had access to that port for traffic. Any tagging of ingress packets would be to the PVID of that port. This remains the default configuration.

With Software Release 3.6, EAP also allows Guest VLANs to be configured for access to that port. Any active VLAN can be made a Guest VLAN.

For more information, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

shutdown command

The shutdown CLI command allows you to safely shut down and power off the switch. Once the shutdown command is initiated, the switch saves the current configuration, allowing you to power off the switch within the specified time period (1 to 60 minutes). If the switch is not powered off within the allotted time, the switch performs a reset.



For more information, see “shutdown command for the unit” on page 134.

reload command

The reload CLI command provides you with a configuration rollback mechanism to prevent loss of connectivity to a switch, typically for remote configurations. The reload command allows you to temporarily disable the autosave feature for a specified time period (1 to 60 minutes), allowing you to make a number of configuration changes on remote switches without affecting the current saved configuration.

During the interval in which the autosave feature is disabled by the reload command, you must use the copy config nvram, write mem, or save config command to force a manual save of your configurations.

Once the reload timer expires, the switch reloads the last saved configuration. To abort the switch reload before the timer expires, you must enter the reload cancel command.

The reload command provides you with a safeguard against any misconfigurations when you perform dynamic configuration changes on a remote switch.

The following example describes how you can use the reload command to prevent connectivity loss to a remote switch.

1 Enter the CLI command reload force 30. This instructs the switch to reboot in 30 minutes, loading the configuration from NVRAM.

During this 30-minute period, autosave of the configuration to NVRAM is disabled.

2 Execute dynamic switch configuration commands, which take effect immediately. These configurations are not saved to NVRAM.


320985-A

3 If the configurations cause no problems and switch connectivity is maintained, you can perform the following:

a Save the current running configuration using the copy config nvram, write mem, or save config command.

b Since the new configuration is working properly, cancel the reload using the reload cancel command.

If you make an error when performing configurations in Step 2 that results in the loss of switch connectivity (for example, an error in the IP address mask, MLT configuration, or VLAN trunking), the reload command provides you with a safeguard: when the reload timer expires, the switch reboots to the last saved configuration, and connectivity is re-established. Therefore, you do not have to travel to the remote site to reconfigure the switch.

For more information, see “reload command” on page 136.

show mac-address-table enhancement

The show mac-address-table CLI command provides the following new parameters: include/exclude <pattern>. These new parameters allow you to filter the results of the command by displaying only those entries in the address table that include or exclude the specified pattern. The value for <pattern> must be a sequence of 1 to 6 bytes in hex, separated by dashes, for example:

show mac-address-table port 1/1-5 address include 00-0E-45-23

For more information, see “show mac-address-table command” on page 144.

restore factory-default command

The restore factory-default CLI command resets the switch or stack back to its default configuration.

The syntax for the restore factory-default command is:



restore factory-default [-y]

where the [-y] parameter instructs the switch not to prompt for confirmation.

For more information, refer to “Resetting the switch to default configuration” on page 261.

Ping enhancement

Release 3.6 software extends the ping capabilities of the device. Using the CLI, you can now specify additional ping parameters, including the number of ICMP packets to be sent, the packet size, the interval between packets, and the timeout. You can also set ping to continuous, or you can set a debug flag to obtain extra debug information.

For more information, see “Pinging” on page 259.

show interfaces config command

The show interfaces config CLI command displays the current operational status of interfaces and provides supplementary information about the current port settings for Spanning Tree Protocol.

For more information, see “show interfaces config command” on page 284.

Autosave enable/disable enhancement

Release 3.6 software extends the ability to set autosave enable/disable using the Console Interface (Configuration File > Autosave Configuration) and Web-based management (Configuration > Configuration File).


320985-A

Download without reset

The download without reset enhancement allows you to download diagnostic and image software to the switch without the switch performing an automatic reset. Once the software is downloaded, you must initiate a manual reset to load the new diagnostic and software images.

For more information, see “Software Download screen” on page 237 and “download command” on page 316.

write memory and save config commands

Release 3.6 software provides two additional CLI commands to save the switch configuration to NVRAM. The write memory and save config commands function identically to the copy config nvram command.

For more information, see the following:

• “write memory command” on page 286

• “save config command” on page 286

Daylight savings time enhancement

SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) for all time synchronizations so it is not affected by different time zones. With Release 3.6 software, you can use the following commands to set the switch to report the correct time for your local time zone and for daylight savings time:

• “clock time-zone” on page 294

• “no clock time-zone” on page 295

• “clock summer-time” on page 295

• “no clock summer-time” on page 296

• “show clock time-zone” on page 296

• “show clock summer-time” on page 296



BootP when needed as default

With Release 3.6 software, the default operational mode for BootP on the switch or stack is now BootP when needed. By default, the switch or stack attempts to use BootP if no management address is configured.

VLAN tagging enhancement

Release 3.6 software provides additional options for VLAN port tagging. Rather than setting a port to untagged or tagged mode, you can now also choose to enable or disable PVID tagging.

Table 1 summarize the new tagging options.

The additional options are available using only the Console Interface VLAN Port Configuration screen or the vlan ports CLI command. For more information, refer to Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A).

Table 1 VLAN Tagging mode definitions

Tagging mode Definition

PVID Tagging Non-PVID Tagging

Untag All (Untagged Access) Disabled Disabled

Tag All (Tagged Trunk) Enabled Enabled

Tag PVID Only Enabled Disabled

Untag PVID Only Disabled Enabled


320985-A

VLAN Configuration Control

VLAN Configuration Control (VCC) is a new feature in Software Release 3.6 that allows a switch administrator to control how VLANs are modified. VLAN Configuration Control is a superset of the existing AutoPVID functionality and incorporates this functionality for backwards compatibility. VLAN Configuration Control is globally applied to all VLANs on the switch.

VLAN Configuration Control offers four options for controlling VLAN modification:

1 Strict — This option restricts the addition of an untagged port to a VLAN if it is already a member of another VLAN. To add an untagged port to a new VLAN, the switch administrator must remove the port from all other VLANs of which it is a member of before adding it to the new VLAN. The PVID of the port will be changed to the new VID to which it was added.

2 Automatic — This option automatically adds an untagged port to a new VLAN and automatically removes it from any previous VLAN membership. The PVID of the port is automatically changed to the VID of the VLAN it joins. Since the port is first added to the new VLAN and then removed from any previous membership, the Spanning Tree Group participation of the port will not be disabled as long as the VLANs involved are in the same Spanning Tree Group.

3 AutoPVID — This option functions in the same manner as previous AutoPVID functionality. When an untagged port is added to a new VLAN, the port is added to the new VLAN and the PVID assigned to the new VID without removing it from any previous VLAN memberships. Using this option an untagged port can have membership in multiple VLANs.

4 Flexible — This option functions in a similar manner to disabling AutoPVID functionality. When this option is used, there are no restrictions on the number of VLANs to which an untagged port can belong. Any new additions of an untagged port to a new VLAN does not change the PVID of that port.

1

Note: Strict is the factory default setting.



VLAN Configuration Control is only applied to ports with the tagging modes of Untag All and Tag PVID Only. Ports with the tagging modes of Tag All and Untag PVID Only are not governed by VLAN Configuration Control. Ports with the tagging modes of Tag All and Untag PVID Only can belong to multiple VLANs regardless of VLAN Configuration Control settings and must have their PVID manually changed.

For more information, refer to Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A).

Port mirroring configuration rules

Additional port mirroring configuration rules are available in System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A).

Other features

SFP GBIC Support on the Ethernet Switch 425

Small Form Factor Pluggable transceivers (SFPs) are hot-swappable input/output enhancement components designed for use with Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with other Gigabit Ethernet ports over various media types.

The Ethernet Switch 425 supports the following SFPs:

• 1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC)

• 1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: MT-RJ)

• 1000Base-LX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC)

• CWDM SFPs

For more information about the SFP GBICs see Appendix A, “Installing an SFP Transceiver,” on page 409.


320985-A

Flash memory storage

Switch software image storage

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 uses flash memory to store the switch software image. The flash memory allows you to update the software image with a newer version without changing the switch hardware (see “Software Download screen” on page 237). An in-band connection between the switch and the TFTP load host is required to download the software image.

Autosensing, and autonegotiation

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 is an autosensing and autonegotiating device:

• The term autosense refers to the ability of a port to sense the speed of an attached device.

• The term autonegotiation refers to a standardized protocol (IEEE 802.3u) that exists between two IEEE 802.3u-capable devices. Autonegotiation allows the switch to select the best of speed and duplex modes.

Autosensing is used when the attached device is not capable of autonegotiation or is using a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible with the IEEE 802.3u standard. In this case, since it is not possible to sense the duplex mode of the attached device, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 reverts to half-duplex mode.

When autonegotiation-capable devices are attached to the Ethernet Switch 325/425, the ports negotiate down from 100 Mb/s speed and full-duplex mode until the attached device acknowledges a supported speed and duplex mode.

For more information about autosensing and autonegotiation modes, see Chapter 13, “Troubleshooting,” on page 405.

RFCs

For more information about networking concepts, protocols, and topologies, consult the following RFCs:

• RFC 1213 (MIB-II)• RFC 1493 (Bridge MIB)



• RFC 1573 (Interface MIB)• RFC 1643 (Ethernet MIB)• RFC 1757 (RMON)• RFC 1271 (RMON)• RFC 1157 (SNMP)

Standards

The following IEEE Standards also contain information germane to the Ethernet Switch 325/425:

• IEEE 802.1D (Standard for Spanning Tree Protocol)• IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)• IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN Tagging)

BootP automatic IP configuration/MAC address

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 has a unique 48-bit hardware address, or MAC address, that is printed on a label on the back panel. You use this MAC address when you configure the network BootP server to recognize the Ethernet Switch 425-24T BootP requests. A properly configured BootP server enables the switch to automatically learn its assigned IP address, subnet mask, IP address of the default router (default gateway), and software image file name.

For information about a stack MAC address, see “Stack MAC address” on page 89.

For more information and an example of a BootP configuration file, see Appendix D, “Sample BootP configuration file,” on page 443.

Configuration and switch management

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 that is shipped directly from the factory is ready to operate in any 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX standard network.

You must assign an IP address to the switch or stack, depending on the mode of operation. You can set both addresses by using the console port or BootP, which resides on the switch. You can manage the switch using:


320985-A

• Console interface

The console interface allows you to configure and manage the switch locally or remotely. Access the CI menus and screens locally through a console terminal attached to the Ethernet Switch 325/425, remotely through a dial-up modem connection, or in-band through a Telnet session.

For information about the console interface, see Chapter 2, “Using the console interface,” on page 93.

• Command Line Interface (CLI)

The CLI is used to automate general management and configuration of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425. Use the CLI through a Telnet connection or through the serial port on the console. See Chapter 3, “CLI Basics,” on page 119 for more information.

• Java-based Device Manager

Device Manager is a Java-based set of graphical network management applications used to configure and manage an Ethernet Switch 325/425. See Chapter 4, “Getting Started with Device Manager,” on page 171 for more information.

• Web-based management

You can manage the network from the World Wide Web. Access the Web-based Graphical User Interface (GUI) through the Embedded Web Server (EWS), the HTML-based browser located on your network. The GUI allows you to configure, monitor, and maintain your network through Web browsers. You can also download software using the Web.

For information about Web-based management, refer to Chapter 5, “Using the Web-based management interface,” on page 199.

• Any generic SNMP-based network management software.

You can use any generic SNMP-based network management software to configure and manage an Ethernet Switch 325/425.

• Nortel Enterprise Policy Manager

The Nortel Enterprise Policy Manager (formerly Optivity Policy Services) allows you to configure the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 with a single system.



Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 325

Front panel

Figure 2 shows the front and side views of the Ethernet Switch 325.

Figure 2 Ethernet Switch 325-24G

Figure 3 shows the configuration of the front panel on the Ethernet Switch 325. Table 2 describes the components on the front panel.

Figure 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G front panel

UI

UI Set

2526

Spd: 10/100/1000T Act: Activity

LED Status - Amber:10Mps Green:100 Mps Blink:Activity

UI Cmd

Pwr

Console

Spd Act Spd Act

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

LED Status - Off:Half Duplex Green:Full Duplex

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Ethernet Switch 325-24G

31 42

11108ER



320985-A

Table 2 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 switch front panel

Console port

The Console port allows you to access the Console Interface (CI) screens and customize your network using the console menu and screens. For more information on using the Console Interface see Chapter 2, “Using the console interface,” on page 93.

The Console port is a DB-9, RS-232-D male serial port connector. You can use this connector to connect a management station, console, or terminal to the Ethernet Switch 325 by using a straight-through DB-9 to DB-9 standard serial port cable. You must use a VT100/ANSI-compatible terminal (for cursor control and to enable cursor and functions keys) to use the console port.

The default settings of the Console port are:

• 9600 baud with eight data bits

• One stop bit

• No parity as the communications format

• Flow control set to disabled

Item Description

1 UI button

2 1000T Connectors (not available with Ethernet Switch 325-24T)

3 Port connectors

4 Console port

Note: 1000T connectors are not available for the Ethernet Switch 325-24T.

Note: The console port is configured as a Data Communications Equip-ment (DCE) connector. Ensure that your RS-232 cable pinouts are con-figured for DCE connections. For more information see Appendix B, “Connectors and pin assignments,” on page 425.



Port connectors

The Ethernet Switch 325 uses 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connectors.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port connectors are configured as MDI-X (Media Dependent Interface-crossover). These ports are connected by straight cables to the Network Interface Card (NIC) in a node or a server, similar to a conventional Ethernet repeater hub. If you are connecting to an Ethernet hub or Ethernet switch, use a crossover cable unless an MDI connection exists on the associated port of the attached device (For more information see Appendix B, “Connectors and pin assignments,” on page 425).

The Ethernet Switch 325 uses autosensing ports designed to operate at 10 Mb/s (megabits per second) or at 100 Mb/s, depending on the connecting device. These ports support the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiation standard, which means that when a port is connected to another device which also supports the IEEE 802.3u standard, the two devices negotiate the best speed and duplex mode.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX switch ports also support half- and full-duplex mode operation.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 switch ports can connect to 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s Ethernet segments or nodes.

For more information on RJ-45 port connectors see Appendix B, “Connectors and pin assignments,” on page 425 for more information.

LED display panel

Figure 4 shows the LED display panel of the Ethernet Switch 325-24G. See Table 3 for a description of the LEDs.

Note: Use only Category 5 copper Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable connections when connecting 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports.


320985-A

Figure 4 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED display panel

Table 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED descriptions

Label Color/Status Meaning

Link/Activity Green Station connected at 100 Mbps.

Amber Station connected at 10 Mbps.

Green/Flashing Traffic activity at 100 Mbps.

Amber/Flashing Traffic activity at 10 Mbps.

Off No link/No traffic.

Half/Full Duplex

Green Full duplex

Off Half duplex connection.

UI Set Button The UI Set button is used to reset the switch without a console connection.

UI Green/Flashing Indicates the switch is in cmd mode.

Green ON for about 3 seconds when executing a cmd, then goes OFF.

Off The UI LED should be off, unless active.

UI Cmd Off Normally off.

Green/blinking The UI Cmd LED blinks once each time the UI Set button is pressed, and while the UI LED is blinking.

Pwr Green Power on.

Off Unit not connected to a power source.

UI

UI Set

2526

T: 1000T A: Activity


UI Cmd

Pwr

T A T A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

LED Status - Off:HalD



Back panel

The back panel of the Ethernet Switch 325-24T is shown in Figure 5. Table 4 describes the components on the back panel.

Figure 5 Ethernet Switch 325-24T back panel

Cooling fans

Two cooling fans are located on one side of the Ethernet Switch 325 to provide cooling for the internal components. (See Figure 2 on page 57). When you install the switch, be sure to allow enough space on both sides of the switch for adequate ventilation. For more information on installing the Ethernet Switch 325, see Installing the Nortel Ethernet Switch 325 (217149-B).

T Green/steady This port is set to operate at 1000 Mb/s, and the link is good.

Amber/steady Station connected at 10/100 Mb/s.

Off No link on Copper uplink port.

A Green/blinking Indicates activity on link.

Off No activity on the link.

Table 4 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 back panel

Item Description

1 AC power receptacle

Table 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED descriptions (continued)

Label Color/Status Meaning

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

11110EA

1


320985-A

AC power receptacle

The AC power receptacle accepts the AC power cord which is supplied with the switch. For installation outside North America, make sure that you have the proper power cord for your region. Any cord used must have a CEE-22 standard V female connector on one end and must meet the IEC 320-030 specifications. Table 5 lists specifications for international power cords.

Table 5 International power cord specifications

Country/Plug description Specifications Typical plug

Continental Europe:

• CEE7 standard VII male plug

• Harmonized cord (HAR marking on the outside of the cord jacket to comply with the CENELEC Harmonized Document HD-21)

220 or 230 VAC 50 Hz Single phase

U.S./Canada/Japan:

• NEMA5-15P male plug

• UL recognized (UL stamped on cord jacket)

• CSA certified (CSA label secured to the cord)

100 or 120 VAC 50–60 Hz Single phase

228FA

227FA



United Kingdom:

• BS1363 male plug with fuse

• Harmonized cord

240 VAC 50 Hz Single phase

Australia:AS3112-1981 Male plug


Caution: Please read immediately.Inspect the power cord and determine if it provides the proper plug and is appropriately certified for use with your electrical system. Immediately discard this power cord if it is inappropriate for your country's electrical system and obtain the proper cord as required by your national electrical codes or ordinances.

Refer to this product's technical documentation for detailed installation procedures to be followed by qualified service personnel.

Table 5 International power cord specifications (continued)


229FA

230FA


320985-A

Vorsicht: Bitte sofort lesen.

Sehen Sie nach, ob dieses Netzkabel über den richtigen Stecker verfügt und für die Verwendung in Ihrem Stromversogungsnetz zertifiziert ist. Falls dieses Kabel nicht für das Stromversorgungsnetz in Ihrem Land geeignet ist, darf es nicht verwendet werden. Besorgen Sie sich ein Kabel, das die Vorschriften der Zulassungsbehörden in Ihrem Land erfüllt.

Die technische Dokumentation dieses Produkts enthält ausführliche Installationsanweisungen, die nur von qualifiziertem Kundendienstpersonal ausgeführt werden dürfen.

Attention: Lisez ceci immédiatement.

Examinez ce cordon d'alimentation pour déterminer s'il dispose de la fiche appropriée et s'il est bien agréé pour utilisation sur votre installation électrique. Débarrassez-vous en immédiatement s'il ne convient pas à l'utilisation sur le secteur électrique en usage dans votre pays et procurez-vous un cordon conforme à la réglementation nationale en vigueur.

Reportez-vous à la documentation technique de ce produit pour obtenir des instructions détaillées d'installation, destinées à un technicien qualifié.

Attenzione: Leggere attentamente.

Controllare questo cavo di alimentazione, verificarne il collegamento con la presa appropriata nonché la certificazione per l'uso nell'impianto elettrico posseduto. Non utilizzare assolutamente in caso tale cavo non sia adatto al sistema elettrico del paese in cui viene utilizzato e richiederne un altro certificato dall'ente nazionale di fornitura elettrica.

Per le procedure di installazione che devono essere seguite dal personale di servizio, consultare questa documentazione tecnica del prodotto.



Advertencia: Sírvase leer inmediatamente.

Inspeccione este cable de alimentación eléctrica y determine si viene con el enchufe apropiado y está debidamente certificado para el uso con su sistema eléctrico. Si no cumple con los reglamentos del sistema eléctrico de su país, despójese de este cable de alimentación inmediatamente y obtenga el cable requerido, según las ordenanzas y códigos eléctricos nacionales.

Refiérase a la documentación técnica de este producto para recibir información detallada sobre los procedimientos que el personal calificado de reparaciones deberá seguir.

Caution:

Warning: Removal of the power cord is the only way to turn off power to this device. The power cord must always be connected in a location that can be accessed quickly and safely in case of an emergency.

Vorsicht: Die Stromzufuhr zu diesem Gerät kann nur durch Ziehen des Netzstromkabels unterbrochen werden. Die Netzsteckdose, an die das Netzstromkabel angeschlossen ist, muß sich stets an einem Ort befinden, der bei einem Notfall schnell und einfach zugänglich ist.


320985-A

Avertissement: Le débranchement du cordon d'alimentation constitue le seul moyen de mettre cet appareil hors tension. Le cordon d'alimentation doit donc toujours être branché dans une prise accessible pour faciliter la mise hors tension en cas d'urgence.

Advertencia: La única forma de desconectar la alimentación de este dispositivo es desenchufar el cable de alimentación. El cable de alimentación siempre debe estar conectado en una ubicación que permita acceder al cable de forma rápida y segura en caso de emergencia.

Avvertenza: Estrarre il cavo di alimentazione è l'unico sistema per spegnere il dispositivo. Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere sempre collegato in una posiz-ione che permetta l'accesso facile e sicuro in caso di emergenza.



Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 425

Figure 6 shows the front and side views of the Ethernet Switch 425.

Figure 6 Ethernet Switch 425

Front panel

Figure 7 shows the configuration of the front panel on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T.

Figure 7 Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel

Table 6 describes the components on the front panel.

11107FA

TM

BaseUI

UI Set

2526

M:MGBIC A:ActivityT:1000T

M


GBK/Stack Up

Pwr Down

Console

TMT A M T A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

41 52

3 11108EA


320985-A

Table 6 Components of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel

User Interface button

The User Interface (UI) button on the Ethernet Switch 425 provides easy-to-use features for stacking configuration.

You can perform the following tasks using the User Interface button on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T:

• “Setting the unit as the Base Unit” on page 69

• “Setting the unit as the non-base unit” on page 69

• “Setting the unit as a standalone unit” on page 70

• “Resetting the stack” on page 70

• “Resetting the unit” on page 70

• “Setting the default IP address” on page 72

Item Description

1 UI button

2 10/100/1000BaseT (copper) port 25 and 26

3 Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) ports 25 and 26

4 10/100BaseT ports 1 to 24

5 Console port

Note: With Release 3.6 software, the Ethernet Switches 425-24T and 425-48T have stacking enabled by default, which means that ports 26 and 50, respectively, are disabled by default. This is because the cascade port shares resources with port 26 on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and port 50 on the Ethernet Switch 425-48T. Either the cascade port can be active, or port 26 or 50 can be active. If you want to use port 26 or port 50 in standalone mode, disable stacking and reboot the switch.

Note: On the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and 425-48T, the User Interface button allows you to reset the unit.



Setting the unit as the Base Unit

To set the unit as the Base Unit with the UI button:

1 Press the UI button and hold in for three seconds.

The unit is now in the Configuration mode, and the color and status of the UI LED turns green blinking.

2 Press the UI button once.

The Base LED turns on, and the Up and Down LEDs are steady green to indicate that the button press was recognized.

3 Press the UI button and hold it for three seconds to confirm the command.

The color and status of the UI LED returns to green once the command has been accepted.

If the command is rejected, the UI LED turns amber blinking.

Setting the unit as the non-base unit

To set the unit as a non-base unit using the UI button:

1 Press the UI button and hold it for three seconds.

The unit will now be in the Configuration mode, and the color and status of the UI LED turns green blinking.

2 Press the UI button twice.

The Base LED will be off, and the Up and Down LEDs are steady green.


Note: Changing the Base Unit does not take effect until you restart the system.


320985-A

The color and status of the UI LED returns to steady green once the command has been accepted. If the command is rejected, the UI LED turns amber blinking.

Setting the unit as a standalone unit

To set the unit as a standalone unit using the UI button:

1 Press and hold the UI button until the UI LED displays the Green/blinking status.

2 Press the UI button 6 times.

3 Press the UI button and hold it for 3 seconds to confirm the command.

Resetting the stack

To reset the stack using the UI button:

1 Press the UI button and hold in for three seconds.

The unit is now in configuration mode, and the color and status of the UI LED turns green blinking.

2 Press the UI button three times.

The color and status of the Base, Down, and Up LEDs turn amber blinking.


Resetting the unit

To reset the unit at any time, with the UI button, do the following:

1 Press the UI button for 3 seconds. The switch operates in the Configuration mode. The UI LED turns green and will blink.

2 Press UI button 3 times.

Note: Changing the Base Unit does not take effect until you restart the system.



3 To confirm, keep the UI button pressed for 3 seconds more. The UI LED turns either to solid-green (command accepted) or to solid-amber (error). After another period (5 seconds) the UI LED turns Off.

Once the command is accepted, the new configuration is stored in NVRAM.

Table 7 describes the LED indications associated with the UI button.

Table 7 UI button LEDs on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T

Note: When resetting the unit using the UI button, wait 60 seconds after your last configuration change. The system takes up to 60 seconds to save configuration changes to NVRAM. You can reset the stack immediately after changing the configuration using the UI button without losing any of the changed configuration.

Label Color/Status Description

UI Green/blinking The user pushed the UI button and activated the front-panel configuration mode; the system is awaiting input.

Green/steady The system accepts the UI button input.

Amber/blinking The system rejected the UI button input.

Pwr Green Power on.

Amber/slow blinking The system will reset in < 3 seconds. To stop reset, release UI button.

Amber/fast blinking The system will reset in < 1 second. To stop reset, release UI button.

Base Green/steady The unit is the base unit for the stack.

Green/blinking The unit is in configuration mode using the UI button. The UI LED is also blinking green.

Amber The stack is reset using the UI button.

Off The switch is not the stack base unit, or it is operating in standalone mode.

Up Green/steady The unit is being set as base or non-base unit using the UI button—base unit has Base LED on as well.

Amber/blinking The stack is reset using the UI button.


320985-A

Aborting a command

To abort a command entered using the UI button, do one of the following actions:

• Wait for about 20 seconds after entering either the one-press (set to base unit) or the two-press (reset to base) and the input is ignored.

• Press the UI button 7 or more times, which exits the Configuration mode and does not change any settings on the switch.

Setting the default IP address

You can set a default IP address and subnet mask for the switch or stack by using the UI button on the front panel of the Ethernet Switch 425. You can also manage the switch or stack remotely by using a Default IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.192.168.

Depending on the mode of operation of the switch (standalone or stack) the default IP address is applied to the local unit or to the entire stack. When the Ethernet Switch 425-24T is operating in the stack mode, the UI button on the front panel on any unit of the stack can be used to set the default IP address. Ensure that you do not create duplicate IP addresses on the network.

Down Green/steady The unit is being set as base or non-base unit using the UI button — base unit has Base LED on as well.

Amber/blinking The stack is reset using the UI button.

Note: The UI button may be used at any time to change the In-Use IP address and subnet mask of the switch. It overrides the current In-use IP address and subnet mask, if any, regardless of the BootP mode settings for the switch or stack.

Label Color/Status Description



If the default IP configuration is set, any change to the configured IP address or subnet mask through the other user interfaces, will cause the In-use IP configuration of the switch or stack to change. Therefore, the newly configured IP address must be used to manage the switch or stack.

To set the default IP address and subnet mask, do the following:

1 Press the UI button and hold in for 3 seconds.

The unit is now in the Configuration mode. The color and status of the UI LED will turn green blinking.

2 Press the UI button five times.

The Base LED and the Up and Down LEDs will now be steady amber to indicate that the button press was recognized.

3 Press the UI button and hold in for 3 seconds to confirm the command.

The In-Use IP address will now be changed to 192.168.192.168. The color and status of the UI LED will turn to steady green once the command has been accepted. If the command is rejected, the UI LED turns amber blinking.

LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask

The LEDs on the front panel change color or display blinking signals to indicate that the In-Use configuration has changed.

If the unit is in a stack, only the LEDs of that unit will change color or blink. There will be no change in the LEDs of other units in the stack.

Note: If there is a change in the switch state, that is, if it joins or exits a stack after the default IP configuration is set, the In-Use IP configuration will change, and must be set again using the UI button.


320985-A

Table 8 describes the LED behavior at the time of setting the default IP address and subnet mask.

You cannot set the default IP address through the CLI, SNMP, Console, or WEB interface.

Console port

The Console port allows you to access the Console Interface (CI) screens and customize your network using the Console menu options and screens (see Chapter 2, “Using the console interface,” on page 93).

The Console port is a DB-9, RS-232-D male serial port connector. You can use this connector to connect a management station or console/terminal to the Ethernet Switch 425 by using a straight-through DB-9 to DB-9 standard serial port cable. You must use a VT100/ANSI-compatible terminal (for cursor control and to enable cursor and functions keys) to use the Console port.

The Console port default settings are:


• One stop bit


Table 8 UI button LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask

Label Color/Status Status Description

UI Green Blinking The UI button has been pushed. The front panel configuration mode has been activated. The system is awaiting input.

Steady The input has been accepted

Amber Blinking The input has been rejected

Base Amber Steady The default IP address and subnet mask for this unit or stack has been set to 192.168.192.168.

Note: The Console port is configured as a Data Communications Equipment (DCE) connector. Ensure that your RS-232 cable pinouts are configured for DCE connections (see Appendix B, “Connectors and pin assignments,” on page 425).



• Flow control set to disabled.

Gigabit Interface Converter

SFP GBICs (Small Form Factor Pluggable Gigabit Interface Converters) are hot-swappable input/output enhancement components designed for use with Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with fiber optic networks.

Port connectors

The Ethernet Switch 425 uses 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connectors.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port connectors are configured as MDI-X (media-dependent interface-crossover). These ports are connected using straight cables to the NIC in a node or server, similar to a conventional Ethernet repeater hub. If you are connecting to an Ethernet hub or an Ethernet switch, use a crossover cable unless an MDI connection exists on the associated port of the attached device (see “Appendix B, “Connectors and pin assignments,” on page 425).

The Ethernet Switch 425 uses autosensing ports designed to operate at 10 Mb/s (megabits per second) or at 100 Mb/s, depending on the connecting device. These ports support the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiation standard, which means that when a port is connected to another device which also supports the IEEE 802.3u standard, the two devices negotiate at the best speed and duplex mode.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX switch ports also support half- and full-duplex mode operation.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 ports can connect to 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s Ethernet segments or nodes.

See Appendix B, “Connectors and pin assignments,” on page 425 for more information about the RJ-45 port connectors.

Note: Use only Category 5 copper Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable connections when connecting 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports.


320985-A

LED display panel

Figure 8 shows the Ethernet Switch 425 LED display panel.

Figure 8 Ethernet Switch 425 LED display panel

Table 9 describe the LEDs found in the Ethernet Switch 425.

Table 9 Ethernet Switch 425 LED descriptions

LabelCommand Status Color State Meaning

UI Power status Green Blinking Indicates the switch is in cmd mode.

On ON for about 3 seconds when executing a cmd, then goes OFF.

Off The UI LED should be off, unless active.

GBIC/Stack

Stack Mode Green On The switch is in standalone mode.

Off The switch is in stack mode.

Pwr Power status Green on DC power is available to the switch’s internal circuitry.

Off No AC power to switch or power supply failed.

Base Base mode Green on The switch is configured as the stack base unit.

Off The switch is not configured as the stack base unit (or is in standalone mode).

Amber Due to a stack error, the unit is unable to maintain the stack connection.

Up Stack mode Green Off The switch is in standalone mode.

On The switch is connected to the upstream unit.

Down Stack mode Green Off The switch is in standalone mode.

On The switch is connected to the downstream unit.

BaseUI

UI Set

2526

M:MGBIC A:ActivityT:1000T

M


GBK/StackUp

Pwr Down

T A M T A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

LED Status - Off:Half Duplex Green:FullDu

134



M (MGBIC)

Duplex Mode Green On This port has a good connection (fiber), and is configured to full duplex.

Off This port does not have a good connection (fiber), and port is configured to half duplex.

T (Copper) 10/100/1000 Link

10/100/1000 Mb/s port speed indicator

Green On This port has a good connection (copper - at 1000 Mbps).

Amber On This port has a good connection (copper - at 100 Mbps).

Amber/Green

On This port has a good connection (copper - at 10 Mbps).

Off Off This port does not have a good connection.

A (Activity)

Port activity Green Blinking Indicates network activity for the corresponding port. A high level of network activity can cause the LEDs to appear to be on continuously.

Table 9 Ethernet Switch 425 LED descriptions (continued)

LabelCommand Status Color State Meaning


320985-A

Back panel

Figure 9 shows the back panel of the Ethernet Switch 425.

Figure 9 Ethernet Switch 425 back panel

Table 10 describes the components on the back panel.

Cascade Up and Down connectors

The Cascade Up and Down connectors allow the Ethernet Switch 425 to be connected to the upstream unit’s Cascade Up connector, or to the downstream unit’s Cascade Down connector (see “Stack configurations” on page 89.)

Cooling fans

Two cooling fans are located on the side of the Ethernet Switch 425 to provide cooling for internal components. (See Figure 6 on page 67.) When you install the switch, ensure that there is adequate space on both sides of the switch for ventilation. For more information on installing the Ethernet Switch 425, see Installing the Ethernet Switch 425 (217150-B).

Table 10 Components on the Ethernet Switch 425 back panel

Item Description

1 AC power receptacle

2 Cascade Up and Down Connectors

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

Cascade

Down Up

11110EA

1 2



AC power receptacle

The AC power receptacle accepts the AC power cord which is supplied with the switch. For installation outside North America, make sure that you have the proper power cord for your region. Any cord used must have a CEE-22 standard V female connector on one end and must meet the IEC 320-030 specifications. Table 11 lists specifications for international power cords.

Table 11 International power cord specifications


Continental Europe:

• CEE7 standard VII male plug

• Harmonized cord (HAR marking on the outside of the cord jacket to comply with the CENELEC Harmonized Document HD-21)

220 or 230 VAC 50 Hz Single phase

U.S./Canada/Japan:

• NEMA5-15P male plug• UL recognized (UL stamped

on cord jacket)

• CSA certified (CSA label secured to the cord)

100 or 120 VAC 50–60 Hz Single phase

228FA

227FA


320985-A

United Kingdom:

• BS1363 male plug with fuse

• Harmonized cord


Australia:

AS3112-1981 Male plug


Caution: Please read immediately.

Inspect this power cord and determine if it provides the proper plug and is appropriately certified for use with your electrical system. Immediately discard this cord if it is inappropriate for your country's electrical system and obtain the proper cord as required by your national electrical codes or ordinances.

Refer to this product's technical documentation for detailed installation procedures to be followed by qualified service personnel.

Table 11 International power cord specifications (continued)


229FA

230FA



Vorsicht: Bitte sofort lesen.

Sehen Sie nach, ob dieses Netzkabel über den richtigen Stecker verfügt und für die Verwendung in Ihrem Stromversogungsnetz zertifiziert ist. Falls dieses Kabel nicht für das Stromversorgungsnetz in Ihrem Land geeignet ist, darf es nicht verwendet werden. Besorgen Sie sich ein Kabel, das die Vorschriften der Zulassungsbehörden in Ihrem Land erfüllt.

Die technische Dokumentation dieses Produkts enthält ausführliche Installationsanweisungen, die nur von qualifiziertem Kundendienstpersonal ausgeführt werden dürfen.

Attention: Lisez ceci immédiatement.

Examinez ce cordon d'alimentation pour déterminer s'il dispose de la fiche appropriée et s'il est bien agréé pour utilisation sur votre installation électrique. Débarrassez-vous en immédiatement s'il ne convient pas à l'utilisation sur le secteur électrique en usage dans votre pays et procurez-vous un cordon conforme à la réglementation nationale en vigueur.

Reportez-vous à la documentation technique de ce produit pour obtenir des instructions détaillées d'installation, destinées à un technicien qualifié.

Attenzione: Leggere attentamente.

Controllare questo cavo di alimentazione, verificarne il collegamento con la presa appropriata nonché la certificazione per l'uso nell'impianto elettrico posseduto. Non utilizzare assolutamente in caso tale cavo non sia adatto al sistema elettrico del paese in cui viene utilizzato e richiederne un altro certificato dall'ente nazionale di fornitura elettrica.

Per le procedure di installazione che devono essere seguite dal personale di servizio, consultare questa documentazione tecnica del prodotto.

Advertencia: Sírvase leer inmediatamente.

Inspeccione este cable de alimentación eléctrica y determine si viene con el enchufe apropiado y está debidamente certificado para el uso con su sistema eléctrico. Si no cumple con los reglamentos del sistema eléctrico de su país, despójese de este cable de alimentación inmediatamente y obtenga el cable requerido, según las ordenanzas y códigos eléctricos nacionales.

Refiérase a la documentación técnica de este producto para recibir información detallada sobre los procedimientos que el personal calificado de reparaciones deberá seguir.


320985-A

Caution:

Warning: Removal of the power cord is the only way to turn off power to this device. The power cord must always be connected in a location that can be accessed quickly and safely in case of an emergency.

Vorsicht: Die Stromzufuhr zu diesem Gerät kann nur durch Ziehen des Netzstromkabels unterbrochen werden. Die Netzsteckdose, an die das Netzstromkabel angeschlossen ist, muß sich stets an einem Ort befinden, der bei einem Notfall schnell und einfach zugänglich ist.

Avertissement: Le débranchement du cordon d'alimentation constitue le seul moyen de mettre cet appareil hors tension. Le cordon d'alimentation doit donc toujours être branché dans une prise accessible pour faciliter la mise hors tension en cas d'urgence.

Advertencia: La única forma de desconectar la alimentación de este dispositivo es desenchufar el cable de alimentación. El cable de alimentación siempre debe estar conectado en una ubicación que permita acceder al cable de forma rápida y segura en caso de emergencia.

Avvertenza: Estrarre il cavo di alimentazione è l'unico sistema per spegnere il dispositivo. Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere sempre collegato in una posizione che permetta l'accesso facile e sicuro in caso di emergenza.



Network configuration examples

This section provides network configuration examples using the Ethernet Switch 325/425. In these examples, the packet classification feature can be used to prioritize the traffic of the network to ensure uninterrupted traffic of critical applications. The examples are:

• “Desktop switch application”

• “Segment switch application” on page 85

• “High-density switched workgroup application” on page 86

Desktop switch application

Figure 10 and Figure 11 show the Ethernet Switch 325/425 used as a desktop switch. The desktop workstations are connected directly to switch ports.

Figure 10 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a desktop switch

Up to 24 usersToNetworkCenter

Key

10 Mb/s100 Mb/s1000 Mb/s

Ethernet 325-24G

10BASE-T hub

BeforeAfter


11112EA

- 23 users share 10 Mb/s (10/24 Mb/s per user)- Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth)

- 24 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth- Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwith

UI

UI Set

2526



UI Cmd

Pwr

Console


Spd Act Spd Act

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24


320985-A

Figure 11 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a desktop switch


Key

10 Mb/s100 Mb/s1000 Mb/s

Ethernet Switch 425-24T10BASE-T hub

Before After


11112EA

- 23 users share 10 Mb/s (10/24 Mb/s per user)- Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth)

- 24 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth- Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwith



Segment switch application

Figure 12 and Figure 13 show the Ethernet Switch 325/425 used as a segment switch to alleviate user contention for bandwidth and eliminate server and network bottlenecks. Before segmentation, 88 users had a total bandwidth of only 10 Mb/s available. After segmentation, 92 users have 40 Mb/s, four times the previous bandwidth, while adding 22 dedicated 100 Mb/s connections. This configuration can be extended to add more segments without degrading performance.

Figure 12 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a segment switch

Server

Up to88 users

ToNetworkCenter

Key

10 Mb/s100 Mb/s1000 Mb/s

10BASE-T hubs

Before After

Up to 20users

Up to 23users

ToNetworkCenter

11113EA

Up to 23users

Up to 23users

- 88 users share 10 Mb/s (10/88 Mb/s per user)- Server bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth)- Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth)-Total of 88 users

- Three sets of 23 users; each set shares 10 Mb/s (10/23 Mb/s per user)- Addition of 21 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth- Server with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth- Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwidth- Total of 89 users

Ethernet Switch325-24G

Server

UI

UI Set

2526



UI Cmd

Pwr

Console


Spd Act Spd Act

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24


320985-A

Figure 13 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a segment switch

High-density switched workgroup application

Figure 14 shows an example of using an Ethernet Switch 425 with a high-speed (gigabit) connection to a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600. Ethernet Switch 425 and Ethernet Switch 325 are also shown in this example of a high-density switched workgroup.

Server

Up to88 users

ToNetworkCenter

Key

10 Mb/s100 Mb/s1000 Mb/s

10BASE-T hubs

Before After

Up to 20users

Up to 23users

ToNetworkCenter

11113EA

Up to 23users

Up to 23users

- 88 users share 10 Mb/s (10/88 Mb/s per user)- Server bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth)- Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth)-Total of 88 users

- Three sets of 23 users; each set shares 10 Mb/s (10/23 Mb/s per user)- Addition of 21 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth- Server with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth- Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwidth- Total of 89 users

Ethernet Switch425-24T

Server



As shown in Figure 14, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 switch is used as a backbone switch, connecting to the Ethernet Switch 425 with an optional (1000BASE-SX) GBIC for maximum bandwidth. The Ethernet Switch 425-24T and the Ethernet Switch 325-24T have 100 Mb/s connections to the Ethernet Switch 425-24T, a 100BASE-TX hub, and a 100 Mb/s server as well as 10 Mb/s connections to DTE (data terminal equipment).

Figure 14 Configuring power workgroups and a shared media hub

Stack operation

You can connect up to eight units of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and Ethernet Switch 425-48T to provide uninterrupted connectivity for up to 392 ports. The entire stack can be managed as a single unit with a single IP and MAC address

You can select the base unit of the stack by using the momentary switch mechanism. It is recommended that you use only one base unit in the stack and the selection of the same should be done before powering the stack.

UI

UI Set

2526



UI Cmd

Pwr

Console


Spd Act Spd Act

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

UI

UI Set

2526



UI Cmd

Pwr

Console


Spd Act Spd Act

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

CPU PS1 PS2 FAN

Ethernt Switch 325-24G

Key

10 Mb/s

100 Mb/s

1000 Mb/s(Gigabit)

Ethernet Switch425-24T

ServerEthernet Routing Switch 8600

F


320985-A

The Ethernet Switch 425 does not support stack redundancy. In case of cable or unit failure, all units of the stack begin to work as standalone switches. However, the stack is automatically formed again once the missing cable is re-inserted or the faulty unit is replaced.

Ethernet units in a stack are interconnected through FireWire cables. Ensure that the downlink connection on a unit is always connected to the Up link of the next unit in the ring.

Base unit

The base unit is the unique unit in the stack that you can configure with the User Interface button on the front panel. A single Ethernet Switch 425-24T or Ethernet Switch 425-48T in the stack must be configured as the base unit. You can assign any unit in the stack as the base unit.

The physical order of all other units in the stack is determined by the position of the base unit within the stack. This is important for network management applications that view the physical ordering of the units within the stack.

Some characteristics of the base unit are described in the following sections.

Initial installation

During the initial installation of the stack, the software automatically determines the physical order of all units in the stack according to the position of the base unit within the stack. Thereafter, the individual units maintain their original unit numbering, even if you change the position of one or more units in the stack.

For example, when you initially power up the stack, the base unit becomes unit 1 and the unit that the base unit connects to becomes unit 2 (and the next unit is unit 3 and so on), until the maximum stack configuration (up to 8 units) is reached. If you change the base unit to another unit in the stack, the new base unit keeps its original unit number in the stack.

Note: Only Ethernet Switch 425-24T and Ethernet Switch 425-48T can operate together in the stack mode in release 3.6 software.



Stack MAC address

When the switch is participating in a stack configuration, a stack MAC address is automatically assigned during the stack initialization. The base unit’s MAC address, with a software offset, is used for the stack MAC address.

For example, if the base unit’s MAC address is 00-00-82-99-44-00, and the stack software offset is 1F, then the stack MAC address becomes:

00-00-82-99-44-1F

If another unit in the stack is assigned as the base unit, the MAC address of the new base unit (with offset) now applies to the stack configuration. The original stack IP address still applies to the new base unit.

Removing a unit from the stack

If a unit is removed from the stack (therefore operating in standalone mode), the following switch configuration settings revert back to the settings configured before the unit became a member of the stack:

• IP address

• Console password

• Telnet password

• SNMP community strings

Stack configurations

As shown in Figure 16, the cable connectors provide the ability to stack up to eight switches. Because stack parameters are associated with the base unit (see “Base unit” on page 88), the physical stack order depends on the base unit’s position and whether the stack is configured stack up or stack down.

Stack up configurations

In Figure 15, data flows from the base unit (unit 1) to the next switch, which is assigned as unit 2, and continues until the last switch in the stack is assigned as unit 8. The physical order of the switches is from top to bottom (unit 1 to unit 8).


320985-A

Figure 15 Stack up configuration example

Table 12 describes the stack up configuration illustration references.

Table 12 Stack up configuration description

Item Description

1 Base unit

2 Last unit

3 Stacking cable 30 cm (order number AL 2018005)

4 Stacking cable 1 m (order number AL 2018006)

2

1 Unit 1

Unit 2

Unit 3

Unit 4

Unit 5

Unit 6

Unit 7

Unit 8

Cascade

Down Up

Cascade

Down Up

Cascade

Down Up

Cascade

Down Up

Cascade

Down Up

Cascade

Down Up

Cascade

Down Up

Cascade

Down Up

Up

Down

43



Stack down configurations

In Figure 16, data flows from the base unit (unit 1) to the next switch, which is assigned as unit 2, and continues until the last switch in the stack is assigned as unit 8. The physical order of the switches is from bottom to top (unit 1 to unit 8).

Figure 16 Stack down configuration example

Table 13 describes the stack down configuration illustration references.

Table 13 Stack down configuration description

Item Description

1 Last unit

2 Base unit

Unit 8

Unit 7

Unit 6

Unit 5

Unit 4

Unit 3

Unit 2

Unit 1

1

4

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

Down Up

Cascade

2

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

Down Up

Cascade

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

Down Up

Cascade

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

Down Up

Cascade

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

Down Up

Cascade

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

Down Up

Cascade

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

Down Up

Cascade

100-240 V-50-60Hz 2A

Down Up

Cascade

Up

Down3


320985-A

Certain Network Management Station (NMS) applications assume a stack up configuration for the GUI which represents the stack (see Figure 15). For this reason, Nortel recommends that you always configure the top unit in the stack as the base unit.

In any stack configuration, the following applies:

• When you apply power to the stack, the base unit initializes and the entire stack powers up as a single logical unit.

• You can attach an RS-232 communications cable to the console port of any switch in the stack.

• You can downline upgrade the entire stack from any switch in the stack from the console interface, a Telnet session, the Web-based management interface, or any generic SNMP-based network management software.

• You can access and manage the stack using a Telnet connection, the Web-based management interface, or any generic SNMP management tool through any switch port that is part of the stack configuration.

• When you stack three or more switches, use the longer (1-meter) stacking max-return cable to complete the link from the last unit in the stack to the base unit.

3 Stacking cable 30 cm (order number AL 2018005)

4 Stacking max-return cable 1 m (part number AL 2018006)

Table 13 Stack down configuration description (continued)

93


Chapter 2Using the console interface

This chapter describes how to configure and manage the Ethernet Switch 325/425 using the menu-driven Console Interface (CI).

This chapter covers the following topics:

• “Accessing the CI menus and screens”

• “Using the CI menus and screens” on page 94

• “Main menu” on page 96

Accessing the CI menus and screens

You can access the CI menus and screens locally through a console terminal attached to your Ethernet Switch 325/425, remotely through a dial-up modem connection, or in-band through a Telnet session. You can connect your console cable into any unit in the Ethernet Switch 325/425-only stack for a unified stack interface.

For information about SNMP, see your network management documentation.

Note: If you have a properly configured BootP server in your network, it detects the IP address; you will not need to configure the IP address.

94 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

320985-A

Using the CI menus and screens

The CI menus and screens provide options that allow you to configure and manage the Ethernet Switch 325/425. Help prompts at the bottom of each menu and screen explain how to enter data in the highlighted field and how to navigate the menus and screens.

The default settings for the Console port are:


• One stop bit


• Flow control set to disabled

Some options allow you to toggle among several possible values; other options allow you to set or modify a parameter.

Navigating the CI menus and screens

Use the following methods to navigate the CI menus and screens.

To select a menu option:

1 Use the arrow keys to highlight the option name.

2 Press Enter.

Alternatively, you can press the key corresponding to the letter that is underlined in the menu option. For example, to select the Switch Configuration option in the main menu, press the w key. The text characters are not case-sensitive.

3 To toggle between values in a form:

a Use the spacebar to highlight the value.

b Press Enter.

4 To clear a string field:

a Position the cursor in the string field.

b Press Ctrl+K.

Chapter 2 Using the console interface 95


5 To return to the previous menu, press Ctrl+R.

6 To go to the next screen in a series, press Ctrl+N.

7 To return to the main menu at any time, press Ctrl+C.

8 Press Backspace to delete entered text.

You can set the options that appear in brackets. For example [Enabled].

Screen fields and descriptions

This section describes the CI screens and their fields, beginning with the main menu. Figure 17 shows a map of the CI screens.

Figure 17 Map of console interface screens

IP Configuration/Setup

SNMP Configuration

System Characteristics

Switch Configuration

Console/Comm Port Configuration

Identify Unit Numbers

Renumber Units

Display Hardware Units

Spanning Tree Configuration

TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration

Software Download

Configuration File

Display System Log

Reset

Reset to Default Settings

Shutdown Command

Logout

Main Menu MAC Address TableMAC Address Security ConfigurationEAPoL Security ConfigurationVLAN ConfigurationPort ConfigurationHigh Speed Flow Control ConfigurationMultiLink Trunk ConfigurationPort Mirroring ConfigurationRate Limiting ConfigurationIGMP ConfigurationDisplay Port StatisticsClear All Port Statistics

Spanning TreeSpanning Tree Port ConfigurationDisplay Spanning Tree Switch SettingsDisplay Spanning Tree VLAN Membership

Only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration.Only appears when a gigabit is installed in one or more units in a stack configuration.

VLAN ConfigurationVLAN Port ConfigurationVLAN Display by PortTraffic Class Configuration

MultiLink Trunk ConfigurationMultiLink Trunk Utilization

BS45041F

1

1

1

2

2

MAC Address Security ConfigurationMAC Address Security Port ConfigurationMAC Address Security Port ListsMAC Address Security Table

IGMP ConfigurationDisplay Multicast Group Membership

Configuration File Download/UploadAscii Configuration File Download


320985-A

The CI screens for your specific switch model display the model name in the main menu screen title and the correct number of ports and port types in the Port Configuration screen.

Main menu

This section describes the options available from the CI main menu (Figure 18). The CI screens and submenus for these options are described in the following sections.

Note: The field values shown in the CI screens in this section are provided as examples only.

Note: Some menu options shown in this main menu example and in other screen examples in this chapter may not appear on your screen, depending on the switch options installed. However, the full menu options are shown in the screen examples and described in the following sections.



Figure 18 Console interface main menu

Table 14 describes the CI main menu options.

Table 14 Console interface main menu options

Option Description

IP Configuration/Setup...

Displays the IP Configuration/Setup screen (see “IP Configuration/Setup screen” on page 214). This screen allows you to set or modify IP configuration parameters.

SNMP Configuration... Displays the SNMP Configuration screen (see “SNMP Configuration screen” on page 219). This screen allows you to set or modify the SNMP read-only community and read-write community strings, enable or disable the authentication trap and the link Up/down trap, set the IP address of trap receivers, and set the trap community strings.

Ethernet Switch 425-48T Main Menu

IP Configuration/Setup... SNMP Configuration... System Characteristics... Switch Configuration... Console/Comm Port Configuration... Display Hardware Units... Spanning Tree Configuration... TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration... Software Download... Configuration File... Display System Log... Reset... Reset to Default Settings... Shutdown Command... Command Line Interface... Logout...

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select


320985-A

System Characteristics...

Displays the System Characteristics screen (see “System Characteristics screen” on page 100). This screen allows you to view switch characteristics, including number of resets, power status, hardware and firmware version, and MAC address. This screen also contains three user-configurable fields: sysContact, sysName, and sysLocation. When the switch is part of a stack configuration, this screen also displays the base unit identification, the number of units configured in the stack, and the local unit stack number.

Switch Configuration... Displays the Switch Configuration Menu screen (see “Switch Configuration Menu screen” on page 103). This menu provides the following configuration options: MAC Address Table, MAC Address-Based Security, EAPOL Security Configuration, VLAN Configuration, Port Configuration, High Speed Flow Control, MultiLink Trunk Configuration, Port Mirroring Configuration, Rate Limiting Configuration, IGMP Configuration, Display Port Statistics, Clear All Port Statistics, and Stack Operational Mode.

Console/Comm Port Configuration...

Displays the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen (see “Console/Comm Port Configuration screen” on page 223). This screen allows you to configure and modify the Console/Comm port parameters, including the console port speed and password settings for the switch and stack operation.

Display Hardware Units Displays the Display Hardware Unit Information screen (see ““Hardware Unit Information screen” on page 233). This screen displays the switch model and the software version running. The screen also displays the SPF GBIC.

Spanning Tree Configuration...

Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)). This menu provides the following options: Spanning Tree Group Configuration, Spanning Tree Port Configuration, Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings, Display Spanning Tree VLAN Membership

TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration... Configuration...

Displays the TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen (see “TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen” on page 234). This screen allows you to set your switch to enable a user at a remote console terminal to communicate with the Ethernet Switch 325/425 as if the console terminal were directly connected to it. You can have up to four active Telnet sessions running at one time in either a standalone switch or a stack configuration.

Software Download... Displays the Software Download screen (see “Software Download screen” on page 237). This screen allows you to revise the Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image and diagnostics images that are located in nonvolatile flash memory.

Configuration File Displays the Configuration File Download/Upload screen (see “Configuration File Download/Upload screen” on page 240). This screen allows you to store your switch/stack configuration parameters on a TFTP server. You can retrieve the configuration parameters for automatically configuring a replacement switch or stack with the same configuration when required. This screen also allows you to download the ASCII configuration file from a TFTP server to the switch or stack.

Table 14 Console interface main menu options (continued)

Option Description



Display System Log Displays the System Log screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)).

Reset Resets the switch with the current configuration settings. This option is followed by a screen prompt that precedes the action. Enter Yes to reset the switch; enter No to abort the option:

• If the switch is participating in a stack configuration, you can reset the entire stack.

• When you select this option, the switch resets, runs a self-test, then displays the Nortel logo screen. Press Ctrl+Y to access the Ethernet Switch 325/425 main menu.

Reset to Default Settings

Resets the switch to the factory default configuration settings. This option is followed by a screen prompt that precedes the action. Enter Yes to reset the switch to the factory default configuration settings; enter No to abort the option:

• If the switch is participating in a stack configuration, you can reset the entire stack.

• When you select this option, the switch resets, runs a self-test, then displays the Nortel logo screen. Press Ctrl+Y to access the Ethernet Switch 325/425 main menu.

Caution: If you choose the Reset to Default Settings option, all configured settings are replaced with factory default settings when you press [Enter]

Achtung: Bei Auswahl des Befehls zur Rücksetzung auf die Standardeinstellungen werden alle von Ihnen konfigurierten Einstellungen durch die werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen ersetzt, wenn Sie die Eingabetaste drücken.

Attention: Si vous restaurez la configuration usine, votre configuration courante sera remplacée par la configuration usine dès que vous appuierez sur [Entrée].

Precaución: Si selecciona el comando Restaurar valores predeterminados, todos los valores de configuración se sustituirán por las valores predeterminados en fábrica al pulsar [Intro].

Attenzione: Nel caso in cui si selezioni la reimpostazione dei valori di default, tutte le impostazioni configurate verranno sostituite dai default di fabbrica premendo il tasto [Invio].


Option Description


320985-A

System Characteristics screen

The System Characteristics screen (Figure 19) allows you to view system characteristics and contains three user-configurable fields: sysContact, sysName, and sysLocation.

To open the System Characteristics screen:

➨ Choose System Characteristics (or press s) from the main menu.

Shutdown Allows the switch to be safely shut down and powered off.

This option is followed by two screen prompts that precede the action. At the first prompt, enter the time in minutes to wait before the switch is shut down. At the second prompt, enter Yes to confirm the action; or, enter No to abort the option:

Once the shutdown command is initiated, the switch saves the current configuration and can then be safely powered off. If the switch is not powered off within the user-specified time period, it is reset.

Once the shutdown command is initiated, all existing and subsequent Console Interface sessions display the following message:

Switch will reset (shutdown) in <xxxx> seconds.

While existing CLI sessions do not receive a warning message, all subsequent CLI sessions display the following message:

The shutdown process is in progress. It is safe to poweroff the stack. Configuration changes will not be saved. Shutdown has blocked the flash. Autoreset in <xxxx> seconds.

Neither Web-based management nor Device Manager receive any shutdown warning messages.

Command Line Interface

Displays the prompt to execute the CLI commands.

Logout Allows a user in a Telnet session or a user working at a password-protected console terminal to terminate the session.


Option Description



Figure 19 System Characteristics screen

Table 15 System Characteristics screen fields

Field Description

Operation Mode Read-only field that indicates the operation mode of the unit, for example:

• When the unit is part of a stack configuration, the (read-only) field indicates the unit is operational in a stack, and lists the current unit number of this switch.

• When the unit is not part of a stack configuration (operating standalone), the read-only field indicates the unit is operating as a switch. When in this operation mode, the Size of Stack and Base Unit fields (see following description) do not appear.

Size of Stack This read-only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration. This field indicates the number of units configured in the stack configuration (1 to 8 units maximum).

Base Unit This read-only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration. This field indicates the unit number of the switch that is currently operating as the base unit.


Operation Mode: Switch

MAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80

Reset Count: 9Last Reset Type: Management ResetPower Status: Primary PowerLocal GBIC Type: port 49, None port 50, NonesysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1sysUpTime: 7 days, 17:49:05 sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized.sysServices: 3sysContact: [ ]sysName: [ Ethernet 428-48T ]sysLocation: [ ]

Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.


320985-A

MAC Address The MAC address of the switch or, when the switch is participating in a stack configuration, the MAC address of the stack configuration.

Reset Count A read-only field that indicates the number of resets since the operational firmware was first loaded on the switch.

Default Value 1

Range 0 to 232 -1 (4,294,967,295)

Last Reset Type A read-only field that indicates the last type of reset.

Default Value Power Cycle

Range Power Cycle, Software Download, Management Reset, Management Factory Reset

Power Status A read-only field that indicates the current power source (primary, RPSU, or both).

Default Value Primary Power

Range Primary Power, Redundant Power, Primary and Redundant Power

Local GBIC Type A read-only field that indicates the GBIC type that is configured in this unit. (This field is applicable only to the Ethernet Switch 425).

sysDescr A read-only field that specifies hardware and software versions.

sysObjectID A read-only field that provides a unique identification of the switch, which contains the vendor’s private enterprise number.

sysUpTime A read-only field that shows the length of time since the last reset. Note that this field is updated when the screen is redisplayed.

sysNtpTime A read-only field that displays the current date and time and the configured time offset from Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

sysServices A read-only field that indicates the switch’s physical and data link layer functionality.

sysContact The name and phone number of the person responsible for the switch.

Default Value Zero-length string

Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters1

sysName A name that uniquely identifies the switch.



sysLocation The physical location of the switch.


Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters

Table 15 System Characteristics screen fields (continued)

Field Description



Switch Configuration Menu screen

The Switch Configuration Menu screen (Figure 20) allows you to set or modify the switch configuration.

Choose Switch Configuration (or press w) from the main menu to open the Switch Configuration Menu screen (Table 16).

Figure 20 Switch Configuration Menu screen

1 Although this field can be set to up to 255 characters from a Network Management Station (NMS), only 56 characters are displayed on the console terminal.

Note: The Ethernet Switch 325 does not support the High Speed flow control feature.

Switch Configuration Menu

MAC Address Table MAC Address Security Configuration... EAPOL Security Configuration... VLAN Configuration... Port Configuration... High Speed Flow Control Configuration... MultiLink Trunk Configuration... Port Mirroring Configuration... Rate Limiting Configuration... IGMP Configuration... Display Port Statistics Clear All Port Statistics Return to Main Menu

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select option.Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.


320985-A

Table 16 describes the Switch Configuration Menu options.

Table 16 Switch Configuration Menu options

Option Description

MAC Address Table Displays the MAC Address Table screen (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)). This screen allows you to view all MAC addresses and their associated port or trunk that the switch has learned, or to search for a particular MAC address (to see if the switch has learned the address).

MAC Address Security Configuration...

Displays the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)). This screen allows you to set up the MAC address security feature and provides the following options: MAC Address Security Configuration, MAC Address Security Port Configuration, MAC Address Security Port Lists, and MAC Address Security Table. This menu allows you to enable and disable security features on the port and trunk levels.

EAPoL Security Configuration Displays the EAPOL Security Configuration Menu (see “Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)”). This screen allows you to set up Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)- based security.

VLAN Configuration... Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)). This menu provides the following options: VLAN Configuration, VLAN Port Configuration, VLAN Display by Port, MAC-SA, and Return to Switch Configuration Menu screen. This menu allows you to create and modify VLANs.

Port Configuration... Displays the Port Configuration screen (see “Port Configuration screen” on page 109). This screen allows you to configure a specific switch port, all switch ports or, when in a stack configuration, all stack ports.

High Speed Flow Control Configuration...

Displays the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen. (see “High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen” on page 112).



MultiLink Trunk Configuration... Displays the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)). This menu provides the following options: MultiLink Trunk Configuration and MultiLink Trunk Utilization. This menu allows you to create and modify trunks, and to monitor the bandwidth utilization of configured trunks.

Port Mirroring Configuration... Displays the Port Mirroring Configuration screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)). This screen allows you to designate a single switch port as a traffic monitor for one specific port.

Rate Limiting Configuration Displays the Rate Limiting Configuration screen (“Rate Limiting Configuration screen” on page 115). This screen allows you to limit the forwarding rate of broadcast and multicast packets at ingress.

IGMP Configuration Displays the IGMP Configuration screen (Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A)). This screen allows you to optimize multicast traffic by setting up IGMP port memberships that filter multicast on a per port basis

Display Port Statistics Displays the Port Statistics screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)). This screen allows you to view detailed information about any switch port.

Clear All Port Statistics Allows you to clear all port statistics.This option is followed by screen prompts that precede a choice of the actions:

• If the switch is operating standalone, choose one of the following:• Yes, to clear all port statistics for all switch ports• No, to abort the option

• If the switch is participating in a stack configuration, choose one of the following:• Clear all port statistics for a specific unit in the stack• Clear all port statistics for the entire stack• No, to abort the option

Table 16 Switch Configuration Menu options (continued)

Option Description


320985-A

Port list syntax

When you enter a port list in a stack configuration, you must specify either a unit/port list, NONE, or ALL. In a stack configuration, ALL indicates all of the stack port; whereas, in a standalone scenario, ALL indicates all ports of the switch.

A unit/port number list is composed of one or more list items, each of which can be a single number or a range of numbers (where the numbers represents one or more ports). If a list item is preceded by a number and then a slash (/), the number represents a stack unit.

For example, 1/1-7,2/1-7,2/9,3/1-4,4/12 is a valid unit/port number list (see entry S1 in Figure 21 on page 107). It represents the following port order:

• Unit 1: ports 1 to 7

• Unit 2: ports 1 to 7 and port 9

• Unit 3: ports 1 to 4

• Unit 4: port 12

Note: NONE and ALL must be entered in uppercase characters as shown in the screen prompt.



Figure 21 MAC Address Security Port Lists screen

Accelerator keys for repetitive tasks

You can use certain keystrokes known as “accelerator keys” to help speed up repetitive tasks. For example, you can assign accelerator keys to modify the Port List field in the MAC Address Security Port List screen (Figure 21). You can modify the port list in any of the following ways:

• Add a new port to an existing port number list

• Remove a port from an existing port number list

• Copy an existing field into an adjacent field

MAC Address Security Port Lists

Entry Port List ----- --------- S1 [ ]

S2 [ ]

S3 [1/3,2/7,3/1-4]

S4 [ ]

S5 [ ]

S6 [ ]

S7 [ ]

More...

Press Ctrl-N to display next screen.Enter port list, “NONE”,”ALL”,”1,3,7-9”, press <Return> or <Enter> when done.Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.


320985-A

Adding a new port to an existing port number list

In the example shown in Figure 21, S3 shows the Port List field values as:

1/3,2/7,3/1-4

If you want to add another port (for example, port 2/9) to the existing port number list, you could highlight the field and then type another port list, including the new port number 1/3,2/7,2/9,3/1-4 Enter. This method can be cumbersome.

As an alternative method instead, you can highlight the field and then enter +2/9 Enter. The existing field keeps the previous list and adds the new port number (2/9) between ports 2/7 and 3/14.

(If you choose to add port 2/8 to the existing port number list, the field accepts the new port 2/8 but shows the new port number list field as: 1/3,2/7-8,3/1-4.)

Removing a port from an existing port number list

To remove a port from the port number list, use the minus sign (-) character instead of the plus sign (+) character as described above.

Copying an existing field into and adjacent field

You can use the period (.) character to copy a previously entered field value into the field directly next to it. For example, to copy the Allowed Source S3 (shown in Figure 21) into the next field (entry 6):

1 Enter a MAC address into the next MAC address field.

2 Highlight the (blank) Allowed Source field.

3 Enter the period (.) character and click Return.

The port number list from the previous entry is copied into the new field.



Port Configuration screen

The Port Configuration screen (Figures 22 and 23) allows you to configure specific switch ports or all switch ports. You can enable or disable the port status of specified switch ports, set the switch ports to autonegotiate for the highest available speed of the connected station, or set the speed for selected switch ports (autonegotiation is not supported on fiber optic ports).

You can disable switch ports that are trunk members (except the lowest member of an active trunk which cannot be disabled until it is removed from the MLT); however, the screen prompts for verification of the request before completing the action. Choosing Yes disables the port and removes it from the trunk.

To open the Port Configuration screen:

➨ Choose Port Configuration (or press p) from the Switch Configuration Menu screen.

Note: You cannot disable a port that is a member of the MLT if the switch is operating in the RSTP/MSTP mode.

Note: The Autonegotiation fields, the Speed fields, and the Duplex fields are independent of MultiLink Trunking, VLANs, and the STP.


320985-A

Figure 22 Port Configuration screen (1 of 2)

Port Configuration

Port Trunk Status Link LnkTrap Autonegotiation Speed Duplex ---- ----- ------------ ----- ------- --------------- ----------------- 1 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 2 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 3 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 4 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 5 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 6 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 7 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 8 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 9 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 10 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 11 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 12 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 13 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 14 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] More...

Press Ctrl-N to display next screen.Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.



Figure 23 Port Configuration screen (2 of 2)

Table 17 describes the Port Configuration screen fields.

Table 17 Port Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Unit Indicates the unit number that corresponds to the field values from the table displayed in Figure 23. This field is not visible when the switch is operating in the standalone mode.

Port Indicates the switch port numbers that correspond to the field values in that row of the screen (for example, the field values in row 2 apply to switch port 2). The values that you set in the Switch row affect all switch ports and, when the switch is part of a stack, the values that you set in the Stack row affects all ports in the entire stack.

Trunk The read-only data displayed in this column indicates the trunks that correspond to the switch ports specified in the Trunk Members fields of the Trunk Configuration screen (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)).

Port Configuration

Port Trunk Status Link LnkTrap Autonegotiation Speed Duplex ---- ----- ------------ ----- ------- --------------- ----------------- 15 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 16 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 17 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 18 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 19 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 20 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 21 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 22 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 23 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 24 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 25 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 26 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 27 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] 28 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ] More...

Press Ctrl-N to display next screen. Press Ctrl-P to display previous screen.Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.


320985-A

High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen

The High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen (Figure 24) allows you to set the port parameters for the Gigabit Ethernet Interface.

➨ Choose High Speed Flow Control Configuration (or press h) from the Switch Configuration Menu screen.

Status Allows you to disable any of the switch ports. You can also use this field to control access to any switch port.

Default Value Enabled

Range Enabled, Disabled

Link A read-only field that indicates the current link state of the corresponding port, as follows:• Up: The port is connected and operational.

• Down: The port is not connected or is not operational.

LnkTrap Allows you to control whether link up/link down traps are sent to the configured trap sink from the switch.

Default Value On

Range On, Off

Autonegotiation When enabled, sets the corresponding port speed to match the best service provided by the connected station, up to 100 Mb/s in full-duplex mode. This field is disabled for all fiber optic ports.



Speed/Duplex Allows you to manually configure any port to support an Ethernet speed of 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s, in half- or full-duplex mode. This field is set (by default) to 1000 Mb/s, full-duplex for Gigabit ports only.

Default Value 10Mbs/Half (when Autonegotiation is Disabled)

Range 10Mbs/Half, 10Mbs/Full, 100Mbs/Half, 100Mbs/Full

Note: The GBIC module must be installed to configure the port.

Table 17 Port Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description



Figure 24 High Speed Flow Control Configuration

Table 18 describes the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields.

Table 18 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Unit Allows you to select the unit number (when stacking is configured) to view or configure. To view or configure another unit, type its unit number and press Enter, or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers (the system only displays a screen for units that are configured with a Gigabit MDA). This field is not visible if the switch is operating in the standalone mode.

Port Displays the port number

High Speed Flow Control Configuration

Port Autonegotiation Speed Duplex Flow Control ---- --------------- -------------- -------------- 49 Enabled 1000Mbs / Full Disabled 50 Enabled 1000Mbs / Full Disabled

Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.


320985-A

Choosing a high speed flow control mode

The high speed flow control feature allows you to control traffic and avoid congestion on the Gigabit full-duplex link. If the receive port buffer becomes full, the Ethernet Switch 425-24T issues a flow-control signal to the device at the other end of the link to suspend transmission. When the receive buffer is no longer full, the switch issues a signal to resume the transmission. You can choose Symmetric or Asymmetric flow control mode.

Symmetric mode

This mode allows both the GBIC port and its link partner to send flow control pause frames to each other.

Autonegotiation Indicates if the Autonegotiation has been enabled on the port. When enabled, the port only advertises support for 1000 Mb/s operation, in full-duplex mode.



Speed/Duplex Displays if a port is configured to support an Ethernet speed of 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s, in half- or full-duplex mode. This field is set (by default) to 1000 Mb/s, full-duplex for Gigabit ports only.

Default 100Mbs/Half (when Autonegotiation is Disabled)

Range 10Mbs/Half, 10Mbs/Full, 100Mbs/Half, 100Mbs/Full

Flow Control Indicates if the switch or unit has been configured to control traffic and avoid congestion on the Gigabit MDA port. Two modes are available (see “Choosing a high speed flow control mode”,” next, for details about the two modes). The Flow Control field cannot be configured unless you set the Autonegotiation field value to Disabled.

Default Value Disabled

Range Disabled, Symmetric, Asymmetric

Note: All fields (except the Unit field) described in Table 18 are read-only fields.

Table 18 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description



When a pause frame is received (by either the GBIC port or its link partner), the port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the control frame or until a pause-release control frame is received. Both devices on the link must support this mode when it is selected.

Asymmetric mode

This mode allows the link partner to send flow control pause frames to the GBIC port. When a pause frame is received, the receiving port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the control frame or until a pause-release control frame is received.

In this mode, the GBIC port is disabled from transmitting pause frames to its link partner. Use this mode when the GBIC port is connected to a buffered repeater device.

You can choose a high speed flow control mode using CLI commands. For more information about the commands see “Enabling flow control” on page 326.

Rate Limiting Configuration screen

The Rate Limiting feature allows you to configure the threshold limits for broadcast and multicast packets ingressing on a port for a given time interval. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 drops any packets received above the threshold value if the traffic ingressing on the port exceeds the threshold. The hardware restrictions on this platform do not allow you to determine if the traffic from a port is the cause of excess broadcast or multicast traffic. Consequently you cannot perform port specific actions such as disabling a port. You can generate a trap to detect the excess traffic or you can configure the switch to store a message in the system log when the traffic on the port exceeds the threshold value. This message in the system log conveys that some traffic to the switch will be dropped.


320985-A

The Rate Limiting Configuration screen allows you to limit the forwarding rate of broadcast and multicast packets at ingress.

Figure 25 show sample rate limiting values for the two Rate Limiting Configuration screens.

To open the Rate Limiting Configuration screen:

➨ Choose Rate Limiting Configuration (or press l) from the Switch Configuration Menu screen.

Note: All configuration settings that you make in the Rate Limiting Configuration screen are applied across the entire unit (if stacking in configured). You cannot set some ports in the unit to limit broadcast traffic with a value of X pps (Packets Per Second) and some other ports in the same unit to limit multicast traffic with a value of Y pps.



Figure 25 Rate Limiting Configuration screen

Table 19 describes the fields in the Rate Limiting Configuration screen.

Table 19 Rate Limiting Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Unit Allows you to select the unit number (when stacking is configured) to view or configure. To view or configure another unit, type its unit number and press Enter, or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers. This field is not present in a standalone configuration.

Stack Displays information relevant to the stack, if the switch is operating in the stack configuration.

Packet Type Allows you to select the packet types for rate-limiting.

Default value: Both

Range: Both, Multicast, Broadcast

Rate Limiting Configuration

Packet Type Limit ---- ------------- --------

Switch [ Both ] [ 0 pps ]Stack [ Both ] [ 0 pps ]



320985-A

When the volume of either packet type is high, placing severe strain on the network (often referred to as a “storm”), you can set the forwarding rate of those packet types to not exceed a specified percentage of the total available bandwidth. The percentage you set refers to the total available bandwidth, not to a percentage of current traffic.

Limit Sets the amount of Packets Per Second allowed for forwarding. 0 pps means Rate Limiting has been disabled.

Default value: 0 pps

Range: 0-262143

Switch Allows you to enable Rate Limiting on current selected unit.

Stack Allows you to enable Rate Limiting on an entire stack. This field is visible only if stacking has been configured.

Table 19 Rate Limiting Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

119


Chapter 3CLI Basics

You can manage the Ethernet Switch 325/425 with a number of management tools such as:

• Device Manager (GUI)

• Web-based management system

• Console Interface (CI menus)

• Command Line Interface (CLI)

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 Command Line Interface (CLI) is a management tool that provides methods for configuring, managing, and monitoring the operational functions of the switch. You can access CLI through a direct connection to the switch console port, or remotely using Telnet. For a complete, alphabetical list of CLI commands, refer to Appendix E, “Command List,” on page 447.

You can use the CLI interactively, or you can load and execute CLI “scripts.” CLI scripts are loaded in one of the following ways:

• Entering the configure network command

• Manually loading the script in the console menu

• Automatically loading the script at boot-up

This chapter discusses the following CLI topics:

• “CLI command modes”

• “Port numbering” on page 123

• “Accessing CLI” on page 125

• “Setting the system username and password” on page 127

• “Getting help” on page 128

120 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

320985-A

• “Basic navigation” on page 128

• “Managing basic system information” on page 137

• “Managing MAC address forwarding database table” on page 143

CLI command modes

Most CLI commands are available only under a certain command mode. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 has the following four command modes:

• User EXEC

• Privileged EXEC

• Global Configuration

• Interface Configuration

The User EXEC mode is the default mode; it is also referred to as exec. This command mode is the initial mode of access on powering-up the Ethernet Switch 325/425. In this command mode, the user can access only a subset of the total CLI commands; however, the commands in this mode are available while the user is in any of the other four modes. The commands in this mode are those you would generally need, such as ping and logout.

Commands in the Privileged EXEC mode are available to all other modes but the User EXEC mode. The commands in this mode allow you to perform basic switch-level management tasks, such as downloading the software image, setting passwords, and booting the Ethernet Switch 325/425. The Privileged EXEC mode is also referred to as privExec mode.

The Global Configuration mode and the Interface Configuration mode allow you to change the configuration of the Ethernet Switch 325/425. Changes made in these command modes are immediately applied to the switch configuration and saved to NVRAM.

The Global Configuration commands allow you to set and display general configurations for the switch, such as the IP address, SNMP parameters, the Telnet access, and VLANs. The Global Configuration mode is also referred to as config mode.

Chapter 3 CLI Basics 121


The Interface Configuration commands allow you to configure parameters for each port, such as speed and duplex mode. The Interface Configuration mode is also referred to as config-if mode.

Figure 26 provides an illustration of the hierarchy of Ethernet Switch 325/425 CLI command modes.

Figure 26 CLI command mode hierarchy

You can see a specific value for each command mode at the prompt line, and you can use specific commands to enter or exit each command mode (Table 20). Additionally, you can only enter command modes from specific modes and only exit to specific command modes.

10194EA

User Exec(exec)

Privileged EXEC(privExec)

Global Configuration(config)

Interface Configuration(config-if)


320985-A

Table 20 describes the command mode prompts and entrance/exit commands.

The prompt displays the switch name, and the current CLI command mode. For example:

• User EXEC—425-48T>

• Privileged EXEC—425-48T#

• Global Configuration—425-48T(config)#

• Interface Configuration—425-48T(config-if)#

Refer to Appendix E, “Command List,” on page 447, for a complete, alphabetical list of all CLI commands and where they are explained.

Table 20 Command mode prompts and entrance/exit commands

Command mode

Prompt for the Ethernet Switch 325

Prompt for the Ethernet Switch 425

Enter/exit command

User EXEC(exec)

325-24T> 425-48T> Default mode, automatically enterlogout or exit to quit to Main Menu

Privileged EXEC(privExec)

325-24T# 425-48T# enable to enter from User EXEC mode

logout or exit to quit to Main Menu

Global Configuration(config)

325-24T(config)# 425-48T(config)# configure to enter from Privileged EXEC modeend or exit to exit to Privileged EXEC mode; logout to quit to Main Menu

Interface Configuration(config-if)

325-24T(config-if)# 425-48T(config-if)# interface FastEthernet {<portnum>|all} to enter from Global Configuration modelogout to quit to Main Menu; end to exit to Privileged EXEC mode; exit to exit to Global Configuration mode



The initial command mode in CLI depends on your access level when you logged into the Ethernet Switch 325/425 CI menus:

• With no password protection, you can enter the CLI in userExec mode, and use the enable command to move to the privExec command mode.

• If you have logged into the CI menus with read-only access, you can enter the CLI in userExec mode and cannot access any other CLI command modes.

• If you have logged into the CI menus with read-write access, you can enter the CLI in privExec mode and use the commands to move to the other command modes.

Port numbering

The port numbering for different versions of Ethernet switches are listed below:

• Ethernet Switch 325-24T has twenty-four 10/100 Mb/s ports.

• Ethernet Switch 325-24G has twenty-four 10/100 Mb/s ports and two 10/100/1000 ports.

• Ethernet Switch 425-24T has twenty-four 10/100 Mb/s ports on the front, as well as two combo ports, which includes two GBIC or two copper ports 10/100/1000Mbps.

• Ethernet Switch 425-48T has forty-eight 10/100 ports on the front, as well as two combo ports, which includes two GBIC or two copper ports 10/100/1000Mbps.

The CLI uses the variable <portlist> when a command specifies one or more ports for the command.

Note: The Ethernet Switch 425-24T operates either in standalone mode or in stack mode. The format of the variable <portlist> is different if you are working on a standalone Ethernet Switch 425-24T or a stack.


320985-A

Port numbering in standalone mode

In a standalone mode, the port number variable is an integer between 1 to 50 for Ethernet Switch 425-48T and 1 to 26 for Ethernet Switch 425-24T. You can use the <portlist> variable in the following formats:

• A single port number—an integer between 1 to 50.

— Example: 7 means port 7

• A range of port numbers—a pair of port numbers between 1 and 50 separated by a dash.

— Example: 1-3 means ports 1, 2, and 3

— Example: 5-24 means all ports from port 5 through port 24

• A list of port numbers and/or port ranges, separated by commas.

— Example: 1,3,7 means ports 1, 3, and 7

— Example: 1-3,9-11 means ports 1, 2, 3, 9, 10, and 11

— Example: 1,3-5,9-11,15 means ports 1, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, and 15

• none means no ports.

• all means all the ports on the standalone Ethernet Switch 325/425, including any GBIC ports.

You can also use the unit/port convention discussed in “Port numbering in stacked mode”, with a standalone Ethernet Switch 325/425 as long as the unit number is 1.

Port numbering in stacked mode

In Ethernet Switch 425-24T Stack mode, use the <portlist> variable to represent the number of the unit within the stack, followed by a forward slash (/), and the port number(s). Unit number will always be an integer between 1 and 8, and the port numbers will always be integers between 1 and 25. You can also use none to indicate none of the ports in the stack or all to indicate all of the ports in the stack.

In the Stack mode, use the <portlist> variable in the following formats:

• A single port number—an integer for the unit, followed by /, and an integer for the port number

— Example: 1/7 means unit 1 port 7



— Example: 3/24 means unit 3, port 24

• A range of port numbers—an integer for the unit, followed by /, and integers for the port number between 1 and 24 separated by a dash

— Example: 1/1-3 means unit 1, ports 1, 2, and 3

— Example: 3/5-24 means unit 3, port 5 through port 24

• A unit with no ports specified—an integer for the unit, followed by /, and the word none.

— 3/none means unit 3 with no ports

• A unit with all ports specified—an integer for the unit, followed by /, and the word all.

— 3/all means unit 3 with all ports

• A list of port numbers, port ranges, and/or units with all ports or no ports—using the unit/port format—separated by commas

— Example: 1/1,2/3,3/7 means unit 1 port 1; unit 2, port 3; and unit 3, port 7

— Example: 1/1-3,3/9-11 means unit 1, ports 1, 2, 3; and unit 3, ports 9, 10, and 11

— Example: 1/1,4/3-5,5/9-11,7/15 means unit 1, port 1; unit 4, ports 3, 4, 5; unit 5, ports 9, 10, 11; and unit 7, port 15

— Example: 1/3,3/ALL,4/NONE means unit 1, port 3; unit 3, all ports; and unit 4, no ports

• none means no ports in the stack.

• all means all the ports in the stack, including all GBIC ports.

To view the unit numbers in the stack, issue the show stack-info command (“show stack-info command” on page 141). You must be in the Privileged EXEC (privExec) mode to execute this command.

Accessing CLI

You access the CI menus using Telnet or through a direct connection to the switch from a terminal or personal computer (PC). You can use any terminal or PC with a terminal emulator as the CLI command station. Make sure that the terminal has the following features:

• 9600 bits per second (b/s), 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, no flow control


320985-A

• Serial terminal-emulation program such as Terminal or Hyperterm for Windows* 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT*.

• Cable and connector to match the male DTE connector (DB-9) on the Ethernet Switch 325/425 console port, with the DCE/DTE switch on the switch management module set to DTE

• VT100 Arrows checked in the Terminal Preferences window under Terminal Options, and Block Cursor unchecked; VT-100/ANSI checked under Emulation.

To access CLI:

1 When you access the Ethernet Switch 325/425, the banner appears (Figure 27).

Figure 27 Ethernet Switch 425-48T banner

2 Press Ctrl+Y, and the Main Menu appears on the console screen (Figure 28) with the top line highlighted.

Enter Ctrl-Y to begin.*************************************************************** *** Ethernet Switch 425-48T *** *** Nortel *** *** Copyright (c) 1996-2005, All Rights Reserved *** *** Release 3.6 SSH *** *** HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 *** ***************************************************************



Figure 28 Main Menu for Ethernet Switch 425-48T console interface

3 Using the Down Arrow key, scroll down to Command Line Interface, and press Enter. The CLI prompt appears:

425-48T>

The > sign at the end of the name of the switch indicates that the default CLI mode is User EXEC mode. Refer to “CLI command modes” on page 120, to select the command mode you want to use (and are authorized to use).

Setting the system username and password

You can set usernames and passwords for system access through the Console Interface, CLI, Telnet, and Web-based management. For more information, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).


IP Configuration/Setup... SNMP Configuration... System Characteristics... Switch Configuration... Console/Comm Port Configuration... Display Hardware Units... Spanning Tree Configuration... TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration... Software Download... Configuration File... Display System Log... Reset... Reset to Default Settings... Shutdown Command... Command Line Interface... Logout...

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select option.


320985-A

Getting help

When you navigate through the CLI, online Help is available at all levels. Entering a portion of the command, space, and a question mark (?) at the prompt results in a list of all options for that command.

Refer to “help command” on page 130 for more information about the specific types of Help.

Basic navigation

This section discusses basic navigation around the CLI and between the command modes. As you see, the CLI incorporates various shortcut commands and keystrokes to simplify its use. The following topics are covered in this section:

• “General navigation commands”

• “Keystroke navigation” on page 129

• “help command” on page 130

• “no command” on page 131

• “default command” on page 131

• “logout command” on page 132

• “enable command” on page 132

• “configure command” on page 132

• “interface command” on page 133

• “disable command” on page 133

• “end command” on page 134

• “exit command” on page 134

General navigation commands

When you enter “?” at any point in the CLI session, the system retrieves help information for whatever portion of the command you entered thus far. Refer to “help command” on page 130 for more information.



The system records the last command in a CLI session. However, the last command is not saved across reboots.

Add the word no to the beginning of most CLI configuration commands to clear or remove the parameters of the actual command. For example, when you enter the command ip stack address 192.32.154.126, you set the IP stack address. However, when you enter no ip stack address, the system returns the IP address to zero. Refer to Appendix E, “Command List,” on page 447 for an alphabetical list of no commands.

Add the word default to the beginning of most CLI configuration commands to set the parameters of the command to the factory default values. Refer to Appendix E, “Command List,” on page 447 for an alphabetical list of default commands.

When you enter a portion of the command and press the [Tab] key, the system finds the first unambiguous match of a command and displays that command. For example, if you enter down+[Tab], the system displays download.

Keystroke navigation

You can change the location of the cursor using the key combinations shown in Table 21.

Table 21 Keystroke navigation

Key combination Function

Ctrl+A Start of line

Ctrl+B Back 1 character

Ctrl+C Abort command

Ctrl+D Delete the character indicated by the cursor

Ctrl+E End of line

Ctrl+F Forward 1 character

Ctrl+H Delete character left of cursor (Backspace key)

Tab Command/parameter completion

Ctrl+K and Ctrl+R Redisplay line

Ctrl+N or Down arrow Next history command


320985-A

help command

The help command is in all command modes and displays a brief message about using the CLI help system. The syntax for the help command is:

help

The help command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 29 shows the output from the help command.

Ctrl+P or Up arrow Previous history command

Ctrl+T Transpose characters

Ctrl+U Delete entire line

Ctrl+W Delete word left of cursor

Ctrl+X Delete all characters to left of cursor

Ctrl+z Exit Global Configuration mode (to Privileged EXEC mode)

? Context-sensitive help

Esc+C and Esc+U Capitalize character at cursor

Esc+l Change character at cursor to lowercase

Esc+B Move back 1 word

Esc+D Delete 1 word to the right

Esc+F Move 1 word forward

Table 21 Keystroke navigation

Key combination Function



Figure 29 help command output in privExec mode

no command

The no command is always used as a prefix to a configuration command, and it negates the action performed by that command. The effect of the no command is to remove or to clear the configuration controlled by the specified command. Various no commands are in the config and config-if command modes.

Refer to Appendix E, “Command List,” on page 447 for an alphabetical listing of all no commands.

default command

The default command is always used as a prefix to a configuration command, and it restores the configuration parameters to default values. The default values are specified by each command.

Refer to Appendix A for an alphabetical listing of all default commands.

Note: Not all configuration commands support the no prefix command.

Note: Not all commands support the default prefix command.

425-48T>helpContext help may be requested at any point in a command by enteringa question mark '?'. If nothing matches, the help list will be emptyand you must backup until entering a '?' shows the available options.Two styles of help are provided:1. Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument (e.g. 'show?') and describes each possible argument.2. Partial help is provided when an abbreviated argument is entered and you want to know what arguments match the input (e.g. 'show pr?'.)


320985-A

logout command

The logout command logs you out of the CLI session and returns you to the Main Menu of the Console Interface (CI) menus (Figure 28). The syntax for the logout command is:

logout

The logout command is in all command modes.

The logout command has no parameters or variables.

enable command

The enable command changes the command mode from User EXEC to privExec mode. The syntax for the enable command is:

enable

The enable command is in the exec command mode.

The enable command has no parameters or variables.

configure command

The configure command moves you to the Global Configuration (config) command mode and identifies the source for the configuration commands. The syntax for the configure command is:

configure {terminal|network}

The configure command is in the privExec command mode.



Table 22 describes the parameters and variables for the configure command.

interface command

The interface command moves you to the Interface Configuration (config-if) command mode. The syntax for the interface command is:

interface FastEthernet <portlist>

The interface command is in the config command mode.

Table 23 describes the parameters and variables for the interface command.

disable command

The disable command returns you to the User EXEC (exec) command mode. The syntax for the disable command is:

disable

The disable command is in the privExec command mode.

The disable command has no parameters or variables.

Table 22 configure command parameters and variables

Parameters and variables

Description

terminal | network Specifies the source for the configuration commands for the Ethernet Switch 325/425:terminal—allows you to enter config mode to enter configuration commands

network—allows you to set up parameters for auto-loading a script at boot-up or for loading and executing a script immediately

Table 23 interface command parameters and variables


Description

<portlist> Specifies the portlist you want to be affected by all the commands issued in the config-if command mode.


320985-A

end command

The end command moves you to the priv Exec mode from either the Global Configuration (config) mode or the Interface Configuration (config-if) mode.

The syntax for the end command is:

end

The end command has no parameters or variables.

exit command

The exit command moves you around the command modes:

• In User EXEC (exec) and Privileged EXEC (privExec) command modes, exit allows you to quit the CLI session.

• In Global Configuration (config) mode, exit moves you back to the privExec command mode.

• In Interface Configuration (config-if) command mode, exit moves you back to the config mode.

The syntax for the exit command is:

exit

The exit command has no parameters or variables.

shutdown command for the unit

The shutdown command allows you to safely shut down and power off the switch. Once the shutdown command is initiated, the switch saves the current configuration which allows users to power off the switch within the specified time period (1 to 60 minutes); otherwise, the switch performs a reset.

When the shutdown command is initiated in the CLI, the following message appears:

Shutdown (y/n) ?



Enter yes at this prompt to shut down the switch. The following warning message then appears:

Warning the switch/stack has been set to reboot in <xx> minutes. Current configuration has been saved, no further configuration changes can be saved until reboot occurs or 'shutdown cancel' command is issued.

The syntax for the shutdown command is:

shutdown [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel]

Once the shutdown command is initiated, all existing and subsequent Console Interface sessions display the following message:

Stack will reset in <xxxx> seconds.

While existing CLI sessions do not receive a warning message, all subsequent CLI sessions display the following message:

The shutdown process is in progress. It is safe to poweroff the stack. Configuration changes will not be saved. Shutdown has blocked the flash. Autoreset in <xxxx> seconds.

Neither Web-based management nor Device Manager receive any shutdown warning messages.


320985-A

Table 23 describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown command.

The shutdown command is in the privExec command mode.

reload command

The reload command provides you with a configuration rollback mechanism to prevent loss of connectivity to a switch, typically for remote configurations. The reload command allows you to temporarily disable the autosave feature for a specified time period (1 to 60 minutes), allowing you to make a number of configuration changes on remote switches without affecting the current saved configuration. During the interval in which the autosave feature is disabled by the reload command, you must use the copy config nvram command to force a manual save of your configurations.

Initiate the reload command before you start the switch configuration commands. Once you initiate the command in the CLI, the following message appears:

Reload (y/n) ?

Enter yes at this prompt to set the switch reload. The following warning message then appears:

Table 24 shutdown command parameters and variables


Description

force Instructs the switch to skip the shutdown confirmation prompt.

minutes-to-wait <1-60>]

Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the switch resets itself. The default wait time is set at 10 minutes.

cancel Aborts all scheduled switch shutdowns

Note: Any configurations or logins performed on the switch after the shutdown command is initiated are not saved to NVRAM and are lost after the reset.



Warning the switch/stack has been set to reload in <xx> minutes. Current configuration has NOT been saved. Configuration must be explicitly saved.

Once the reload timer expires, the switch resets, reloads the last saved configuration, and re-enables the autosave feature.

The syntax for the reload command is:

reload [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel]

Table 23 describes the parameters and variables for the interface command.

The reload command is in the privExec command mode.

Managing basic system information

This section shows you how to view basic system information, such as the current software version and the stack mode; you can renumber the units within a stack. The following topics are covered:

• “show sys-info command”

• “show tech command” on page 139

• “show stack-info command” on page 141

• “show stacking-mode command” on page 142

• “renumber unit command” on page 143

Table 25 reload command parameters and variables


Description

force Instructs the switch to skip the reload confirmation prompt.

minutes-to-wait <1-60>]

Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the switch reloads itself. The default wait time is set at 10 minutes.

cancel Aborts all scheduled switch reloads


320985-A

show sys-info command

The show sys-info command displays the current system characteristics. The syntax for the show sys-info command is:

show sys-info

The show sys-info command is in the privExec command mode.

The show sys-info command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 30 displays sample output from the show sys-info command.

Figure 30 show sys-info command output

To change the system contact, name, or location, refer to the snmp-server command (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)).

425-48T#show sys-infoOperation Mode: SwitchMAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80Reset Count: 34Last Reset Type: Power CyclePower Status: Primary PowerAutotopology: EnabledLocal GBIC Type: (port 49) GBIC is missingLocal GBIC Type: (port 50) GBIC is missingsysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0Mfg Date: 05122004Serial #: SACC2600E5Operational State:NormalsysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1sysUpTime: 2 days, 17:26:24sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized.sysServices: 3sysContact: csysName: Ethernet 425-48TsysLocation:425-48T#



show tech command

The show tech command displays the system information. The syntax for the show tech command is:

show tech

The show tech command is in the privExec command mode. The show tech command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 31, Figure 31 on page 139, and Figure 32 on page 140 display a sample output from the show tech command.

Figure 31 show tech command output

425# show tech*****SYS Info*****System Information: Operation Mode: Switch MAC Address: 00-09-97-A2-9D-80 Reset Count: 123 Last Reset Type: Management Reset Autotopology: Enabled sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.2 sysUpTime: 2 days, 04:41:28 sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized. sysServices: 3 sysContact: sysName: 425 sysLocation:Unit #1: Switch Model: 425-24T MDA Model: None Cascade Module: 400-ST1 Hardware Version: 0B Firmware Version: 3.5.0.2 Software Version: v3.6.0 Serial Number: SACC25003U Manufacturing Date: 05232003 Power Status: Primary Fan #1 Status: Normal Fan #2 Status: Normal*****UI Button***** Unit # Button Mode ------ ------------- 1 Enabled


320985-A

Figure 32 show tech command output (continued)

*****MEMORY INFORMATION*****

status bytes blocks avg block max block ------ --------- -------- ---------- ----------current free 3384136 154 21974 3333064 alloc 7077632 4335 1632 -cumulative alloc 1036033356 11295553 91 -*****IP Configuration*****BootP Mode: BootP Disabled

Configured In Use Last BootP --------------- --------------- ---------------Stack IP Address: 192.168.100.100 0.0.0.0Switch IP Address: 192.168.100.13 192.168.100.13 0.0.0.0Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0Default Gateway: 192.168.100.1 192.168.100.1 0.0.0.0*****MLT Configuration*****Trunk Name Members Bpdu Mode Status----- -------------------- ------------------- ------ ------ --------1 Trunk #1 NONE All basic Disabled2 Trunk #2 NONE All basic Disabled3 Trunk #3 NONE All basic Disabled4 Trunk #4 NONE All basic Disabled5 Trunk #5 NONE All basic Disabled6 Trunk #6 NONE All basic Disabled*****VLAN Configuration*****Id Name Type Protocol User PID Active Mgmt--- -------------------- -------- ---------------- -------- ------ ----1 VLAN #1 Port None 0x0000 Yes Yes Port Members: 1-25*****STP Configuration*****Current STP Operation Mode: MSTPMaximum Mst Instance Number: 8Number of Msti Supported: 1Cist Bridge Priority (hex): 8000Stp Version: Mstp ModeCist Bridge Max Age: 20 secondsCist Bridge Forward Delay: 15 secondsTx Hold Count: 3Path Cost Default Type: 32-bitMax Hop Count: 2000



Figure 33 show tech command output (continued)

show stack-info command

The show stack-info is specific only to Ethernet Switch 425-24T and 425-48T in stacked mode. This command displays the current stack information, which includes unit numbers, GBIC, and software version for all units.

VLAN members------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------1

Msti Config Id Selector: 0Msti Region Name: 00:0f:6a:7d:bb:e0Msti Region Version: 0Msti Config Digest: AC:36:17:7F:50:28:3C:D4:B8:38:21:D8:AB:26:DE:62Port Role State STP Status Oper Status---- ---------- ---------- ---------- -----------1 Root Forwarding Enabled Enabled2 Disabled Discarding Enabled Disabled3 Disabled Discarding Enabled Disabled[...]24 Designated Forwarding Enabled Enabled25 Disabled Discarding Enabled Disabled*****Port Interface***** Status Auto FlowPort Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control---- ----- ------- ---- ---- -------- ----------- -------- ------ -------1 Enable Up Up Enabled Enabled 100Mbps Full2 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled3 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled[...]24 Enable Up Up Enabled Enabled 100Mbps Full25 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled*****System Log*****Type Time Idx Src Message---- ----------------------------- ---- --- -------S 00:00:00:00 1 NVR Base Unit changedS 00:00:00:00 2 NVR #1 Reset initiated through telnet by IP address: 11.127.249.74, access mode: no securityS 00:00:00:00 3 NVR SMGR event JOIN STACK


320985-A

The syntax for the show stack-info command is:

show stack-info

The show stack-info command is in the privExec command mode.

The show stack-info command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 34 displays sample output from the show stack-info command.

Figure 34 show stack-info command output

show stacking-mode command

The show stacking-mode command displays the current and next stacking mode for the switch or stack.

The syntax for the show stacking-mode command is:

show stacking-mode

The show stacking-mode command is in the exec command mode.

The show stacking-mode command has no parameters or variables.

425-24T(config)#show stack-infoUnit # Switch Model GBIC Port SW Version------ ---------------- ----------- ------------1 425-24T (1/25) SX v3.6.02 425-24T (2/25) None v3.6.0425-24T(config)#



Figure 35 displays sample output from the show stacking-mode command.

Figure 35 show stacking-mode command output

renumber unit command

This command is applicable only to Ethernet Switch 425-24T, in its stacked mode.

The renumber unit command changes the unit number of each switch in the stack. The syntax for the renumber unit command is:

renumber unit

The renumber unit command is in the config command mode.

The renumber unit command has no parameters or variables.

Managing MAC address forwarding database table

This section describes the commands to view the contents of the MAC address forwarding database table, as well as setting the age-out time for the addresses. The following topics are covered:

• “show mac-address-table command” on page 144

• “mac-address-table aging-time command” on page 145

• “default mac-address-table aging-time command” on page 146

Note: This command does not take effect until you reset the stack.

425-24T>show stacking-modeCurrent mode for unit 1 is stackable, base unit set.Next mode for unit 1 is stackable, base unit set.Current mode for unit 2 is stackable, base unit not set.Next mode for unit 3 is stackable, base unit not set.Next mode will be applied after reset


320985-A

show mac-address-table command

The show mac-address-table command displays the current contents of the MAC address forwarding database table. The syntax for the show mac-address-table command is:

show mac-address-table [vid <1-4094>] [aging-time] [address <H.H.H>] [port <LINE>] [include/exclude <pattern>]

The show mac-address-table command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 26 describes the parameters and variables for the show mac-address-table command.

Table 26 show mac-address-table command parameters and variables


Description

vid <1-4094> Enter the number of the VLAN you want to display the forwarding database. Default is to display the management VLAN’s database.

aging-time Displays the time in seconds after which an unused entry is removed from the forwarding database.

address <H.H.H> Displays a specific MAC address if it exists in the database. Enter the MAC address you want displayed.

port <LINE> List of ports.

include/exclude <pattern>

Allows you to filter the results of the command by printing only those entries in the address table that include or exclude a given pattern. The value for <pattern> must be a sequence of 1 to 6 bytes in hex, separated by dashes.

for example: show mac-address-table port 1/1-5 address include 00-0E-45-23



Figure 36 displays sample output from the show mac-address-table command.

Figure 36 show mac-address-table command output

mac-address-table aging-time command

The mac-address-table aging-time command sets the time that the switch retains unseen MAC addresses. The syntax for the mac-address-table aging-time command is:

mac-address-table aging-time <time>

The mac-address-table aging-time command is in the config command mode.

Table 27 describes the parameters and variables for the mac-address-table aging-time command.

Table 27 mac-address-table aging-time command parameters and variables


Description

time Enter the aging time in seconds that you want for MAC addresses before they are flushed.

425-48T(config)#show mac-address-tableMac Address Table Aging Time: 400Number of addresses: 13

MAC Address Source MAC Address Source----------------- -------- ----------------- --------00-00-81-9B-12-78 Trunk: 3 00-00-E2-13-38-38 Trunk: 300-00-E2-1F-9D-0D Trunk: 3 00-04-DC-6F-43-F4 Trunk: 300-09-97-89-82-C1 Trunk: 3 00-0C-F8-1A-0F-F8 Trunk: 300-0C-F8-61-00-01 Trunk: 3 00-0F-3D-E5-28-01 Trunk: 300-0F-6A-82-2E-C1 Trunk: 3 00-0F-6A-82-36-21 Trunk: 300-0F-CD-BF-1E-80 00-80-2D-6E-47-38 Trunk: 300-80-2D-6E-47-82 Trunk: 3 08-00-20-9F-F3-2C Trunk: 3425-48T(config)#


320985-A

Figure 37 displays sample output from the mac-address-table aging-time command.

Figure 37 mac-address-table aging-time output

default mac-address-table aging-time command

The default mac-address-table aging-time command sets the time that the switch retains unseen MAC addresses to 300 seconds. The syntax for the default mac-address-table aging-time command is:

default mac-address aging-time

The default mac-address-table aging-time command is in the config command mode.

The default mac-address-table aging-time command has no parameters or variables.

425-48T(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 400425-48T(config)#

147


Chapter 4Getting Started with Device Manager

The Java Device Manager (JDM) software is a Graphical User Interface (GUI) that allows you to manage a standalone switch or a stack. JDM (also referred to as Device Manager) provides options found in other management tools such as management of VLANs and MultiLink Trunks, and displaying and printing of statistics in graph format.

To use Device Manager, you must have network connectivity to a management station running Device Manager on one of the supported platforms. You must also assign an IP address to the switch or stack.

This chapter contains information on the following topics:

• “Installing Device Manager”

• “Device Manager basics” on page 171

Installing Device Manager

The JDM software is provided on the device software CD as a self-extracting executable file, and is also available from the Nortel web site. This chapter provides instructions for installing the JDM software in a Windows*, UNIX*, or Linux* environment.

The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is bundled with the JDM software and does not require a separate installation.

For details on installing JDM, refer to the following sections:

• “JDM installation precautions” on page 148

• “Installing the Device Manager software” on page 149

148 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

320985-A

• “Installing JDM on Windows” on page 149

• “Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux” on page 159

• “Starting Device Manager” on page 171

JDM installation precautions

The following warnings apply to Device Manager on all operating environments:

• The JDM and Ethernet Switch software versions must match for the correct dialog boxes and information to be shown and accessible. Please refer to the Release Notes for a complete compatibility list.

• If you want to use JDM to support multiple Nortel switches in your network, ensure that the JDM version you use supports each version of software running on each Nortel device in your network.

• Prior to upgrading JDM, either uninstall your previous version of the Device Manager software, or install the new software to a different directory. (You can have multiple versions of Device Manager stored on your Windows, UNIX, or Linux machine, provided that each version is stored in a separate directory.)

• JDM saves the IP addresses that are visited to a settings file. A JDM uninstall operation does not remove this settings file.

— In a Windows environment, the settings file is dm.ini, and is created in the JDM install directory.

— In a UNIX environment, the settings file is ~/.jdm/dm.ini.

— In a Linux environment, the settings file is ~/.jdm/dm.ini.

• The dm.ini file containing IP addresses visited from a previous JDM version is automatically used by a new JDM version installed in the same directory. You must manually move or copy the dm.ini file from a previous version of JDM to a new JDM installation in a different directory.

Note: Do not install the JDM to a directory where a previous version of Device Manager software already exists.

Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 149


Installing the Device Manager software

Device Manager software can be installed in Windows, UNIX, or Linux environment. The following sections provide information on the system requirements and installation procedures to install Device Manager software in Windows, UNIX, and Linux environments.

• “Installing JDM on Windows”

• “Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux” on page 159

Installing JDM on Windows

This section includes the following topics:

• “Windows minimum requirements”

• “Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows” on page 150

• “Installing JDM on Windows from the CD” on page 150

• “Installing JDM on Windows from the web” on page 151

• “Executing the JDM installation software on Windows” on page 152

Windows minimum requirements

The minimum system requirements for installing JDM on Microsoft* Windows NT*, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows XP are:

• 350 MHz or higher Pentium processor

• 256 MB DRAM

• 300 MB space on hard drive


320985-A

Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows

Remove existing versions of Device Manager software by using the Uninstall DM option that was created in the Windows Start menu during installation.

For example, to remove Device Manager from a Windows XP system using the default program group, choose the following option from the Windows Start menu: All Programs>Nortel>Java Device Manager>Uninstall DM.

If no program group was added to the Windows Start menu during installation, then complete the following steps to remove existing Device Manager software:

1 Navigate to the folder where the JDM software is installed.

2 Open the UninstallerData sub-folder.

3 Run the following file: Uninstall Java Device Manager.exe.

Installing JDM on Windows from the CD

To access the JDM software from the installation CD:

1 Close all programs.

2 Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

3 From the Windows Start menu, choose Run.

The Run dialog box opens.

4 Use Browse to navigate to the drive where the CD-ROM is located.

Note: Removing previous versions of JDM is an optional process. Multiple versions of JDM can exist on one system, as long as each version is in a separate location.

If you decide to allow previous versions of JDM to remain, then you must choose a different folder to use during the installation process.

Note: If more than one version of Device Manager software is installed, ensure you select the correct software to uninstall.



5 On the CD-ROM drive, locate the \Windows\Device Manager subdirectory.

6 Double-click the jdm_xxxx.exe file.

Continue with “Executing the JDM installation software on Windows” on page 152.

Installing JDM on Windows from the web

To obtain the JDM software from the Nortel web site:

1 Go to the following URL:


2 Select the software support page for your product.

The software page opens.

3 Click the Java Device Manager version you want.

The Software Detail Information page opens.

4 Download the JDM software for Windows to a desired directory on your system. The software download is a self-extracting .exe file.

Once the file transfer is complete, continue with step 5.


6 Navigate to the directory on your system where you downloaded the JDM Software.

7 Double-click the jdm_xxxx.exe file.

Continue with “Executing the JDM installation software on Windows” on page 152.

Note: In the file name, xxxx represents the current version of the JDM software.

Note: In the file name, xxxx represents the current version of the JDM software.



320985-A

Executing the JDM installation software on Windows

An install screen opens, followed by a Nortel dialog box. When the InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box appears (Figure 38), you are ready to install the JDM.

Figure 38 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box

1 Click Next to begin the installation process.

The License Agreement dialog box opens.



2 Click I accept the terms of the License Agreement (Figure 39).

Figure 39 License Agreement dialog box

3 Click Next.

The Choose Install Set dialog box opens (Figure 40).

Figure 40 Choose Install Set dialog box


320985-A

4 Do one of the following:

— Select Typical installation to install the common set features, as well as online help.

— Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install (recommended for those with limited disk space).

— Select Help to install only the online help.

— Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to installation.

5 Click Next.

If you did not select Custom installation in step 4, then the Choose Install Folder dialog box opens. Continue with step 8 on page 155.

If you selected Custom installation in step 4, then the Feature Sets dialog box opens (Figure 41).

Figure 41 Feature Sets dialog box

6 Select which features to install from the feature sets list.



7 Click Next.

The Choose Install Folder dialog box opens (Figure 42).

Figure 42 Choose Install Folder dialog box

8 Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM, or click Choose to select a different storage path.

Note: If Device Manager is already installed on your computer, you must choose a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version.


320985-A

9 Click Next.

The Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box opens (Figure 43).

Figure 43 Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box

10 Select the desired shortcut path from the list provided.

11 Click Next.



The Pre-Installation Summary dialog box opens (Figure 44). A summary of the choices you have made is displayed for confirmation.

Figure 44 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box

12 Verify the folder, shortcut, and disk space required to install the software. If necessary, click Previous to return to the appropriate dialog box and make changes.


320985-A

13 Click Install.

The installation process begins. When the installation is complete, the Install Complete dialog box opens (Figure 45).

Figure 45 Install Complete dialog box

14 Click Done to exit the installation.

JDM is now installed on your machine.



Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux


• “Minimum requirements” on page 160

• “Installing JDM on Linux from the CD” on page 161

• “Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD” on page 160

• “Installing JDM on HP-UX from the CD” on page 160

• “Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web” on page 161

Note: JDM installation procedures are standardized across all platforms. In addition, the required Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.4.1 is part of the JDM installation package and does not require a separate installation. The bundled JRE is used with this JDM only, and does not affect other Java applications on the same system.

Note: With Solaris and HP-UX, certain OS patches are required for JRE and JDM to function properly. Please consult SUN or HP to install the appropriate OS patches before launching JDM.

Note: UNIX and Linux systems are case-sensitive. Use lower-case to specify file names, and check to ensure that directories are entered correctly.


320985-A

Minimum requirements

JDM supports two UNIX platforms and one Linux platform:

• a UNIX SPARC* workstation running the Sun* Solaris* 2.7.x (or higher)

• an HP* workstation running the HP-UX* 11.x operating system (or higher)

• a PC running Linux Kernel 2.2 operating system (or higher)

The minimum system requirements for installing JDM on any UNIX or Linux platform are:

• 4 MB available in a temporary directory

• 300 MB free in the directory where you want to install the JDM software

• 128 MB DRAM

Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD

To install the JDM software to a Solaris environment from the CD:



3 Navigate to the Solaris/JDM subdirectory on the software CD.

4 Run the dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh file.

Continue with “Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux” on page 163.

Installing JDM on HP-UX from the CD

To install the JDM software to a HP-UX environment from the CD, follow these steps with the exact syntax:



3 Navigate to the HP-UX/JDM subdirectory on the software CD.



4 Run the jdm_xxxx_hpux_pa-risc.sh file.


Installing JDM on Linux from the CD

To install the Device Manager software to a Linux environment from the CD:



3 Navigate to the Linux/JDM subdirectory on the software CD.

4 Run the jdm_xxxx_linux.sh file.


Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web

To install the JDM software to a UNIX (Solaris or HP-UX) environment from the web:

1 Go to the following URL:


2 Select the software support page for your product.

The software page opens.

3 Click the Java Device Manager version you want.

The Software Detail Information page opens.

4 Download the JDM software for your operating environment to a desired directory on your system. The software download is a self-extracting .sh file.

Once the file transfer is complete, continue with step 5.


6 Navigate to the directory on your system where you loaded the JDM software.



320985-A

7 Make the installation file executable.

For the Solaris environment, make the file executable by entering: chmod a+x dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh

For the HP-UX environment, make the file executable by entering:chmod a+x jdm_xxxx_hpux_pa-risc.sh

For the Linux environment, make the file executable by entering:chmod a+x jdm_xxxx_linux.sh

8 Run the installation file.

For the Solaris environment, run the dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh file.

For the HP-UX environment, run the jdm_xxxx_hpux_pa-risc.sh file.

For the Linux environment, run the jdm_xxxx_linux.sh file.




Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux

An install screen opens, followed by a Nortel dialog box. When the InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box appears (Figure 46), you are ready to begin the JDM installation.

Figure 46 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box


320985-A

1 Click Next to continue the installation process.

The License Agreement dialog box opens (Figure 47).

Figure 47 License Agreement dialog box

2 Click I accept the terms of the License Agreement.



3 Click Next.

The Choose Install Set dialog box opens (Figure 48).

Figure 48 Choose Install Set dialog box


— Select Typical installation to install the common set features, as well as online help.

— Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install (recommended for those with limited disk space).

— Select Help to install only the online help.

— Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to installation.


320985-A

5 Click Next.

If you did not select Custom installation in step 4, then the Choose Install Folder dialog box opens. Continue with step 8 on page 167.

If you selected Custom installation in step 4, then the Feature Sets dialog box opens (Figure 49).

Figure 49 Feature Sets dialog box

6 Select which features to install from the feature sets list.

7 Click Next.

The Choose Install Folder dialog box opens (Figure 50).



Figure 50 Choose Install Folder dialog box

8 Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM, or click Choose to select a storage path.

Note: If Device Manager is already installed on your computer, you must choose a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version.


320985-A

9 Click Next.

The Pre-Installation Summary dialog box opens (Figure 51).

Figure 51 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box

10 Verify the folder and disk space required to install the software. If necessary, click Previous to return to the appropriate dialog box and make changes.



11 Click Install.

The installation process begins (Figure 52).

Figure 52 Installing Java Device Manager dialog box


320985-A

When the installation is complete, the Install Complete dialog box opens (Figure 53).

Figure 53 Install Complete dialog box

12 Click Done to exit the installation.

JDM is now installed on your machine.

Removing JDM in Unix or Linux environments

In a UNIX or Linux environment, complete the following steps to remove the existing JDM software:

1 Navigate to the directory where the JDM software is installed (for example /JDM).

2 Open the UninstallerData sub-directory.

3 Run the following file: Uninstall_Java_Device_Manager.



Device Manager basics

This section describes basic procedures for using the Device Manager software. The section includes the following information:

• “Starting Device Manager”

• “Setting the Device Manager properties” on page 172

• “Opening a device” on page 174

• “Device Manager window” on page 177

• “Editing objects” on page 186

• “Working with statistics and graphs” on page 186

• “Telnet session” on page 193

• “Opening an SSH connection to the device” on page 194

• “Opening the Web-based management home page” on page 194

• “Trap log” on page 195

• “Online Help” on page 196

Starting Device Manager

➨ Do one of the following, depending upon your operating system environment:

• In a Microsoft* Windows* environment, choose All Programs > Nortel > Java Device Manager > DM from the Windows Start menu.

• In a UNIX environment, verify that the Device Manager installation directory is in your search path; then enter:

./JDM

The initial Device Manager window opens (Figure 54).

Note: On startup, the Device Manager performs a DNS lookup for the machine on which it is running. If the DNS lookup is slow or fails, the initial Device Manager window may take up to 30 seconds to open.


320985-A

Figure 54 Device Manager window

Setting the Device Manager properties

The Device Manager communicates with the Ethernet Switch 325/425 using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The software is shipped with default values set for important communication parameters, such as the polling interval, timeout, and retry count. You can set the parameters before you open a device to manage.

To set the Device Manager properties:

1 Choose Device > Properties.

The Properties dialog box opens (Figure 55).



Figure 55 Properties dialog box

2 Type information and select check boxes.

3 Click OK.

Table 28 describes the Properties dialog box fields.

Table 28 Properties dialog box fields

Area Field Description

Polling Status Interval Interval at which status information is gathered (default is 20 seconds). For a full stack, set this interval to 60 seconds.

(If Traps, Status Interval:)

Interval at which statistics and status information are gathered when traps are enabled. The default is 60.

Hotswap Detect every: The interval at which Device Manager detects the module information. The default is 1 interval.

Enable Enables (true) or disables (false) periodic polling of the device for updated status. If polling is disabled, the chassis status is updated only when you click Refresh on the Chassis tab.


320985-A

Opening a device

Opening a device displays the device view, a picture of the device. To open the device view, you must enter community strings that determine the access level granted to the device.

SNMP Retry Count Number of times Device Manager sends the same polling request if a response is not returned to Device Manager.

You may want to set this field to three or four.

Timeout Length of each retry of each polling waiting period. When you access the device through a slow link, you may want to increase the timeout interval and then change the Retransmission Strategy to superlinear.

Trace The trace field is used to enable and disable SNMP tracing. When Trace is selected, SNMP protocol data units (PDUs) are displayed in the Device > Log dialog box.

Register for Traps When selected (enabled), automatically registers to received traps when Device Manager is launched against a device. This attribute does not apply to Ethernet Switch 325/425.

Listen for Traps When selected (enabled), Device Manager will listen for traps from the device.

Max Traps in Log The specified number of traps that may exist in the trap log. The default is 500.

Trap Port Specifies the UDP port that Device Manager will listen to receive SNMP traps.

Listen for Syslogs When selected (enabled), Device Manager will listen to the syslog.

Confirm row deletion A dialog box displays when checked, before deleting a row.

Default Read Community

Specifies the default read community.

Default Write Community

Specifies the default write community.

Table 28 Properties dialog box fields (continued)

Area Field Description



Table 29 describes the default access community strings for the Device Manager software.

To display the device view:


• Choose Device > Open.

• Choose Device > Open Last, and select an IP address from the list.

• Click the folder icon in the Device Manager window.

• Press Ctrl+O.

The Open Device dialog box opens (Figure 56).

Figure 56 Open Device dialog box

Table 29 SNMP community string default values

Access level Description

Read-only public

Read/write private


320985-A

Table 30 describes the Open Device dialog box fields.

2 In the Device Name text box, type the DNS name or IP address of the device.

3 In the Read Community and Write Community text boxes, type the appropriate community strings.

4 Click Open.

Device Manager automatically determines what version of software the selected device is running and displays the appropriate Device Manager dialog boxes.

The Device Manager window opens, showing a picture of the device (Figure 57) that represents the physical features of the device.

Table 30 Open Device dialog box fields

Field Description

Device Name Either an IP address or a DNS name for the device, entered by the user.

Read Community SNMP read community string for the device. Default is public (displayed as ******). The entry is case-sensitive.

Write Community SNMP write community string for the device. Default is private (displayed as *******).The entry is case-sensitive.

v3 Enabled When selected (enabled), Open Device dialog box will display SNMPv3 options.

User Name Indicates the name of the user.

Authentication Protocol

Identifies the authentication protocol used.

Authentication Password

Specifies the current authentication password.

Privacy Protocol Identifies the privacy protocol.

Privacy Password Specifies the current privacy password.

Note: To gain read/write access to a device in Device Manager, you must enter the read/write community string for both the Read Community and Write Community strings.



Figure 57 Device view

Device Manager window

The Device Manager window (Figure 58) has the following parts:

• Menu bar

• Toolbar

• Device view

• Status bar

Figure 58 Parts of the Device Manager window

Menu bar

Use the menu bar to set up and operate the Device Manager

Menu bar

Toolbar

Device view

Status bar


320985-A

Table 31 describes the Menu Bar commands.

Toolbar

The toolbar contains buttons that provide quick access to commonly used commands and some additional actions.

Table 31 Menu bar commands

Command Description

Device Opens the Open Device dialog box. It also allows you to:

• Set the Properties used during a Device Manager session

• Refresh the status of the currently viewed device• Rediscover device

• Telnet to a device

• Open an SSH connection to a device• View SNMP traps that the Device Manager receives

• View Syslogs

• View SNMP trace logs

Edit Opens edit dialog boxes for selected objects in the device view. This command opens dialog boxes for managing files, running diagnostic tests and configuring data for selected objects. This command also lets you set security parameters, SNTP, and SNMP v3 related configurations.

Graph Opens statistics and graphing dialog boxes for the selected object.

VLAN Opens dialog boxes for managing VLANs, Spanning Tree Groups (STGs), RSTP, MSTP, Multi-Link Trunks and Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).

QoS Opens configuration dialog boxes for Quality of Service (QoS) and DSCP.

RMON Opens RMON configuration and monitoring dialog boxes.

Actions Provides quick access to the Web Management Software Home page.

Help Opens online Help topics for Device Manager and provides a legend for the port colors in the device view.



Table 32 describes the toolbar buttons.

Device view

The device view allows you to determine at a glance the operating status of the various units and ports in your hardware configuration. You can also use the device view to perform management tasks on specific objects.

Table 32 Toolbar buttons

Button Name Description Menu bar equivalent

OpenDevice

Opens the Open Device dialog box.

Device > Open

Refresh Device Status

Refreshes the device view information.

Device > Refresh Status

Telnet Opens a Telnet session. Device > Telnet

SSH Opens an SSH session. Device > SSH Connection

Trap Log Opens the trap log. Device > Trap Log

Help Opens online Help in a Web browser.

Help > Device

Edit Selected

Displays configuration data for the selected chassis object.

Edit > Unit

Graph Selected

Opens statistics and graphing dialog boxes for the selected object.

Graph > PortGraph > Chassis

Home Page Opens the Web Management Software Home Page.

Actions > Open Home Page

Alarm Manager

Opens the Rmon Alarm Manager.

Rmon > Alarm Manager


320985-A

Selecting objects

The types of objects contained in the device view are:

• A standalone switch (called a unit in the menus and dialog boxes)

• A switch stack (called a chassis in the menus and dialog boxes)

• A port (including the SFP GBIC port)

Figure 59 shows the objects in the device view.

Figure 59 Objects in the device view

Selecting a single object

To select a single object:

➨ Click the edge of the object.

The object is outlined in yellow, indicating that it is selected. Subsequent activities in Device Manager refer to the selected object.

Port object

SFP GBIC Port object

Unit or

objectChassis



Selecting multiple objects

For instructions on selecting multiple objects of the same type (such as ports or switches of the same type), see Table 33:

Viewing information about a GBIC port

To view information about a GBIC port:

1 Select the GBIC.

2 Choose Edit > Port.

The Port dialog box opens with the Interface tab displayed (Figure 60).

The Interface tab describes the GBIC installed in the switch. (The Edit > Unit dialog box describes the MDA installed in the switch.)

Table 33 Selecting multiple objects

Object to be selected Action

To select a block of contiguous ports Drag to select the group of ports

To select multiple ports or switches in a stack Press Ctrl+left-click on the objects

To select all ports in a standalone switch or in a stack Choose Edit > Select > Ports

To select all the units (all switches in a stack) Choose Edit > Select > Units

To select an entire stack Choose Edit > Select > Chassis


320985-A

Figure 60 Interface tab

LEDs and ports

The color of LEDs in the device view is the same as the colors of the LEDs on the physical switch. However, the device view does not show blinking activity of the LEDs.

For a full description of the LEDs for the Ethernet Switch 325/425, refer to “About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425” on page 39.

The ports on the device view are color coded to show port status.



Table 34 describes the status assigned to each color.

In addition, the Help menu provides a legend that identifies the port colors and their meanings (Figure 61).

Figure 61 Color port legend

Shortcut menus

Each object in the device view has a shortcut menu that opens when you right-click a selected object. The switch unit shortcut menu (Figure 62) provides access to basic hardware information about the switch and to the graphing dialog boxes for the switch.

Figure 62 Switch unit shortcut menu

Table 34 Port color codes

Color Description

Green Port is operating.

Red Port has been manually disabled.

Orange Port has no link.


320985-A

Table 35 describes the Switch unit shortcut menu command on the switch unit shortcut menu.

The port shortcut menu (Figure 63) provides a faster path for editing and graphing a single port; however, you can access the same options using the menu bar or the toolbar.

Figure 63 Port shortcut menu

Table 36 describes the commands on the port shortcut menu.

Table 35 Switch unit shortcut menu command

Command Description

Edit Opens a dialog box that provides basic hardware information about the switch and allows you to set the Rate Limiting configuration for the switch unit.

Show Port Tooltip Indicates that the tooltip function is active. When unchecked, the tooltip function is disabled. A Tooltip is a descriptive text box that appears when the mouse pointer is held over a tool, button or other object.

Refresh Port Tooltip Refreshes the tooltip information.

Table 36 Port shortcut menu commands

Command Description

Edit Opens a dialog box that allows you to set operating parameters for the port.

Graph Opens a dialog box that displays statistics for the port and allows you to display the statistics as a graph.

Enable Administratively brings a port up.

Disable Administratively shuts down a port. The color of the port changes to red in the device view.



Status bar

The status bar displays error and informational messages from the software application. These messages are not related to the device being managed.

Using the buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes

Table 37 describes buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes.

Table 37 Device Manager buttons

Button Name Description

Insert Opens a dialog box to create a new entry for a table; then from the dialog box, inserts the new entry in the table.

Copy Copies selected cells from a table.

Paste Pastes copied values to a currently selected table cell.

Reset Changes

Causes changed (but not applied) fields to revert to their previous values.

Print Table or Print Graph

Prints the table or graph that is displayed.

Stop/Refresh Stops the current action (compiling, saving, and so forth). If you are updating or compiling a large data table, the Refresh button changes to a Stop button while this action is taking place. Clicking the Stop button interrupts the polling process.

Export Data Exports information to a file you specify. You can then import this file into a text editor or spreadsheet for further analysis.

Note: Not all buttons appear in all the dialog boxes.


320985-A

Editing objects

You can edit objects and values in the Device Manager device view in the following ways:

• Select an object on the toolbar, click the Edit Selected button.

The Edit dialog box opens for that object.

• From a switch or port shortcut menu, choose Edit. The Edit dialog box opens for that object.

When you change the value in a box, the changed value is displayed in bold. However, changes are not applied to the running configuration until you click Apply.

Working with statistics and graphs

Device Manager tracks a wide range of statistics for the stack (chassis), and each port. You can view and graph statistics for a single object or multiple objects. For information about the statistics tracked for the switch and ports, refer to “Statistics for single and multiple objects” on page 190 and to the System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A).

This section describes the types of statistics and graphs available, the graph dialog boxes, and the procedure for creating a graph.

Note: Many dialog boxes contain a Refresh button. After you apply changes to fields, click Refresh to display the new information in the dialog box.



Types of statistics

The data tables in the statistics dialog boxes list the counters, or categories of statistics being gathered, for the specified object. For example, the categories for ports include Interface, Ethernet Errors, Bridge, and Rmon. Each category can be associated with six types of statistics.

Table 38 describes the types of statistics that are available.

Types of graphs

With Device Manager, you can create line, area, bar, and pie graphs. Figure 64, Figure 65, Figure 66, and Figure 67 provide examples of different types of graphs.

Table 38 Types of statistics

Statistic Description

AbsoluteValue The total count since the last time counters were reset. A system reboot resets all counters.

Cumulative The total count since the statistics window was first opened. The elapsed time for the cumulative counter is displayed at the bottom of the graph window.

Average The cumulative count divided by the cumulative elapsed time.

Minimum The minimum average for the counter for a given polling interval over the cumulative elapsed time.

Maximum The maximum average for the counter for a given polling interval over the cumulative elapsed time.

LastValue The average for the counter over the last polling interval.


320985-A

Figure 64 Line graph

Figure 65 Area graph



Figure 66 Bar graph

Figure 67 Pie graph


320985-A

Statistics for single and multiple objects

Statistics for a selected object or objects are displayed in the statistics dialog box.

The dialog box for a single object shows all six types of statistics for each counter (Figure 68).

Figure 68 Interface statistics for a single port

The statistics dialog box for multiple objects shows a single type of statistics (Table 38 on page 187) for the selected objects. For example, Figure 69 shows LastValue statistics for the selected ports.

Figure 69 Interface statistics for multiple ports



To change the type of statistics displayed, select a different type from the show list at the bottom of the dialog box.

The statistics are updated based on the poll interval shown at the bottom of the dialog box. You can select a different polling interval.

Buttons for bar, pie, and line graphs are located at the bottom of a statistics dialog box.

See the next section, “Viewing statistics as graphs”, for instructions to use these buttons.

You can export the statistics to a tab-separated file format and import the file into other applications. To export the information, use the Export Data button below the table.

Viewing statistics as graphs

To create a graph for an object:

1 Select the object or objects to be graphed.

See “Selecting objects” on page 180.


• On the toolbar, click Graph Selected.

• From the shortcut menu for the object, choose Graph.

• From the main menu, choose Graph > Chassis or Graph > Port.

A statistics dialog box opens with tabs for different categories of statistics for the selected object (Figure 70).


320985-A

Figure 70 Statistics dialog box for a port

3 Select a tab for the group of statistics you want to view.

4 On the displayed data table, click and drag to select the cells you want to graph. (They must be in the same row or column.)

5 Click one of the graph buttons at the bottom of the dialog box

See “Types of graphs” on page 187.

A graph dialog box opens for the selected graph type.

6 To print a copy of the graph, click Print.

Buttons at the top of the graph dialog boxes for line, area, and bar graphs allow you to change the orientation of the graph, change the scale, or change the graph type.



Table 39 describes the buttons in the graph dialog boxes.

Telnet session

From Device Manager, you can initiate a Telnet session to the console interface for the switch or stack you are currently accessing.

To Telnet to a switch:

➨ Do one of the following:

• From the Device Manager main menu, choose Device> Telnet.

• On the toolbar, click the Telnet button.

Table 39 Graph dialog box buttons

Button Name Description

Stacked “Stacks” data quantities instead of displaying them side-by-side.

Horizontal Rotates the graph 90 degrees.

Log Scale Changes the scale of the x-axis (of an unrotated graph) from numeric to logarithmic.

Line Chart Converts an area graph or bar graph to a line graph.

Area Chart Converts a line graph or bar graph to an area graph.

Bar Chart Converts a line graph or area graph to a bar graph.

Pie Chart Converts a line graph or area graph to a pie chart.


320985-A

A Telnet window to the switch opens.

Opening an SSH connection to the device

From Device Manager, you can initiate a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to the Console Interface for the switch or stack you are currently accessing.

To open an SSH connection to a device:


• From the Device Manager main menu, choose Device > SSH Connection.

• On the toolbar, click the SSH button.

An SSH window to the device opens.

Opening the Web-based management home page

From the Device Manager, you can access the Web-based management home page.

To open the Web-based management home page:


Note: The SSH connection is established only when the device is SSH capable and enabled. For more information on SSH connections, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).



• From the Device Manager main menu, choose Actions > Open Home Page.

• On the toolbar, click the Open Home Page button.

The Web-based management home page opens (Figure 71).

Figure 71 Web-based management home page

Trap log

You can configure an Ethernet Switch 325/425 to send SNMP generic traps. When the Device Manager is running, any traps received are recorded in the trap log. You set the maximum number of entries in the trap log using the Properties dialog box (Figure 55 on page 173). The default number of trap log entries is 500.

To view the trap log:



320985-A

• On the toolbar, click the Trap Log button.

• From the Device Manager Main Menu, choose Device > Trap Log.

Device Manager receives traps on port 162. If this port is being used by another application, you will not be able to view the trap log until the other application is disabled and Device Manager is restarted.

By default, traps are sent in SNMP V2c format. However, if you are using an older network management system (NMS), one that supports only SNMP V1 traps (HP OpenView), you can specify the traps to be sent in V1 format.

For more information about traps and trap receivers, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

Online Help

Online Help in Device Manager is context-sensitive. You use a Web browser to display online Help. The Web browser should launch automatically when you click the Help button. If the Help topic you are accessing is not displayed in your browser, exit the existing browser session and click the Help button again.

If the Web browser does not launch, the default locations of the Help files are the directories listed below.

Note: When you operate Device Manager from a UNIX platform, you must be logged in as root in order to receive traps.



Table 40 describes the Help file locations.

Table 40 Help file locations

Platform Default path

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP

<JDM Installation directory>/help/hummingbird/v360.zip.

After you unzip the file, <JDM Installation directory>/help/ hummingbird/v360/help.html.

help.html is the home page for the online help.

UNIX <JDM Installation directory>/help/hummingbird/v360.zip.

After you unzip the file, <JDM Installation directory>/help/ hummingbird/v360/help.html.help.html is the home page for the online help.


320985-A

199


Chapter 5Using the Web-based management interface

This chapter describes the requirements for using the Web-based management interface and how to use it as a tool to configure your Ethernet Switch 325/425.

Requirements

To use the Web-based management interface, you need the following items:

• A computer connected to a network port that is a member of the management VLAN

• One of the following Web browsers installed on the computer:

— Microsoft* Internet Explorer, version 4.0 or later on Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT*, or Windows XP*

— Netscape Navigator*, version 4.51 or later on Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP, and UNIX*

• IP address of the Ethernet Switch 325/425

For instructions to set the IP address of the switch, refer to “IP Configuration/Setup screen” on page 214.

Note: The Web pages of the Web-based management interface may load at different speeds depending on the Web browser you use.

Note: In order to use the Ethernet Switch 325/425 Web-based management functionality, such as downloading software, you must connect your TFTP server to an Ethernet Switch 325/425.

200 Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface

320985-A

Access to the Web management interface must also be enabled for the switch (the default setting) using the Console Interface. For information about enabling Web access, refer to “TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen” on page 234.

Logging in to the Web-based management interface

Before you log in to the Web-based management interface, use the console interface to verify the VLAN port assignments and to ensure that your switch CPU and computer are assigned to the same VLAN. If the devices are not connected to the same VLAN, the IP address will not display the home page.

To log in to the Web-based management interface:

1 Start your Web browser.

2 In the address bar, type the IP address for your host switch, for example, http://192.168.151.175, and press Enter.

The home page opens (Figure 72).

Figure 72 Web-based management interface home page

Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface 201


Network security does not exist the first time you access the Embedded Web Server. The system administrator must create access parameters and passwords to protect the integrity of your network configuration(s). For more information, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

Menu

The menu (Figure 73) is the same for all pages. It contains a list of seven main headings.

Figure 73 Menu

To navigate the Web-based management interface menu, click a menu title and then click one of its options. When you click an option, the corresponding page opens.

The first six headings provide options for viewing and configuring switch parameters. The Support heading provides options to open the online Help file and the Nortel Web site.


320985-A

Table 41 lists the main headings in the Web-based management user interface and their associated options.

Table 41 Main headings and options

Main menu titles Option

Summary Stack Information (stack mode only)Switch InformationIdentify Unit Numbers (stack mode only)Stack Numbering (stack mode only)

Configuration IPSystemSNMPv1SNMPv3SNMP TrapMAC Address TableFind MAC AddressPort ManagementHigh Speed Flow ControlSoftware DownloadASCII Config DownloadConfiguration FileConsole/Comm Port

Fault RMON ThresholdRMON Event LogSystem Log

Statistics PortInterfaceEthernet ErrorsTransparent BridgingRMON EthernetRMON History

Application Port MirroringRate LimitingMAC Address SecurityVLANSpanning TreeMultilink TrunkLACPQoS



Tools are provided in the menu to assist you in navigating the Web-based management interface.

Table 42 describes the icons that appear on the menu.

Administration System InformationQuick StartSecurityLogoutResetReset to Defaults

Support HelpRelease NotesManualsUpgrade

Caution: Web browser capabilities such as page bookmarking, refresh, and page forward and page back, function as they would in any other Web site. However, these capabilities do not enhance the functionality of the Web-based management interface. Nortel recommends that you use only the navigation tools provided in the management interface.

Table 42 Menu icons

Button or icon Description

This icon identifies a menu title. Click on this icon to display its options.

This icon identifies a menu title option. Click on this icon to display the corresponding page.

This icon identifies a menu title option with a hyperlink to related pages.

This icon is linked to an action, for example, logout, reset, or reset to system defaults.

Clicking on the Nortel logo opens the corporate home page in a new Web browser.

Table 41 Main headings and options (continued)

Main menu titles Option


320985-A

Management page

When you click a menu option, the corresponding management page opens. Figure 74 shows the page displayed for the Administration > Security > Console option.

Figure 74 Console page

A page is composed of one or more of the following elements:

• Tables and input forms

The gray cells in a page are display only, and white cells are input fields.

• Check boxes

You enable or disable a selection by clicking a check box. When a check mark is displayed in the box, that selection is enabled. You disable a selection by clicking the checked box.

Note: The Console Stack Password Setting section is active only when the switch is in the stack mode.



• Icons and buttons

Icons and buttons perform an action concerning the displayed page or the switch. Some pages include a button that opens another page or updates the values shown on the current page. Some pages include icons that initiate an action, such as reformatting the current displayed data as a bar or pie chart.

Table 43 describes the icons that you use to modify information in a statistical table.

Viewing summary information

This section contains information on the following topics:

• “Viewing summary switch information”

• “Viewing stack information” on page 207

• “Changing stack numbering” on page 209

• “Identifying unit numbers” on page 211

Table 43 Page icons

Icon Name Description

Modify Accesses a modification page for the selected row.

View Accesses a view only statistics page for the selected row.

Delete Deletes a row.

Help Accesses the Help menu in a new Web browser.

Note: Text within a table that is underlined and highlighted in blue and is a hyperlink to a related management page.


320985-A

Viewing summary switch information

You can view summary information about the switch. For example, the unit number and its corresponding physical description and serial number.

To view summary switch information:

➨ From the main menu, choose Summary > Switch Information.

The Switch Information page opens (Figure 75).

Figure 75 Switch Information page

Table 44 describes the fields on the Switch Information page.

Table 44 Switch Information page fields

Item Description

Module Description The factory set description of the policy switch.

GBIC Description The factory set description of the sub-component/GBIC.

Firmware Version The firmware version of the policy switch.

Software Version The version of the running software.



Viewing stack information

You can view a summary of your stack framework, for example, the current version of the running software and the IP address of the Web-based management interface.

To view stack information:

1 From the main menu, choose Summary > Stack Information.

The Stack Information page opens (Figure 76).

Manufacturing Data Code

The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format.

Hardware Version The hardware version of the policy switch.

Serial Number The serial number of the policy switch.

Operational State The current operational state of the device. The operational states are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal, Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal Errors, Fatal Error, and Not Configured.

Mac Address The mac address of the switch.

IP Address The IP address of the switch.

Power Status The power status of the switch.

Fans Status The fan status of the switch.

Note: The Web-based management user interface automatically detects the operational mode of your system. If the system is in standalone mode, the Stack Information page is not an option listed in the menu.

Table 44 Switch Information page fields

Item Description


320985-A

Figure 76 Stack Information page

Table 45 describes the fields on the Stack Information and Stack Inventory sections of the Stack Information page.

Table 45 Stack Information page fields

Section Field Description

Stack Information

System Description The name created in the configuration process to identify the stack.

Software Version The version of the running software.

MAC Address The MAC address of the stack.

IP Address The IP address of the stack.

Manufacturing Date Code

The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format: YYYYMMDD.

Serial Number The serial number of the base unit.

Operational State The current operational state of the device. The operational states are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal, Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal Errors, Fatal Error, and Not Configured



2 In the lower-left corner of the Stack Information page, click the number of the device you want to view.

The Stack Information page is updated with information about the selected switch.

Changing stack numbering

If your system is set to “stack” operational mode, you can view existing stack numbering information and renumber the devices in your stack framework.

To view or renumber devices within the stack framework:

1 From the main menu, choose Summary > Stack Numbering.

The Stack Numbering page opens (Figure 77).

Stack Inventory Unit The unit number assigned to the device by the network manager.

For more information on stack numbering, see page 209.

Description The description of the device or its subcomponent.

Operational State The current operational state of the stack. The operational states are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal, Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal Errors, Fatal Error, and Not Configured.

Note: The unit number does not affect the base unit designation.

Table 45 Stack Information page fields (continued)

Section Field Description


320985-A

Figure 77 Stack Numbering Setting page

Table 46 describes the fields on the Stack Numbering Setting page.

2 Click Submit.

A message opens prompting you to confirm your request.


• Click OK to renumber the stack.

• Click Cancel to return to the Stack Numbering page without making changes.

Table 46 Stack Numbering Setting page fields

Item Range Description

Current Unit Number 1..8 Unit number previously assigned to the policy switch. The entries in this column are displayed in the order of their current physical cabling with respect to the base unit, and can show nonconsecutive unit numbering if one or more units were previously moved or modified. The entries can also include unit numbers of units that are no longer participating in the stack (not currently active).

MAC Address XX.XX.XX.XX.XX.XX MAC address of the corresponding unit listed in the Current Unit Number field.

New Unit Number 1..8 Choose a new number from the list to assign to your selected policy switch.



Identifying unit numbers

You can identify unit numbers of the switches participating in a stack configuration by viewing the active LEDs on the front panel of each switch.

To identify unit numbers in your configuration:

1 From the main menu, choose Summary > Identify Unit Numbers.

The Identify Unit Numbers page opens (Figure 78).

Figure 78 Identify Unit Numbers page

2 To continue viewing summary information or to start the configuration process, choose another option from the main menu.


320985-A

213


Chapter 6System configuration using the Console Interface

This chapter describes how to configure and manage the Ethernet Switch 325/425 using the menu-driven Console Interface (CI).

This chapter covers the following topics:

• “IP Configuration/Setup screen”

• “SNMP Configuration screen”

• “System Characteristics screen” on page 221

• “Console/Comm Port Configuration screen” on page 223

• “Logging in” on page 231

• “Renumber Stack Units screen” on page 232

• “Hardware Unit Information screen” on page 233

• “TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen” on page 234

• “Software Download screen” on page 237

• “Configuration File Download/Upload screen” on page 240

• “ASCII Configuration file Download” on page 244

• “Using SNTP”

• “Using DNS to ping and Telnet”

214 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

320985-A

IP Configuration/Setup screen

The IP Configuration/Setup screen (Figure 79) allows you to set or modify the Ethernet Switch 325/425 IP configuration parameters. Data that you enter in the user-configurable fields takes effect as soon as you press Enter.

To open the IP Configuration/Setup screen:

Figure 79 IP Configuration/Setup screen

Table 47 describes the IP Configuration/Setup screen fields.

➨Choose IP Configuration/Setup (or press i) from the main menu.

Note: The read-only fields in this screen are updated based on the BootP mode specified in the BootP Request Mode field. (See “Choosing a BootP request mode” on page 216 for more information.)

IP Configuration/Setup

BootP Request Mode: [ BootP When Needed ]

Configurable In Use Last BootP ------------------- --------------- -------------In-Band Stack IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0In-Band Switch IP Address: [ 134.177.224.102 ] 134.177.224.102 0.0.0.0In-Band Subnet Mask: [ 255.255.255.0 ] 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0

Default Gateway: [ 134.177.224.1 ] 134.177.224.1 0.0.0.0

IP Address to Ping: [ 10.30.40.1 ]Start Ping: [ No ]


Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 215


Table 47 IP Configuration/Setup screen fields

Field Description

BootP Request Mode

One of four modes of operation for BootP. (See “Choosing a BootP request mode” on page 216 for details about the four modes.)

Default Value BootP When Needed

Range BootP Disabled, BootP When Needed, BootP Always, BootP or Last Address

Configurable Column header for the user-configurable IP configuration fields in this screen.

In Use Column header for the read-only fields in this screen. The read-only data displayed in this column represents IP configuration that is currently in use.

Last BootP Column header for the read-only fields in this screen. The read-only data displayed in this column represents IP configuration obtained from the last BootP reply received.

In-Band Stack IP Address

The in-band stack IP address field. This field is not required for the operation of the standalone switch.

Default Value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)

Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal point

In-Band Switch IP Address

The in-band IP address of the switch. This field is not required for the operation of the stack. This field can not use the same IP address used for the stack.



Note: When the IP address is entered in the In-Band IP Address field, and the In-Band Subnet Mask field value is not present, the software provides an in-use default value for the In-Band Subnet Mask field that is based on the class of the IP address entered in the In-Band IP Address field.


320985-A

Choosing a BootP request mode

The BootP Request Mode field in the IP Configuration screen allows you to choose which method the switch uses to broadcast BootP requests:

• BootP When Needed

• BootP Always

• BootP Disabled

In-Band Subnet Mask

The subnet address mask associated with the in-band IP address shown on the screen (see In-Band Switch IP address field). Network routers use the subnet mask to determine the network or subnet address portion of a host’s IP address. The bits in the IP address that contain the network address (including the subnet) are set to 1 in the address mask, and the bits that contain the host identifier are set to 0.

Default Value 0.0.0.0 (no subnet mask assigned)


Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway.



IP Address to Ping

The IP address of the network device you want to ping. This field is not required for the operation of the stack.



Start Ping Pings the selected network device when you choose Yes.

Default Value No

Range No, Yes

Table 47 IP Configuration/Setup screen fields (continued)

Field Description



• BootP or Last Address

BootP When Needed

Allows the switch to request an IP address if one has not already been set from the console terminal. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in the BootP When Needed mode as described in the steps below:

• When the IP data is entered from the console terminal, the data becomes the in-use address of the switch and BootP requests are not broadcast. The switch can be managed using this in-band IP address.

• When the in-band IP address is not set from the console terminal, the switch broadcasts BootP requests until it receives a BootP reply containing an IP address. If the switch does not receive a BootP reply that contains an IP address, the switch cannot be managed in-band.

If an IP address is not currently in use, these actions take effect immediately. If an IP address is currently in use, these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled.

BootP Always

This option allows you to manage the switch that has been configured with the IP address obtained from the BootP server. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in the BootP Always mode as described in the steps below:

• The switch continues to broadcast BootP requests, regardless of whether an in-band IP address is set from the console terminal.

• If the switch receives a BootP reply that contains an in-band IP address, the switch uses this new in-band IP address.

Note: Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests, the BootP process eventually times out if a reply is not received. When the process times out, the BootP request mode automatically changes to BootP Disabled mode. To restart the BootP process, change the BootP request mode to any of the three following modes:

• BootP When Needed • BootP Always• BootP or Last Address.


320985-A

• If the switch does not receive a BootP reply, the switch cannot be managed using the in-band IP address set from the console terminal.

If an IP address is not currently in use, these actions take effect immediately. If an IP address is currently in use, these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled.

BootP Disabled

This option allows you to manage the switch by using the IP address set from the console terminal. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in the BootP Disabled mode as described in the steps below:

• The switch does not broadcast BootP requests, regardless of whether an IP address is set from the console terminal.

• The switch can be managed only by using the in-band switch IP address set from the console terminal.

BootP or Last Address

This option allows you to manage the switch even if a BootP server is not reachable. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in the BootP or Last Address mode as described in the steps below:

• When you specify the IP data from the console terminal, the IP address becomes the in-band address of the switch. BootP requests are not broadcast. You can manage the switch using this in-band IP address.

• When you do not specify the in-band IP address from the console terminal, the switch broadcasts BootP requests until it receives a BootP reply containing an in-band IP address. If the switch does not receive a BootP reply that contains an in-band IP address within 10 minutes, the switch uses the last in-band IP address it received from a BootP server. This IP information is displayed in the Last BootP column.

If the IP address specified as the in-band IP address is not currently in use, these actions take effect immediately. If an IP address is currently in use, these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled.



SNMP Configuration screen

The SNMP Configuration screen (Figure 80) allows you to set or modify the SNMP configuration parameters.

To open the SNMP Configuration screen:

Figure 80 SNMP Configuration screen

➨Choose SNMP Configuration (or press m) from the main menu.

SNMP Configuration

Read-Only Community String: [ public ] Read-Write Community String: [ private ]

Trap #1 IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ] Community String: [ ] Trap #2 IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ] Community String: [ ] Trap #3 IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ] Community String: [ ] Trap #4 IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ] Community String: [ ]

Authentication Trap: [ Enabled ] AutoTopology: [ Enabled ]



320985-A

Table 48 describes the SNMP Configuration screen fields.

Table 48 SNMP Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Read-Only Community String

The community string used for in-band read-only SNMP operations.

Default Value public


Read-Write Community String

The community string used for in-band read-write SNMP operations.

Default value private


Trap #1 IP Address1

1 The Trap IP Address and Community String fields can be set using a MIB table (in a Nortel proprietary MIB). The status of the row in the MIB table can be set to Ignore. If the row status is set to Ignore, the fields appear to be set when viewed from the console terminal; however, no traps are sent to that address until the row status is set to Valid.

Number one of four trap IP addresses. Successive Trap IP address fields are numbered 2, 3, and 4. Each trap address has an associated community string (see Community String).

Default value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)

Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point

Community String The community string associated with one of the four trap IP addresses (see Trap #1 IP Address).

Default value Zero-length string


Authentication Trap Determines whether a trap is sent when there is an SNMP authentication failure.

Default value Enabled


Autotopology Allows you to enable or disable the switch participation in autotopology, which allows network topology mapping of other switches in your network.


Range Disabled



System Characteristics screen

The System Characteristics screen (Figure 81) allows you to view system characteristics and contains three user-configurable fields: sysContact, sysName, and sysLocation.

To open the System Characteristics screen:

➨ Choose System Characteristics (or press s) from the main menu.

Figure 81 System Characteristics screen


Operation Mode: Switch

MAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80

Reset Count: 9Last Reset Type: Management ResetPower Status: Primary PowerLocal GBIC Type: port 49, None port 50, NonesysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1sysUpTime: 7 days, 17:49:05 sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized.sysServices: 3sysContact: [ ]sysName: [ Ethernet 428-48T ]sysLocation: [ ]



320985-A

Table 49 describes the System Characteristics screen fields

Table 49 System Characteristics screen fields

Field Description

Operation Mode Read-only field that indicates the operation mode of the unit, for example:• When the unit is part of a stack configuration, the (read-only) field indicates the

unit is operational in a stack, and lists the current unit number of this switch. In this example (see Figure 81 on page 221), the current unit number is Unit 2.

• When the unit is not part of a stack configuration (operating standalone), the read-only field indicates the unit is operating as a switch. When in this operation mode, the Size of Stack and Base Unit fields (see following description) do not appear.

Size of Stack This read-only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration. This field indicates the number of units configured in the stack configuration (1 to 8 units maximum).

Base Unit This read-only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration. This field indicates the unit number of the switch that is currently operating as the base unit.

MAC Address The MAC address of the switch or, when the switch is participating in a stack configuration, the MAC address of the stack configuration.

Reset Count A read-only field that indicates the number of resets since the operational firmware was first loaded on the switch.

Default Value 1

Range 0 to 232 -1 (4,294,967,295)

Last Reset Type A read-only field that indicates the last type of reset.

Default Value Power Cycle

Range Power Cycle, Software Download, Management Reset, Management Factory Reset

Power Status A read-only field that indicates the current power source (primary, RPSU, or both).

Default Value Primary Power

Range Primary Power, Redundant Power, Primary and Redundant Power

Local GBIC Type A read-only field that indicates the GBIC type that is configured in this unit. (This field is applicable only to the Ethernet Switch 425).

sysDescr A read-only field that specifies hardware and software versions.

sysObjectID A read-only field that provides a unique identification of the switch, which contains the vendor’s private enterprise number.

sysUpTime A read-only field that shows the length of time since the last reset. Note that this field is updated when the screen is redisplayed.



Console/Comm Port Configuration screen

The Console/Comm Port Configuration screen (Figure 82) allows you to configure and modify the console/comm port parameters and security features of a standalone switch or any participating switch in a stack configuration.

To open the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen:

➨ Choose Console/Comm Port Configuration (or press o) from the main menu.

sysServices A read-only field that indicates the switch’s physical and data link layer functionality.

sysContact The name and phone number of the person responsible for the switch.



sysName A name that uniquely identifies the switch.



sysLocation The physical location of the switch.



1 Although this field can be set to up to 255 characters from a Network Management Station (NMS), only 56 characters are displayed on the console terminal.

Table 49 System Characteristics screen fields (continued)

Field Description


320985-A

Figure 82 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen

Note: Release 3.6 software supports a security enhancement that provides usernames in addition to passwords for switch access. If you set a password in the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen, the next time you log in to the switch, you are prompted to enter a valid username (see Figure 83 on page 231). Therefore, ensure you are aware of the valid usernames (default RW and RO) before you change passwords. For information about modifying existing usernames, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

Console/Comm Port Configuration

Comm Port Data Bits: 8 Data Bits Comm Port Parity: No Parity Comm Port Stop Bits: 1 Stop Bit Console Port Speed: [ 9600 Baud ]

Console Switch Password Type: [ None ] Console Stack Password Type: [ None ] Telnet/WEB Switch Password Type: [ None ] Telnet/WEB Stack Password Type: [ None ]

Console Read-Only Switch Password: [ user ] Console Read-Write Switch Password: [ secure ] Console Read-Only Stack Password: [ user ] Console Read-Write Stack Password: [ secure ]

Primary RADIUS Server: [ 0.0.0.0 ] Secondary RADIUS Server: [ 0.0.0.0 ] UDP RADIUS Port: [ 1645 ] RADIUS Shared Secret: [ ]




Table 50 describes the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields.

Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Comm Port Data Bits A read-only field that indicates the current console/comm port data bit setting.

Comm Port Parity A read-only field that indicates the current console/comm port parity setting.

Comm Port Stop Bits A read-only field that indicates the current console/comm port stop bit setting.

Console Port Speed Allows you to set the console/comm port baud rate to match the baud rate of the console terminal.

Default Value: 9600 Baud

Range: 2400 Baud, 4800 Baud, 9600 Baud, 19200 Baud, 38400 Baud

Caution: If you choose a baud rate that does not match your console terminal baud rate, you can lose communication with the configuration interface when you press Enter. If communication is lost, set your console terminal to match the new service port setting.

Achtung: Bei Auswahl einer Baud rate, die nicht mit der Baudrate des Konsolenterminals übereinstimmt, geht die Kommunikation mit der Konsolenschnittstelle verloren, wenn Sie die Eingabetaste drücken. Stellen Sie in diesem Fall das Konsolenterminal so ein, daß es mit der neuen Einstellung der Service-Schnittstelle übereinstimmt.

Attention: Si vous sélectionnez un débit différent de celui de votre terminal, vous perdrez le contact avec l'interface de votre console dès que vous appuierez sur [Entrée]. Pour restaurer la communication, alignez le débit de votre terminal sur le nouveau débit de votre port de service.

Precaución: Si selecciona una velocidad de transmisión que no coincide con la velocidad de transmisión del terminal de la consola, perderá la comunicación con el interfaz de la consola al pulsar [Intro]. Si se pierde la comunicación, ajuste el terminal de la consola para que coincida con el nuevo valor del puerto de servicio.

Attenzione: Nel caso in cui si scelga una velocità di trasmissione non corrispondente a quella del terminale della console, la comunicazione con l'interfaccia della console cadrà premendo il tasto [Invio]. Se la comunicazione cade, impostare il terminale della console in modo tale che corrisponda alla nuova impostazione della porta di servizio.


320985-A

Console Switch Password Type

Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of a standalone switch through a console terminal.

If you set this field to Local Password, you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the CI. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the console-terminal prompt. See Console Read-Only Switch Password and Console Read-Write Switch Password for more information.

Default Value None

Range None, Local Password, RADIUS Authentication

Console Stack Password Type

Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of any participating switch in a stack configuration through a console terminal.

If you set this field to Required, you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the CI of any stack unit. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the console-terminal prompt when accessing the stack. See Console Read-Only Stack Password and Console Read-Write Stack Password for more information.

Default Value None


TELNET/WEB Switch Password Type

Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of a standalone switch through a Telnet/WEB session.If you set this field to Required, you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the CI. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the console-terminal prompt. See Console Read-Only Switch Password and Console Read-Write Switch Password descriptions for more information.

Default Value None


TELNET/WEB Stack Password Type

Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of any participating switch in a stack configuration, through a Telnet/WEB session.

If you set this field to Required, you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the CI of any stack unit. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the console-terminal prompt when accessing the stack. See Console Read-Only Stack Password and Console Read-Write Stack Password for more information.

Default Value None


Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description



Console Read-Only Switch Password

When the Console Switch Password field is set to Required (for Telnet, for Console, or for Both), this field allows read-only password access to the CI of a standalone switch. Users can access the CI using the correct password (see default), but cannot change parameters or use the Reset option or Reset to Default option.

Default Value user

Range An ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters

Console Read-Write Switch Password

When the Console Switch Password field is set to Required (for Telnet, for Console, or for Both), this field allows read-write password access to the CI of a standalone switch. Users can log in to the CI using the correct password (see default) and can change any parameter, except the stack passwords.

You can change the default passwords for read-only access and read-write access to a private password.

Default Value: secure

Range: Any ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters

Caution: If you change the system-supplied default passwords, be sure to write the new passwords down and keep them in a safe place. If you forget the new passwords, you cannot access the console interface. In that case, contact Nortel for help.

Achtung: Wenn Sie die für das System standardmäßig eingestellten Paßwörter ändern, notieren Sie sich die neuen Paßwörter, und bewahren Sie sie an einem sicheren Ort auf. Falls Sie die neuen Paßwörter vergessen, können Sie nicht mehr auf die Konsolenschnittstelle zugreifen. Wenden Sie sich in diesem Fall an Nortel, um Unterstützung zu erhalten.

Attention: Si vous changez les mots de passe par défaut du système, assurez-vous de bien noter vos nouveaux mots de passe et de les conserver dans un endroit sûr. Si vous perdez vos nouveaux mots de passe, vous ne pourrez plus accéder à votre interface. Le cas échéant, veuillez contacter Nortel.

Precaución: Si modifica las contraseñas predeterminadas asignadas por el sistema, asegúrese de anotar las nuevas contraseñas y guárdelas en un lugar seguro. Si olvida las nuevas contraseñas, no podrá acceder al interfaz de la consola. En ese caso, póngase en contacto con Nortel para obtener ayuda al respecto.

Attenzione: In caso di modifica delle password predefinite nel sistema, assicurarsi di annotare le nuove password e di conservarle in un luogo sicuro. Nel caso in cui le nuove password vengano dimenticate, non sarà possibile accedere all'interfaccia della console. In tal caso, contattare la Nortel per avere assistenza.


Field Description


320985-A

Console Read-Only Stack Password

When the Console Switch Password field is set to Required (for Telnet, for Console, or for Both), this field allows read-only password access to the CI of any participating switch in a stack configuration. Users can access the CI using the correct password (see default), but cannot change any parameters or use the Reset option or Reset to Default option.

Default Value user



Field Description



Console Read-Write Stack Password

When the Console Switch Password field is set to Local Password (for Telnet, for Console, or for Both), this field allows read-write password access to the CI of any participating switch in a stack configuration. Users can log in to the CI using the correct password (see default), and can change any parameter, except the switch password.

You can change the default passwords for read-only access and read-write access to a private password.

Default Value: secure

Range: Any ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters

Caution: When you change the system-supplied default passwords, be sure to write the new passwords down and keep them in a safe place. If you forget the new passwords, you cannot access the console interface. In that case, contact Nortel for help.

Achtung: Wenn Sie die für das System standardmäßig eingestellten Paßwörter ändern, notieren Sie sich die neuen Paßwörter, und bewahren Sie sie an einem sicheren Ort auf. Falls Sie die neuen Paßwörter vergessen, können Sie nicht mehr auf die Konsolenschnittstelle zugreifen. Wenden Sie sich in diesem Fall an Nortel, um Unterstützung zu erhalten.

Attention: Si vous changez les mots de passe par défaut du système, assurez-vous de bien noter vos nouveaux mots de passe et de les conserver dans un endroit sûr. Si vous perdez vos nouveaux mots de passe, vous ne pourrez plus accéder à votre interface. Le cas échéant, veuillez contacter Nortel.

Precaución: Si modifica las contraseñas predeterminadas asignadas por el sistema, asegúrese de anotar las nuevas contraseñas y guárdelas en un lugar seguro. Si olvida las nuevas contraseñas, no podrá acceder al interfaz de la consola. En ese caso, póngase en contacto con Nortel para obtener ayuda al respecto.

Attenzione: In caso di modifica delle password predefinite nel sistema, assicurarsi di annotare le nuove password e di conservarle in un luogo sicuro. Nel caso in cui le nuove password vengano dimenticate, non sarà possibile accedere all'interfaccia della console. In tal caso, contattare la Nortel per avere assistenza.


Field Description


320985-A

Primary RADIUS Server The IP address of the Primary RADIUS server.

Default 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)


Secondary RADIUS Server

The IP address of the Secondary RADIUS server.

Default 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)


RADIUS UPD Port The user datagram protocol (UDP) port for the RADIUS server.

Default 1645

Range 0 to 65536

RADIUS Shared Secret Your special switch security code that provides authentication to the RADIUS server.

Default Null string (which is not authenticated)

Range Any contiguous ASCII string that contains at least 1 printable character, up to a maximum of 35


Field Description



Logging in

If you set a password in the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen (Figure 82 on page 224), the next time you access the switch, you are prompted for a username and password as shown in Figure 83 (default usernames are RW and RO).

Figure 83 Login screen

Enter a valid username and password and press Enter. You are then directed to the Console Interface main menu.

For information about modifying the existing usernames, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:0C FW 3.5.0.2 SW 3.6.0

Username: [ RW ] Password: [ *************** ]

Enter Password: ********

Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.


320985-A

Renumber Stack Units screen

The Renumber Stack Units screen (Figure 75) allows you to renumber the units configured in the stack. When selected, this option identifies the unit number of each unit in the stack configuration by lighting the corresponding number of (100 Mb/s port) LEDs on each unit for approximately 10 seconds. For example, unit 3 displays three LEDs.

To open the Renumber Stack Units screen:

➨ Choose Renumber Stack Units (or press n) from the main menu.

Figure 84 Renumber Stack Units screen.

Note: This menu option and screen appears only when the switch is participating in a stack configuration.

Renumber Stack Units Current Unit Number MAC Address New Unit Number ------------------- ---------------------------- --------------- [ 1 ] 00-60-fd-77-a6-0c [ 1 ] [ 2 ] 00-60-fd-77-a5-f0 [ 2 ] [ 3 ] 00-60-fd-77-a4-4c [ 3 ] [ 4 ] 00-60-fd-77-ab-84 [ 4 ] Renumbering stack units will cause an automatic Reset to Current Settings to occur across the entire stack. The current configuration will be adapted to the new numbering scheme. Check the stack configuration after the reset to confirm the desired configuration is set. Are you sure you want to renumber switches with the new settings? [ No ] Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.



Table 51 describes the Renumber Stack Units screen fields.

Hardware Unit Information screen

The Hardware Unit Information screen (Figure 85) lists the switch models, including any installed GBICs that are configured in your standalone or stack configuration.

To open the Hardware Unit Information screen.

➨ Choose Display Hardware Units (or press h) from the main menu.

Table 51 Renumber Stack Units screen fields

Field Description

Current Unit Number Read-only field which lists the current unit number of each of the configured stack units. The entries in this column are displayed in order of their current physical cabling with respect to the base unit, and can show nonconsecutive unit numbering if one or more units were previously moved or modified. The entries can also include unit numbers of units that are no longer participating in the stack (not currently active).

MAC Address Read-only field listing the MAC address of the corresponding unit listed in the Current Unit Number field.

New Unit Number Allows you to set the current unit number of each unit in the stack. You can change any of the fields, as required. You can also delete entries by typing zero (0) or using the space bar to clear the field.

Default Value Current stack order

Range 1 to 8

Renumber units with new setting?

Specifies whether to start the renumbering process (default is No). Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes.

Renumbering resets the switch with the current configuration values. When you select this option, the switch resets, runs a self-test, then displays the Nortel logo screen. After you press Ctrl+Y at the screen prompt, the console screen temporarily displays the (standalone) Ethernet Switch 325/425 main menu. Then, within 20 seconds, the console screen refreshes and displays the main menu screen for the stack configuration. The Unit LEDs display the new numbering order.

Default Value No

Range No, Yes


320985-A

Figure 85 Hardware Unit Information screen

TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen

The TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen (Figure 86) allows a user at a remote console terminal to communicate with the Ethernet Switch 325/425 as if the console terminal were directly connected to it. You can have up to four active Telnet sessions at one time.

To open the TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen

➨ Choose TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration (or press t) from the main menu.

Hardware Unit Information

Unit# Switch Model GBIC1 Model GBIC2 Model SW Version

----- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------- ------------- 1 425-48T None None v3.6.0

Press Ctrl-N to display next screen.Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.



Figure 86 TELNET Configuration screen

Table 52 describes the TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields.

Table 52 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields

Field Description

TELNET Access Allows a user remote access to the CI through a Telnet session.



SNMP Access Specifies if SNMP access is allowed and only to those on the list. (SNMP access includes the DM system.)

Default value Access: Enabled; Use List: Yes

Range Access: Enabled, Disabled; Use List: Yes, No

TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration

TELNET: | Access: Use List: Login Timeout :[ 1 minute ] | TELNET: [ Enabled ] [ Yes ] Login Retries :[ 3 ] | SNMP : [ Enabled ] [ Yes ] Inactivity Timeout:[ 15 minutes ] | WEB : [ Enabled ] [ Yes ] Event Logging :[ All ] |

# Allowed Source IP Address Allowed Source Mask-- ------------------------- ------------------------- 1 [ 0.0.0.0 ] [ 0.0.0.0 ] 2 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] 3 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] 4 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] 5 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] 6 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] 7 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] 8 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] 9 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] 10 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]

Enter number, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.


320985-A

WEB Access Specifies if access to the Web-based management system is allowed and only to those on the list.

Default value Access: Enabled; Use List: Yes

Range Access: Enabled, Disabled; Use List: Yes, No

Login Timeout Specifies the amount of time a user has to enter the correct password at the console-terminal prompt.

Default value 1 minute

Range 0 to 10 minutes (0 indicates “no timeout”)

Login Retries Specifies the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password at the console-terminal prompt before terminating the session.

Default value 3

Range 1 to 100

Inactivity Timeout

Specifies the amount of time the session can be inactive before it is terminated.

Default value 15 minutes

Range 0 to 60 minutes (0 indicates “no timeout”)

Event Logging Specifies the types of events that are displayed in the Event Log screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A).

Default value All

Range All, None, Accesses, Failures

Description All: Logs the following Telnet events to the Event Log screen:

• TELNET connect: Indicates the IP address and access mode of a Telnet session.

• TELNET disconnect: Indicates the IP address of the remote host and the access mode, due to either a logout or inactivity.

• Failed TELNET connection attempts: Indicates the IP address of the remote host whose IP address is not on the list of allowed addresses, or indicates the IP address of the remote host that did not supply the correct password.

None: Indicates that no Telnet events are logged in the Event Log screen.

Accesses: Logs only Telnet connect and disconnect events in the Event Log screen.Failures: Logs only failed Telnet connection attempts in the Event Log screen.

Table 52 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description



Software Download screen

The Software Download screens (Figure 87 and Figure 89) allow you to revise the Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image and diagnostics image that are located in nonvolatile flash memory.

Allowed Source IP Address

Specifies up to 10 user-assigned host IP addresses that are allowed Telnet access to the CI.



Allowed Source Mask

Specifies up to 10 user-assigned allowed source address masks. The remote IP address is masked with the Allowed Source Mask and, if the resulting value equals the Allowed Source IP address, the connection is allowed.

For example, a connection would be allowed with the following settings:Remote IP address = 192.0.1.5

Allowed Source IP Address = 192.0.1.0

Allowed Source Mask = 255.255.255.0

Default value 0.0.0.0 (no IP mask assigned)


Caution: Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download process. If the power is interrupted, the firmware image can become corrupted.

Achtung: Unterbrechen Sie die Stromzufuhr zum Gerät nicht, während die Software heruntergeladen wird. Bei Unterbrechung der Stromzufuhr kann das Firmware-Image beschädigt werden.

Attention: Ne pas couper l'alimentation de l'appareil pendant le chargement du logiciel. En cas d'interruption, le programme résident peut être endommagé.

Table 52 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description


320985-A

To download the software image, you need a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server in your network, and an IP address for the switch (or stack, if configured). To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address, refer to “IP Configuration/Setup screen” on page 214.

To open the Software Download screen:

➨ Choose Software Download (or press f) from the main menu.

You can monitor the software download process by observing the LEDs (see “LED Indications during the download process” on page 240).

Precaución: No interrumpa la alimentación del dispositivo durante el proceso de descarga del software. Si lo hace, puede alterar la imagen de la programación (firmware).

Attenzione: Non interrompere l'alimentazione elettrica al dispositivo durante il processo di scaricamento del software. In caso di interruzione, l'immagine firmware potrebbe danneggiarsi.



Figure 87 Software Download screen for an Ethernet Switch 325/425 stack

Table 53 describes the Software Download screen fields.

Table 53 Software Download screen fields

Field Description

Image Filename The Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image load file name.

Note: Certain software releases may require you to download two images: the boot code image and the agent image. For proper operation of the switch, the new boot code image must be downloaded before the agent image is downloaded.



Diagnostics Filename

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 diagnostics file name.



TFTP Server IP Address

The IP address of your TFTP load host.



Software Download

Software Image Filename: [ docu/hummingbird_360.img ] Diagnostics Image Filename: [ ]

TFTP Server IP Address: [ 198.202.188.174 ]

Start TFTP Load of New Image: [ No ]



320985-A

LED Indications during the download process

The software download process automatically completes without user intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with a new software image. Be careful not to interrupt the download process until after it runs to completion (the process can take up to 10 minutes, depending on network conditions).

Configuration File Download/Upload screen

The Configuration Management feature allows you to store and retrieve the configuration parameters of an Ethernet Switch 325/425 or a stack to a TFTP server. This feature supports two different methods for managing the system's configuration files:

• Binary configuration file management

• ASCII configuration file management

Start TFTP Load of New Image

Specifies whether to start the download of the switch software image (default is No).

Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes.

Press Enter to initiate the software download process.

Note: The software download process can take up to 60 seconds to complete (or more if the load host path is congested or there is a high volume of network traffic).

To ensure that the download process is not interrupted, do not power down the switch for approximately 10 minutes.

Default value No

Range No, Software Image, Diagnostics, Software Image If Newer, Download image without reset, Download diag without reset.

Note: If problems occur during the software download process, the Software Download screen displays error codes that define the problem. The error codes are described in Chapter 13, “Troubleshooting,” on page 405.

Table 53 Software Download screen fields (continued)

Field Description



The Configuration File Download/Upload screen (Figure 89) allows you to store and retrieve your switch/stack configuration parameters on a TFTP server. It also allows you to enable and disable the autosave feature.

Binary configuration download

You can retrieve the configuration parameters of a standalone switch or an entire stack and use the retrieved parameters to automatically configure a replacement switch or stack. Certain requirements apply when automatically configuring a switch or stack using this feature (see “Requirements” on page 243). You must set up the file on your TFTP server and set the filename read/write permission to enabled before you can save the configuration parameters.

Although most configuration parameters are saved to the configuration file, certain parameters are not saved (see Table 55 on page 244).

To view the Configuration File Menu (Figure 88):

➨ Choose Configuration File (or press g) from the main menu.

Figure 88 Configuration File menu

Configuration File Menu

Configuration File Download/Upload...Ascii Configuration File Download...Autosave Configuration...Return to Main Menu

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select option.Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.


320985-A

To open the Configuration File Download/Upload screen (Figure 89):

➨ Choose Configuration File Download/Upload (or press c) from the main menu

Figure 89 Configuration File Download/Upload screen

Table 54 describes the Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields.

Table 54 Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields

Field Description

Configuration Image Filename

The file name you have chosen for the configuration file. Choose a meaningful file name that allows you to identify the file for retrieval when required. The file must already exist on your TFTP server and must be read/write enabled.



TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of your TFTP load host.



Configuration File Download/Upload

Configuration Image Filename: [ ] TFTP Server IP Address: [ 198.202.188.174 ] Copy Configuration Image to Server: [ No ] Retrieve Configuration Image from Server: [ No ]




Requirements

The following requirements apply to the Configuration File feature:

• The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone switch configuration parameters to other standalone switches or to copy stack configuration parameters to other stack configurations.

For example, you cannot duplicate the configuration parameters of a unit in a stack configuration and use it to configure a standalone switch.

• A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used to configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware revision and model type as the donor standalone switch.

• A configuration file obtained from a stack unit can only be used to configure other stacks that have the same number of switches, firmware version, model types, and physical IDs as the stack the donor stack unit resides in.

Reconfigured stacks are configured according to the unit order number of the donor unit. For example, the configuration file parameters from a donor unit with physical ID x are used to reconfigure the unit with physical ID x.

Copy Configuration Image to Server

Specifies whether to copy the presently configured switch/stack parameters to the specified TFTP server (default is No).


Press Enter to initiate the process.

Default Value No

Range Yes, No

Retrieve Configuration Image from Server

Specifies whether to retrieve the stored switch/stack configuration parameters from the specified TFTP server (default is No). If you choose Yes, the download process begins immediately and, when completed, causes the switch/stack to reset with the new configuration parameters.


Press Enter to initiate the process.

Default Value No

Range Yes, No

Table 54 Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields (continued)

Field Description


320985-A

Table 55 describes configuration file parameter information.

ASCII Configuration file Download

The ASCII Configuration File Download screen (Figure 90) allows you to download an ASCII configuration file containing CLI commands from a TFTP server to configure the switch or stack.

To view the ASCII Configuration File Download screen

➨ Choose ASCII Configuration File Download (or press a) from the Configuration File Menu to open the ASCII Configuration File Download screen.

Table 55 Parameters not saved to the configuration file

These parameters are not saved Used in this screen See page

In-Band Stack IP Address IP Configuration/Setup 214


In-Band Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

Console Read-Only Switch Password Console/Comm Port Configuration 223




Configuration Image Filename Configuration File Download/Upload 240




Figure 90 ASCII Configuration File Download screen

Table 56 describes the fields available on the ASCII Configuration File Download screen.

Table 56 ASCII Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields

Field Description

ASCII Configuration Filename

Enter the file name of the ASCII configuration file you want to download to the switch. Specify a file name that allows you to identify the file for retrieval. The ASCII configuration file must already exist on the TFTP server. It must also be read/write enabled.



TFTP Server IP Address Specify the IP address of your TFTP server.


Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point.

ASCII Configuration File Download

ASCII Configuration Filename: [ ] TFTP Server IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ] Retrieve Configuration File from Server: [ No ] Last Manual Configuration Status: Passed

Last Auto Configuration Status: Passed Auto Configuration on Reset: [ Disabled ]



320985-A

Retrieve Configuration File from Server

This field specifies whether to retrieve the stored ASCII configuration file from the specified TFTP server (default value is No). If you choose Yes, the download process begins immediately and, when the download is completed, the switch/stack will be configured based on the CLI commands in the ASCII configuration file.

Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes.Press Enter to initiate the download process.

Default value No

Range Yes, No

Last Manual Configuration Status

The system displays the status of the last manual configuration.

Default value Passed

Range Passed, Failed

Last Auto Configuration Status

The system displays the status of the last automatic configuration.

Default value Passed

Range Passed, Failed

Auto Configuration on Reset

This field allows you to select the option of automatically configuring the switch or stack every time the switch or the stack is reset. The values that can be assigned to this field are:

• Disabled — Auto configuration on reset is disabled.

• Use Configured — Use manually configured ASCII configuration file name and TFTP server address for auto configuration on reset.

• Use BootP — Retrieve ASCII configuration file name, and optionally server address, using BootP, when BootP is enabled, and perform auto configuration on reset using these parameters.

Note: Refer to Appendix D, “Sample BootP configuration file,” on page 443 for a sample BootP configuration file.

Default value Disabled

Range Disabled, Use Configured, Use BootP

Table 56 ASCII Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields

Field Description



Enabling and disabling autosave

The Autosave Configuration screen (Figure 91) allows you to enable and disable the autosave feature on the switch or stack.

To view the Autosave Configuration screen:

➨ From the Configuration File Menu, choose Autosave Configuration (or press s).

Figure 91 Autosave Configuration screen

Table 57 describes the fields available in the Autosave Configuration screen.

Table 57 Autosave Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Autosave Enables or disables the autosave feature.

Autosave Configuration

Autosave [ Enabled ]



320985-A

Using SNTP

The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) feature synchronizes the Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) to an accuracy within 1 second. This feature adheres to the IEEE RFC 2030 (MIB is the s5agent). With this feature, the system can obtain the time from any RFC 2030-compliant NTP/SNTP server.

The system attempts to connect to the NTP server at least three times, with five minutes duration between each retry. If the connection fails after three attempts, the system waits for the next synchronization time (the default is 24 hours) and begins the process again.

SNTP provides a real-time timestamp for the software, shown as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

If SNTP is enabled (the default value is disabled), the system synchronizes with the configured NTP server at boot-up and at user-configurable periods thereafter (the default sync interval is 24 hours). The first synchronization is not performed until network connectivity is established.

SNTP supports primary and secondary NTP servers. The system tries the secondary NTP server only if the primary NTP server is unresponsive.

Configuring with CLI

You can use the CLI to configure the SNTP feature, ensuring that you complete the following steps:

1 Set the primary and secondary NTP server.

2 Enable SNTP.

3 Display the UTC time.

4 Optionally, to ensure the synchronization happens immediately, force a synchronization.

Note: If you have trouble using this feature, try other NTP servers. Some NTP servers may be overloaded or currently inoperable.



Setting local time zone

SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) for all time synchronizations so it is not affected by different time zones. In order for the switch report the correct time for your local time zone and daylight savings time, you must use the following commands:







Using DNS to ping and Telnet

Using the DNS client, you can ping or Telnet to a host server or to a host by name.

To use this feature, you must configure at least one Domain Name Server (DNS); You may also configure a default domain name. If you configure a default domain name, that name is appended to host names that do not contain a dot. The default domain name and addresses are saved in NVRAM.

The host names for ping and Telnet cannot be longer than 63 alphanumeric characters, and the default DNS domain name cannot be longer than 255 characters.

Configuring with CLI

Use the CLI to configure the DNS client. Following are the commands used to configure the DNS client using the CLI.

• show ip dns command

• ping command

• ip name-server command

• no ip name-server command


320985-A

• ip domain-name command

• no ip domain-name command

• default ip domain-name command

For more information on these commands, see “System configuration using the CLI” on page 251.

251


Chapter 7System configuration using the CLI

In the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, the Command Line Interface (CLI) commands allows you to display and modify the switch configuration while the switch is operating.

This chapter includes information about general switch maintenance, such as setting up access parameters, upgrading the software, and setting the speed. This chapter covers the following topics:

• “Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and default gateway” on page 252

• “Using DNS to ping and telnet” on page 261

• “Configuration Management” on page 266

• “Customizing your system” on page 270

• “Displaying the ARP table” on page 282

• “Displaying interfaces” on page 282

• “Saving the configuration to NVRAM” on page 285

• “Enabling and disabling autosave” on page 287

• “Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol” on page 289

• “Enabling Autopology” on page 297

• “Configuring LEDs on the display panel” on page 312

• “Upgrading software” on page 315

252 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

320985-A

Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and default gateway

IP notation

To enter IP addresses and subnet masks in the CLI, enter both the IP address and the subnet mask in dotted decimal notation (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX).

Assigning and clearing IP addresses

Using the CLI, you can assign IP addresses and Gateway addresses, clear these addresses, and view configured IP addresses. This section covers these topics:

• “ip address command”

• “no ip address command” on page 253

• “ip default-gateway command” on page 254

• “no ip default-gateway command” on page 254

• “show ip command” on page 255

ip address command

The ip address command sets the IP address and subnet mask for the switch or a stack. The syntax for the ip address command is:

ip address [stack|switch|unit] <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [netmask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]

The ip address command is in the config command mode.

If you do not enter either the stack or switch parameter, the system automatically modifies the stack IP address when in stack mode and modifies the switch IP address when in standalone mode.

Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 253


Table 58 describes the parameters and variables for the ip address command.

no ip address command

The no ip address command clears the IP address and subnet mask. This command sets the IP address and subnet mask for a switch or a stack to all zeros (0). The syntax for the no ip address command is:

no ip address {stack|switch}

The no ip address command is in the config command mode.

Table 59 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip address command.

Table 58 ip address command parameters and variables


Description

stack|switch Sets the stack the IP address and subnet mask or the switch IP address and netmask.

unit Sets the IP address of another unit in a stack.

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Enter IP address in dotted decimal notation; netmask is optional.

netmask Set the IP subnet mask for the stack or switch.

Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.

Table 59 no ip address command parameters and variables


Description

stack|switch Zeroes out the stack IP address and subnet mask for the switch IP address and subnet mask.

unit Sets the IP address of another unit in a stack.


320985-A

ip default-gateway command

The ip default-gateway command sets the IP default gateway address for a switch or a stack. The syntax for the ip default-gateway command is:

ip default-gateway <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>

The ip default-gateway command is in the config command mode.

Table 60 describes the parameters and variables for the ip default-gateway command.

no ip default-gateway command

The no ip default-gateway command sets the IP default gateway address to zeros (0). The syntax for the no ip default-gateway command is:

no ip default-gateway

The no ip default-gateway command is in the config command mode.

Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web. You also disable any new Telnet connection, and you must connect to the serial console port to configure a new IP address.

Table 60 ip default-gateway command parameters and variables


Description

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Enter the dotted-decimal IP address of the default IP gateway.

Note: When you change the IP gateway, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.



The no ip default-gateway command has no parameters or variables.

show ip command

The show ip command displays the IP configurations, specifically BootP mode, stack address, switch address, subnet mask, and gateway address. This command displays the these parameters for what is configured, what is in use, and the last BootP. The syntax for the show ip command is:

show ip [bootp] [default-gateway] [address [stack|switch]] [dns]

The show ip command is in the exec command mode.

If you do not enter any parameters, this command displays all the IP-related configuration information.

Table 61 describes the parameters and variables for the show ip command.

Figure 92 displays a sample output of the show ip command.

Note: When you change the IP gateway address, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web. You also may disable any new Telnet connection required to connect to the serial console port to configure a new IP Gateway address.

Table 61 show ip command parameters and variables


Description

bootp Displays BootP-related IP information.

default-gateway Displays the IP address of the default gateway.

address Displays the current IP address.

stack|switch Specifies current IP address of the stack or the switch.

dns Displays DNS configuration.


320985-A

Figure 92 show ip command output

show ip address command

The show ip address command displays the IP configurations, stack address, switch address, subnet mask, and gateway address, when the Ethernet Switch 425-24T Switch is in the stack mode. The syntax for the show ip address command is:

show ip address [address [stack|switch|unit]]

The show ip address command is in the exec command mode.

Table 62 describes the parameters and variables for the show ip address command.

Table 62 show ip address command parameters and variables


Description

address Displays the current IP address.

stack|switch Specifies current IP address of the stack or the switch.

unit Displays the IP address of another unit in a stack.

425-48T(config-if)#show ipBootP Mode: BootP Disabled

Configured In Use Last BootP --------------- --------------- ---------------Stack IP Address: 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0Switch IP Address: 192.168.151.175 192.168.151.175 0.0.0.0Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0Default Gateway: 192.168.151.1 192.168.151.1 0.0.0.0425-48T(config-if)#



Figure 93 displays a sample output of the show ip address command.

Figure 93 show ip address command output

Assigning and clearing IP addresses for specific units

You can assign IP addresses for specific units within a stack. This section covers these topics:

• “ip address unit command”

• “no ip address unit command” on page 258

• “default ip address unit command” on page 258

ip address unit command

The ip address unit command sets the IP address and subnet mask for a specific unit in the stack. The syntax for the ip address unit command is:

ip address unit <1-8> A.B.C.D

The ip address unit command is in the config command mode.

Table 63 describes the parameters and variables for the ip address unit command.

Table 63 ip address unit command parameters and variables


Description

unit <1-8> Sets the unit you are assigning an IP address.

A.B.C.D Enter IP address in dotted decimal notation.

425-24T(config)#show ip address unit 1

Configured In Use Last BootP --------------- --------------- ---------------Stack IP Address: 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0Default Gateway: 192.168.151.1 192.168.151.1 0.0.0.0


320985-A

no ip address unit command

The no ip address unit command sets the IP address for the specified unit in a stack to all zeros (0). The syntax for the no ip address unit command is:

no ip address unit <1-8>

The no ip address unit command is in the config command mode.

Table 64 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip address unit command.

default ip address unit command

The default ip address unit command sets the IP address for the specified unit in a stack to all zeros (0). The syntax for the default ip address unit command is:

default ip address unit <1-8>

The default ip address unit command is in the config command mode.

Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.

Table 64 no ip address unit command parameters and variables


Description

unit <1-8> Zeroes out the IP address for the specified unit.

Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.You also disable any new Telnet connection, and you must connect to the serial console port to configure a new IP address.



Table 65 describes the parameters and variables for the default ip address unit command.

Pinging

To ensure that the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 has connectivity to the network, ping a device you know is connected to this network.

ping command

The ping command tests the network connection to another network device. The command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet from the switch to the target device. The local IP address must be set before issuing the ping command. Refer to “Assigning and clearing IP addresses” on page 252 for information on setting IP addresses.

The syntax for the ping command is:

ping <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [datasize <64-4096>] [{count <1-9999>} | continuous] [{timeout | -t} <1-120>] [interval <1-60>] [debug]

The ping command is in the exec command mode.

Table 65 default ip address unit command parameters and variables


Description

unit <1-8> Zeroes out the IP address for the specified unit.

Note: When you change the IP gateway, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.


320985-A

Table 66 describes the parameters and variables for the ping command.

If the device receives the packet, it sends a ping reply. When the switch receives the reply, it displays a message indicating that the specified IP address is being used. If no reply is received, a message indicates that the address is not responding.

Figure 94 shows sample ping responses.

Figure 94 ping command responses

Table 66 ping command parameters and variables


Description

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Specify the IP address of the target device in dotted-decimal notation.

datasize <64-4096>

Specifies the size of the ICMP packet to be sent. The data size range is from 64 to 4096 bytes.

{count <1-9999>} | continuous

Sets the number of ICMP packets to be sent. The continuous mode sets the ping running until the user interrupts it by entering Ctrl-C.

{timeout | -t} <1-120>

Set the timeout using either the timeout or -t parameter followed by the number of seconds the switch must wait before timing out.

interval <1-60>

Specifies the number of seconds between transmitted packets.

debug Provides additional output information such as ICMP sequence number and trip time.

425-48T>ping 192.168.151.174Reply from 192.168.151.174: 64 bytes time=16 msHost is reachable425-48T>



Resetting the switch to default configuration

The restore factory-default command resets the switch or stack to its default configuration.

The syntax for the restore factory-default command is:

restore factory-default [ -y ]

where the [ -y ] parameter instructs the switch not to prompt for confirmation. If the [ -y ] parameter is not included in the command, the following message appears:

Warning the switch/stack will be reset to factory default configuration

Do you wish to continue (y/n) ?

Enter y to restore the switch to default.

The restore factory-default command is in the privExec command mode.

Using DNS to ping and telnet

Using the Domain Name Server (DNS) client, you can ping or telnet to a host server or to a host by name. To use this feature, you must configure at least one DNS; you may also configure a default domain name. If you configure a default domain name, that name is appended to hostnames that do not contain a dot. The default domain name and addresses are saved in NVRAM.

The hostnames for ping and telnet cannot be longer than 63 alphanumeric characters, and the default DNS domain name cannot be longer than 255 characters. This section covers these commands:

• “show ip dns command” on page 262

• “ping command” on page 262

• “ip name-server command” on page 263

• “no ip name-server command” on page 264


320985-A

• “ip domain-name command” on page 265

• “no ip domain-name command” on page 265

• “default ip domain-name command” on page 265

show ip dns command

The show ip dns command displays the DNS domain name, as well as any configured DNS servers. The syntax for the show ip dns command is:

show ip dns

The show ip dns command is in the exec command mode.

The show ip dns command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 95 displays sample output from the show ip dns command.

Figure 95 show ip dns command output

ping command

The ping command tests the network connection to another network device. The command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet from the switch to the target device. The local IP address must be set before issuing the ping command.

You can ping a host using either its IP address or hostname.

425-48T(config)#show ip dnsDNS Default Domain name: NoneDNS Servers-----------0.0.0.00.0.0.00.0.0.0425-48T(config)#



The syntax for the ping command is:

ping <A.B.C.D or Hostname>

The ping command is in the exec command mode.

Table 67 describes the parameters and variables for the ping command.

If the device receives the packet, it sends a ping reply. When the switch receives the reply, it displays a message indicating that the specified IP address is being used. If no reply is received, a message indicates that the address is not responding.

Figure 96 displays sample ping responses.

Figure 96 ping command responses

There is no default value for this command.

ip name-server command

The ip name-server command adds one or more DNS servers’ IP addresses. The syntax for the ip name-server command is:

ip name-server <A.B.C.D>

Table 67 ping command parameters and variables


Description

<A.B.C.D or Hostname>

Specify:

• the IP address of the target device in dotted-decimal notation

• the hostname of the device to ping (The hostname can be a simple name, such as fred; in this case the DNS domain name, if set, is appended. Or the hostname can be a full hostname, such as fred.ca.nortel.com.)

425-48T#ping 10.10.40.29Host is reachable425-48T#


320985-A

The ip name-server command is in the config command mode.

Table 68 describes the parameters and variables for the ip name-server command.

The default value is 0.0.0.0.

no ip name-server command

The no ip name-server command removes one or more DNS servers’ IP addresses. The syntax for the no ip name-server command is:

no ip name-server <A.B.C.D>

The no ip name-server command is in the config command mode.

Table 69 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip name-server command.

The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Note: You can add up to 3 servers; adding one at a time.

Table 68 ip name-server command parameters and variables


Description

<A.B.C.D> Enter the IP address of a DNS server.

Table 69 no ip name-server command parameters and variables


Description

<A.B.C.D> Enter the IP address of a DNS server.



ip domain-name command

The ip domain-name command sets the system’s DNS domain name. The syntax for the ip domain-name command is:

ip domain-name [<LINE>]

The ip domain-name command is in the config command mode.

Table 70 describes the parameters and variables for the ip domain-name command.

The default value for this command is an empty string.

no ip domain-name command

The no ip domain-name command clears the system’s DNS domain name (sets it to an empty string). The syntax for the no ip domain-name command is:

no ip domain-name

The no ip domain-name command is in the config command mode.

The no ip domain-name command has no parameters or variables.

default ip domain-name command

The default ip domain-name command clears the system’s DNS domain name (set it to an empty string). The syntax for the default ip domain-name command is:

default ip domain-name

Table 70 ip domain-name command parameters and variables


Description

<LINE> Enter a DNS domain name.


320985-A

The default ip domain-name command is in the config command mode.

The default ip domain-name command has no parameters or variables.

Configuration Management

This section covers the following topics:

• “Automatically loading Configuration file” on page 266

• “ASCII Configuration Generator” on page 268

Automatically loading Configuration file

This section discusses how to download a configuration file when the system boots. You use standard CLI commands to modify the configuration file you want to download. This section covers these commands:

• “configure network command”

• “show config-network command” on page 267

configure network command

The configure network command allows you to load and execute a script immediately and to configure parameters to automatically download a configuration file when you reboot the switch or stack. The syntax for the configure network command is:

configure network [load-on-boot {disable|use-bootp|use-config}] [filename <WORD>] [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]

The configure network command is in the exec mode.

Note: When you enter configure network with no parameters, the system prompts you for the script file name and TFTP server address and then downloads the script.



Table 71 describes the parameters and variables for the configure network command.

show config-network command

The show config-network command displays information regarding the automatic loading of the configuration file, including the current status of this feature, the file name, the TFTP server address, and the status of the previous automatic configuration command. The syntax for the show config-network command is:

show config-network

The show config-network command is in the privExec mode.

Table 71 configure network command parameters and variables

Parameters and variables Description

load-on-boot {disable|use-bootp|use-config

Specifies the settings for automatically loading a configuration file when the system boots:

• disable—disables the automatic loading of config file• use-boot—specifies using the BootP file as the automatically loaded

config file

• use-config—specifies using the ASCII configuration file as the automatically loaded config file

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system immediately downloads and runs the ASCII config file.

filename <WORD> Specifies the file name.

Note: If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP, the system uses the configured file name.

address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> Specifies the TFTP server from which to load the file. Enter the IP address in dotted-decimal notation.

Note: If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP, the system uses the configured address.

Note: When you specify the file name or address, these parameters will be changed at the next reboot, even if you do not specify load-on-boot.


320985-A

The show config-network command has no parameters or values.

Figure 97 shows the output for the show config-network command.

Figure 97 show config-network command

ASCII Configuration Generator

The primary goal of the ASCII Configuration Generator (ACG) is to provide the users of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 with a tool that allows them to easily modify configuration of a particular switch or a stack.

ACG generates an ASCII configuration file which reproduces the behavior of the current binary configuration file. The user can also rely on this function to maintain backup configurations, as well as use it as a reliable method for debugging the current configuration of a switch.

The Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 can download an editable ASCII configuration file from the TFTP server. You can load the ASCII configuration file automatically at boot time or on demand using console menus or CLI. Once downloaded, the configuration file automatically configures the switch or stack according to the Command Line Interface (CLI) commands in the file. The maximum size for an ASCII configuration file is 100 KBs; larger configuration files must be split into multiple files.

For more information on loading the ASCII configuration file automatically, see “Automatically loading Configuration file” on page 266.

The commands that are associated with ACG are:

• “show running-config command” on page 269

• “copy running-config tftp command” on page 270

425-48T(config-if)#show config-networkAuto-Load Configuration On Boot: DisabledConfiguration Filename:TFTP Server IP Address: 198.202.188.174Last Auto Configuration Status: PassedLast Manual Configuration Status: Passed



show running-config command

This command displays the current configuration of switch or a stack as a series of CLI commands.

This command must be executed in the configuration mode and has no parameters or variables.

The syntax of this command is:

show running-config

Figure 98 shows the output of the show running-config command

Figure 98 Output of the show running-config command

425-48T(config-if)#show running-config! Embedded ASCII Configuration Generator Script! Model = Ethernet Switch 425-48T! Software version = v3.6.0enableconfigure terminal!! *** CORE ***!mac-address-table aging-time 300autotopologyno radius-serverradius-server host 0.0.0.0radius-server secondary-host 0.0.0.0radius-server port 1645! radius-server key ********telnet-access login-timeout 1telnet-access retry 3telnet-access inactive-timeout 15telnet-access logging allcli password switch serial nonecli password switch telnet none! cli password switch read-only "********"425-48T(config-if)#


320985-A

copy running-config tftp command

This command copies contents of the current configuration file to another file on the TFTP server. The syntax of the command is

copy running-config tftp {<address> <filename>}

This command can be executed in the config mode.

Table 72 describes the parameters and variables of this command.

Customizing your system

You can customize your system using the CLI commands described in this section. This section covers the following topics:

• “Setting the terminal” on page 270

• “Displaying system information” on page 273

• “Setting boot parameters” on page 274

• “Setting TFTP parameters” on page 276

• “Setting the default management interface” on page 279

• “Customizing the opening banner” on page 280

• “Setting the default management interface” on page 279

Setting the terminal

You can view the terminal settings, set them to default settings, or customize the terminal settings. This sections covers:

Table 72 copy running-config tftp command parameters and variables

Parameter Description

address Signifies the IP address of the TFTP server

filename Denotes the filename to store configuration commands

on the TFTP server



• “show terminal command”

• “terminal command” on page 271

show terminal command

The show terminal command displays the current serial port information, which includes connection speed, as well as the terminal width and length in number of characters. The syntax for the show terminal command is:

show terminal

The show terminal command is in the exec command mode.

The show terminal command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 99 shows the output from the show terminal command.

Figure 99 show terminal command output

terminal command

The terminal command configures the settings for the terminal. These settings are transmit and receive speeds, terminal length, and terminal width. The syntax of the terminal command is:

terminal speed {2400|4800|9600|19200|38400}|length <1-132>|width <1-132>

The terminal command is in the exec mode.

425-48T(config-if)#show terminalTerminal speed: 9600Terminal width: 79Terminal length: 23425-48T(config-if)#


320985-A

Table 73 describes the parameters and variables for the terminal command.

show cli command

The show cli command displays the current CLI settings. The syntax for the show cli command is:

show cli [info|mode|password]

The show cli command is in the exec command mode.

Table 74 describes the parameters and variables for the show cli command.

Figure 100 displays the output from the show cli command.

Table 73 terminal command parameters and variables


Description

speed {2400|4800|9600|19200|38400}

Sets the transmit and receive baud rates for the terminal. You can set the speed at one of the five options shown; default is 9600.

length Sets the length of the terminal display in characters; default is 24.

width Sets the width of the terminal displaying characters; default 79.

Table 74 show cli command parameters and variables


Description

info Displays general CLI settings.

mode Displays CLI mode.

password Displays CLI usernames and passwords.



Figure 100 show cli command output

Displaying system information

The show sys-info command displays the current system characteristics.

The syntax for the show sys-info command is:

show sys-info

The show sys-info command is in the privExec command mode.

The show sys-info command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 101 displays sample output from the show sys-info command.

Note: You must have SNTP enabled and configured to display GMT time.

425-48T(config)#show cli infoInactivity Timeout: 15 minute(s)Login Timeout: 1 minute(s)Login Retries: 3More: TrueScreen Lines: 23425-48T(config)#RW RW ***************RO RO ***************425-48T#


320985-A

Figure 101 show sys-info command output

Setting boot parameters

You can reboot the switch or stack and configure BootP. The topics covered in this section are:

• “boot command”

• “ip bootp server command” on page 275

• “no ip bootp server command” on page 276

• “default ip bootp server command” on page 276

boot command

The boot command performs a soft-boot of the switch or stack. The syntax for the boot command is:

boot [default]

425-48T(config-if)#show sys-infoOperation Mode: SwitchMAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80Reset Count: 35Last Reset Type: Management ResetPower Status: Primary PowerAutotopology: EnabledLocal GBIC Type: (port 49) GBIC is missingLocal GBIC Type: (port 50) GBIC is missingsysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0Mfg Date: 05122004Serial #: SACC2600E5Operational State:NormalsysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1sysUpTime: 0 days, 00:38:44sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized.sysServices: 3sysContact: csysName: Ethernet 425-48TsysLocation:425-48T(config-if)#



The boot command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 75 describes the parameters and variables for the boot command.

ip bootp server command

The ip bootp server command configures BootP on the current instance of the switch or server. The syntax for the ip bootp server command is:

ip bootp server {last|needed|disable|always}

The ip bootp server command is in the config command mode.

Table 76 describes the parameters and variables for the ip bootp server command.

Table 75 boot command parameters and variables


Description

default Restores switch or stack to factory-default settings after rebooting.

Note: When you reset to factory defaults, the stack operational mode, last reset count, and reason for last reset will not be set to factory defaults.

Table 76 ip bootp server command parameters and variables


Description

last|needed|disable|always

Specifies when to use BootP:• last—use BootP or the last known address

• needed—use BootP only when needed

• disable—never use BootP• always—Always use BootP


320985-A

no ip bootp server command

The no ip bootp server command disables the BootP server. The syntax for the no ip bootp server command is:

no ip bootp server

The no ip bootp server command is in the config command mode.

The no ip bootp server command has no parameters or values.

default ip bootp server command

The default ip bootp server command sets the BootP server status to BootP when needed. The syntax for the default ip bootp server command is:

default ip bootp server

The default ip bootp server command is in the config command mode.

The default ip bootp server command has no parameters or values.

Setting TFTP parameters

You can display the IP address of the TFTP server, assign an IP address you want to use for a TFTP server, copy a configuration file to the TFTP server, or copy a configuration file from the TFTP server to the switch to use to configure the switch. This section covers:

• “show tftp-server command” on page 277

• “tftp-server command” on page 277

• “no tftp-server command” on page 278

• “copy config tftp command” on page 278

• “copy tftp config command” on page 278



show tftp-server command

The show tftp-server command displays the IP address of the server used for all TFTP-related transfers. The syntax for the show tftp-server command is:

show tftp-server

The show tftp-server command is in the privExec command mode.

The show tftp-server command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 102 shows a sample output of the show tftp-server command.

Figure 102 show tftp-server command output

tftp-server command

The tftp-server command assigns the address for the stack or switch to use for TFTP services. The syntax of the tftp-server command is:

tftp-server <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>

The tftp-server command is in the config command mode.

Table 77 describes the parameters and variables for the tftp-server command.

Table 77 tftp-server command parameters and variables


Description

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Enter the dotted-decimal IP address of the server you want to use for TFTP services.

425-48T(config-if)#show tftp-serverTFTP Server IP address : 198.202.188.174425-48T(config-if)#


320985-A

no tftp-server command

The no tftp-server command clears the TFTP server IP address to 0.0.0.0. The syntax of the no tftp-server command is:

no tftp-server

The no tftp-server command is in the config command mode.

The no tftp-server command has no parameters or values.

copy config tftp command

The copy config tftp command copies the current configuration file onto the TFTP server. The syntax for the copy config tftp command is:

copy config tftp [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] filename <WORD>

The copy config tftp command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 78 describes the parameters and variables for the copy config tftp command.

copy tftp config command

The copy tftp config command retrieves the system configuration file from the TFTP server and uses the retrieved information as the current configuration on the system.The syntax for the copy tftp config command is:

copy tftp config [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] filename <WORD>

Table 78 copy config tftp command parameters and variables


Description

address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>

Specifies the TFTP server IP address; enter in dotted-decimal notation.

filename <WORD> Specifies filename that you want to copy the configuration file onto the TFTP server. Enter the name you want the configuration file to have on the TFTP server.



The copy tftp config command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 79 describes the parameters and variables for the copy tftp config command.

Setting the default management interface

You can use cmd-interface command to set the default management interface when you connect to Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 through console port or Telnet. This selection is stored in NVRAM and propagated to all units in a stack configuration.

On startup, the switch or stack displays the banner and prompts the user to press [Ctrl}+y. After entering these characters, the system displays either a menu or the Nortel Command Line Interface (NCLI) prompt, depending on which is set using this command.

When using the console port, you must logout for the new mode to display. When using Telnet, all subsequent Telnet sessions display the selection.

cmd-interface command

The cmd-interface command allows you to set the default management interface when you use the console port or Telnet.

The syntax for the cmd-interface command is:

cmd-interface {cli|menu}

The cmd-interface command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 79 copy tftp config command parameters and variables


Description

address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>

Specifies the TFTP server IP address; enter in dotted-decimal notation.

filename <WORD> Enter the name of the configuration file you want to copy from the TFTP server.


320985-A

Table 80 describes the parameters and variables for the cmd-interface command.

Customizing the opening banner

You can customize the banner that appears when you connect to the Ethernet Switch 325/425. You can customize the text that reads NORTEL. However you cannot customize the second line that reads Enter [Ctrl]+y to begin.

The Banner Control feature provides an option to specify the banner text. If you choose not to display the banner, the system enters the command mode through the default command interface. You do not have to press the Ctrl+y keys.

The Banner display that you select is used for subsequent console sessions. For executing the new mode in the console, you must logout. For Telnet access, all subsequent sessions use the selected mode.

This section covers the following commands:

• “banner command for displaying banner”

• “show banner command” on page 281

• “no banner command” on page 281

banner command for displaying banner

The banner command for displaying banner specifies the banner displayed at startup; either static or custom. The syntax for the banner command to display banner is:

banner [ custom | static | disabled | <1-15> LINE]

Table 80 cmd-interface command parameters and variables

Parameters and variables Description

cli | menu Allows you to set the default management system when using console port or Telnet:

• cli—the system automatically enters the CLI mode and displays the CLI prompt after you enter Crtl+Y

• menu—the system automatically enters the CI menu mode and displays the menus after you enter Ctrl+Y.



The banner command for displaying banner is in the config mode.

Table 81 describes the parameters for the banner command.

show banner command

The show banner command displays the banner. The syntax for the show banner command is:

show banner [ custom | static ]

The show banner command is in the config mode.

Table 82 describes the parameters for the banner command.

no banner command

The no banner command allows you to clear all lines of a previously stored custom banner. The syntax for the no banner command is:

no banner

Table 81 banner command parameters

Parameters Description

static Displays the default agent-banner.

custom Displays the custom agent-banner.

disabled Skips the agent-banner display.

<1-15> LINE Fills the Nth line of the custom banner (1<N<15) with the text specified in LINE.

Table 82 show banner command parameters

Parameters Description

static Displays default banner

custom Displays custom banner

(if empty) Displays static, custom or disabled status if parameter is not entered.


320985-A

The no banner command is in the config mode.

Displaying the ARP table

The show arp-table command displays the arp table of the device. The syntax for the show arp-table command is:

show arp-table

The show arp-table command is in the exec command mode.

The show arp-table command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 103 displays a sample output of the show arp-table command.

Figure 103 show arp-table command output

Displaying interfaces

You can view the status of all interfaces on the switch or stack, including MultiLink Trunk membership, link status, autonegotiation, and speed. This section covers:

• “show interfaces command”

• “show interfaces config command”

425-48T#show arp-tablePort IP Address MAC Address---- --------------- -----------------37 192.168.151.1 00:80:2D:6E:47:82425-48T#



show interfaces command

The show interfaces command displays the current configuration and status of all interfaces. The syntax for the show interfaces command is:

show interfaces [names] [<portlist>]

The show interfaces command is in the exec command mode.

Table 83 describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces command.

Figure 104 displays a sample output of the show interfaces names command.

Figure 104 show interfaces names command output

Figure 105 Shows a sample output of the show interfaces command without the names variable.

Table 83 show interfaces command parameters and variables


Description

names <portlist> Displays the interface names; enter specific ports if you want to see only those.

425_48T SW 1.1 in SC2-02 LAB>show interfaces names 1-3Port Name---- ----------------------------------------------------------------1 LabBldg42 Testing3 Floor1Bldg2425_48T#


320985-A

Figure 105 show interfaces command output

show interfaces config command

The show interfaces config command displays the current operational status of interfaces and provides supplementary information about the current port settings for Spanning Tree Protocol.

The syntax for the show interfaces config command is:

show interfaces [<portlist>] config

The show interfaces config command is in the privExec command mode.

425-48T(config-if)#show interfaces Status Auto FlowPort Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control---- ----- ------- ---- ---- -------- ----------- -------- ------ -------1 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled2 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled3 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled4 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled5 Enable Down Down Enabled Custom6 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled7 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled8 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled9 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled10 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled11 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled12 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled13 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled14 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled15 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled16 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled17 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled18 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled19 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled425-48T(config-if)#



Table 83 describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces config command.

Figure 104 displays a sample output of the show interfaces config command.

Figure 106 show interfaces config command output

Saving the configuration to NVRAM

You can save your configuration parameters to Non-Volatile RAM (NVRAM) using any of the following CLI commands:

• “copy config nvram command” on page 285

• “write memory command” on page 286

• “save config command” on page 286

copy config nvram command

The copy config nvram command copies the current configuration to NVRAM. The syntax for the copy config nvram command is:

Table 84 show interfaces config command parameters and variables


Description

<portlist> Enter the ports you want to display.

425 (config)#show interfaces 1/1,1/2 config Status Auto FlowPort Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control--------- ----- ------ --- --- ------- ---------- ----- ------ ------1 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled

*****Spanning-tree port configurations*****Port Role State STP Status Oper Status---- ---------- ---------- ---------- -----------1 Root Forwarding Enabled Enabled


320985-A

copy config nvram

The copy config nvram command is in the privExec command mode.

The copy config nvram command has no parameters or variables.

write memory command

The write memory command copies the current configuration to NVRAM. The syntax for the write memory command is:

write memory

The write memory command is in the privExec command mode.

The write memory command has no parameters or variables.

save config command

The save config command copies the current configuration to NVRAM. The syntax for the save config command is:

save config

The save config command is in the privExec command mode.

The save config command has no parameters or variables.

Note: The system automatically issues the copy config nvram command periodically. See “Enabling and disabling autosave” on page 287 for details.




The Ethernet Switch 325/425 performs a check every sixty seconds to detect changes in the configuration file or a new log message in the non-volatile storage. If any of these two events occurs, the switch automatically saves it’s configuration and the non-volatile log to flash memory. Autosave also automatically saves your configuration information across reboots.

You can enable or disable this feature. When you disable autosave, changes in the configuration file are not saved to the flash memory.

This section covers the following commands:

• “show autosave command”

• “autosave enable command” on page 288

• “no autosave enable command” on page 288

• “default autosave enable command” on page 288

show autosave command

The show autosave command displays the status of the autosave feature, either enabled or disabled. The syntax for the show autosave command is:

show autosave

The show autosave command is in the privExec command mode.

The show autosave command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 107 displays sample output from the show autosave command.

Note: You can use the CLI command copy config nvram to force a manual save of the configuration when autosave is disabled.


320985-A

Figure 107 show autosave command output

autosave enable command

The autosave enable command enables the autosave feature. The syntax for the autosave enable command is:

autosave enable

The autosave enable command is in the config command mode.

The autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.

no autosave enable command

The no autosave enable command disables the autosave feature. The syntax for the no autosave enable command is:

no autosave enable

The no autosave enable command is in the config command mode.

The no autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.

default autosave enable command

The default autosave enable command defaults the autosave feature to the default value of enabled. The syntax for the default autosave enable command is:

default autosave enable

The default autosave enable command is in the config command mode.

The default autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.

425-48T(config-if)#show autosaveAuto Save: Enabled425-48T(config-if)#



Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol


• “show sntp command”

• “Displaying system information” on page 273

• “sntp enable command” on page 290

• “no sntp enable command” on page 290

• “sntp server primary address command” on page 291

• “sntp server secondary address command” on page 291

• “no sntp server command” on page 292

• “sntp sync-now command” on page 293

• “sntp sync-interval command” on page 293

show sntp command

The show sntp command displays the SNTP information, as well as the configured NTP servers. The syntax for the show sntp command is:

show sntp

The show sntp command is in the privExec command mode.

The show sntp command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 108 displays sample output from the show sntp command.

Note: If you have trouble using this feature, try various NTP servers. Some NTP servers may be overloaded or currently inoperable.


320985-A

Figure 108 show sntp command output

sntp enable command

The sntp enable command enables SNTP. The syntax for the sntp enable command is:

sntp enable

The sntp enable command is in the config command mode.

The sntp enable command has no parameters or variables.

no sntp enable command

The no sntp enable command disables SNTP. The syntax for the no sntp enable command is:

no sntp enable

The no sntp enable command is in the config command mode.

The no sntp enable command has no parameters or variables.

Note: The default setting for SNTP is disabled.

425-48T(config-if)#show sntpSNTP Status: DisabledPrimary server address: 0.0.0.0Secondary server address: 0.0.0.0Sync interval: 24 hoursLast sync source: 0.0.0.0Primary server sync failures: 0Secondary server sync failures: 0Last sync time: Not SetNext sync time: Not SetCurrent time: Not Set425-48T(config-if)#



sntp server primary address command

The sntp server primary address command specifies the IP addresses of the primary NTP server. The syntax for the sntp server primary address command is:

sntp server primary address <A.B.C.D>

The sntp server primary address command is in the config command mode.

Table 85 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp server primary address command.

The default is 0.0.0.0.

sntp server secondary address command

The sntp server secondary address command specifies the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server. The syntax for the sntp server secondary address command is:

sntp server secondary address <A.B.C.D>

The sntp server secondary address command is in the config command mode.

Table 85 sntp server primary address command parameters and variables


Description

<A.B.C.D> Enter the IP address of the primary NTP server.


320985-A

Table 86 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp server secondary address command.

The default is 0.0.0.0.

no sntp server command

The no sntp server command clears the NTP server IP addresses. The syntax for the no sntp server command is:

no sntp server <primary|secondary>

The no sntp server command is in the config command mode.

Table 87 describes the parameters and variables for the no sntp server command.

Table 86 sntp server secondary address command parameters and variables


Description

<A.B.C.D> Enter the IP address of the secondary NTP server.

Table 87 no sntp server command parameters and variables


Description

<primary|secondary> Enter the NTP server you want to clear:

• primary—clears the IP address for the primary NTP server

• secondary—clears the IP address for the secondary NTP server



sntp sync-now command

The sntp sync-now command forces a manual synchronization with the NTP server.

The syntax for the sntp sync-now command is:

sntp sync-now

The sntp sync-now command is in the config command mode.

The sntp sync-now command has no parameters or variables.

sntp sync-interval command

The sntp sync-interval command specifies recurring synchronization with the NTP server in hours relative to initial synchronization. The syntax for the sntp sync-interval command is:

sntp sync-interval <0-168>

The sntp sync-interval command is in the config command mode.

Table 88 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp sync-interval command.

Note: You must have SNTP enabled before this command can take effect.

Table 88 sntp sync-interval command parameters and variables


Description

<0-168> Enter the number of hours you want for periodic synchronization with the NTP server.

Note: 0 is boot-time only, and 168 is once a week; the default value is 24 hours.


320985-A

Setting local time zone

SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) for all time synchronizations so it is not affected by different time zones. In order for the switch report the correct time for your local time zone and daylight savings time, you must use the following commands:







clock time-zone

The clock time-zone command sets the local time zone relative to Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). The syntax for the clock time-zone command is:

clock time-zone <zone> <hours> <minutes>

The clock time-zone command is in the config command mode.

Table 89 describes the parameters and variables for the clock time-zone command.

Table 89 clock time-zone command parameters and variables


Description

zone Time zone acronym that can be displayed when showing system time (Range: Up to 4 characters)

hours Hours difference from UTC. (Valid Range: –12 to +12)

minutes Optional minutes difference from UTC. (Range: 0–59)



no clock time-zone

The no clock time-zone command disables the clock time zone feature. The syntax for the no clock time-zone command is:

no clock time-zone

The no clock time-zone command is in the config command mode.

The no clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.

clock summer-time

The clock summer-time command sets the daylight savings time with start and end dates. The syntax for the clock summer-time command is:

clock summer-time <zone> [date {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>} {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>}] [<offset>]

The clock summer-time command is in the config command mode.

Table 90 describes the parameters and variables for the clock summer- time command.

Table 90 clock summer-time command parameters and variables


Description

zone The acronym to display when summer time is in effect. If unspecified default to the time zone acronym. (Range: up to 4 characters)

date {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>} {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>}

The first date specifies when summer time should start and the second date specifies when summer time should end.

• day: day of the month (Range: 1 to 31)

• month: month (Range: first three letters by name)• hh:mm: time in military format, in hours and minutes

Note: <day> <month> parameters can also be entered in order: <month> <day>.

offset Number of minutes to add during summer time (Range: 1 to 1440).


320985-A

no clock summer-time

The no clock summer-time command disables the daylight savings time feature. The syntax for the no clock summer-time command is:

no clock summer-time

The no clock summer-time command is in the config command mode.

The no clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.

show clock time-zone

The show clock time-zone command displays the local time zone settings. The syntax for the show clock time-zone command is:

show clock time-zone

The show clock time-zone command is in the config command mode.

The show clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 109 displays sample output from the show clock time-zone command.

Figure 109 show clock time-zone output

show clock summer-time

The show clock summer-time command displays the daylight savings time settings. The syntax for the show clock summer-time command is:

show clock summer-time

The show clock summer-time command is in the config command mode.

425 (config)#show clock time-zoneTime Zone is set to 'PDT', offset from UTC is -08:00



The show clock summer-time command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 110 displays sample output from the show clock summer-time command.

Figure 110 show clock summer-time

Enabling Autopology

You can enable the Optivity* Autopology* protocol using the CLI. Refer to www.nortel.com/support for information on Autopology. (The product family for Optivity and Autotopology is Data and Internet.). This section covers the following commands:

• “autotopology command”

• “no autotopology command” on page 298

• “default autotopology command” on page 298

autotopology command

The autotopology command enables the Autotopology protocol. The syntax for the autotopology command is:

autotopology

The autotopology command is in the config command mode.

The autotopology command has no parameters or values.

425(config)#show clock summer-timeSummer time is set to:start: 1 April 2006 at 12:00end: 1 October 2006 at 12:00Offset: 60 minutes. Timezone will be 'DST'



320985-A

no autotopology command

The no autotopology command disables the Autotopology protocol. The syntax for the no autotopology command is:

no autotopology

The no autotopology command is in the config command mode.

The no autotopology command has no parameters or values.

default autotopology command

The default autotopology command enables the Autotopology protocol. The syntax for the default autotopology command is:

default autotopology

The default autotopology command is in the config command mode.

The default autotopology command has no parameters or values.

show autotopology settings

The show autotopology settings command displays information on the Autotopology configuration. The syntax for the show autotopology settings command is:

show autotopology settings

The show autotopology settings command is in the privExec mode.

The show autotopology settings command has no parameters or variables. Figure 111 displays a sample output of the show autotopology settings command.



Figure 111 show autotopology settings command output

show autotopology nmm-table

The show autotopology nmm-table command displays information about the network management module (NMM) table. The syntax for the show autotopology nmm-table command is:

show autotopology nmm-table

The show autotopology nmm-table command is in the privExec mode.

The show autotopology nmm-table command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 112 displays a sample output of the show autotopology nmm-table command.

Figure 112 show autotopology nmm-table command output

425-48T#show autotopology settingsAutotopology: EnabledLast NMM Table Change: 1 days, 01:08:24Maximum NMM Table Entries: 100Current NMM Table Entries: 7425-48T#

425-48T#show autotopology nmm-tableLSlot RSlotLPort IP Addr Seg ID MAC Addr Chassis Type BT LS CS RPort----- --------------- -------- ------------ ---------------- -- --- ---- ----- 0/ 0 192.168.151.175 0x000000 000FCDBF1E81 425-48T 12 Yes HTBT NA 1/37 192.168.151.1 0x00030d 00802D6E4738 1100 12 Yes HTBT 3/13 1/37 192.168.151.170 0x000115 000CF8610001 5510-24T 12 Yes HTBT 1/21 1/37 192.168.151.171 0x000115 000F6A822EC1 325-24G 12 Yes HTBT 1/21 1/37 192.168.151.172 0x000115 0009978982C1 460-24T-PWR 12 Yes HTBT 1/21 1/37 192.168.151.174 0x000113 000F6A823621 325-24T 12 Yes HTBT 1/19 1/37 192.168.151.176 0x000107 000F3DE52801 3510-24T 12 Yes HTBT 1/ 7


320985-A

Configuring LLDP using the CLI

You can enable the LLDP using the CLI. For more information about LLDP, see “Link Layer Discovery Protocol (IEEE 802.1ab)” on page 40. This section covers the following commands:

• “lldp command”

• “default lldp command” on page 301

• “lldp port config notification command” on page 302

• “no lldp port config notification command” on page 302

• “default lldp port config notification command” on page 303

• “lldp tx-tlv command” on page 303

• “no lldp tx-tlv command” on page 304

• “default lldp tx-tlv command” on page 305

• “lldp port status command” on page 305

• “no lldp port status command” on page 306

• “default lldp port status command” on page 306

• “show lldp command” on page 307

• “show lldp port command” on page 309

lldp command

The lldp command sets the LLDP transmission parameters. The syntax for the lldp command is:

lldp [tx-interval <5-327698>] [tx-hold-multiplier <2-10>] [reinit-delay <1-10>] [tx-delay <1-8192>] [notification-interval <5-3600>]

The lldp command is in the config command mode.



Table 58 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp command.

default lldp command

The default lldp command sets the LLDP transmission parameters to their default values. The syntax for the default lldp command is:

default lldp [tx-interval] [tx-hold-multiplier] [reinit-delay] [tx-delay] [notification-interval]

If no parameters are specified, the default lldp command sets all parameters to their default values.

The default lldp command is in the config command mode.

Table 92 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp command.

Table 91 lldp command parameters and variables


Description

tx-interval <5-327698>

Sets the interval between successive transmission cycles.

tx-hold-multiplier <2-10>

Sets the multiplier for tx-interval used to compute the Time To Live value for the TTL TLV.

reinit-delay <1-10> Sets the delay for re-initialization attempt if the adminStatus is disabled.

tx-delay <1-8192> Sets the minimum delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions.

notification-interval <5-3600>

Sets the interval between successive transmissions of LLDP notifications.

Table 92 default lldp command parameters and variables


Description

tx-interval Sets retransmit interval to the default value (30).

tx-hold-multiplier Sets transmission multiplier to the default value (4).


320985-A

lldp port config notification command

The lldp port config notification command enables notification when new neighbor information is stored or when existing information is removed.

The syntax for the lldp port config notification command is:

lldp port <portlist> config notification

The lldp port config notification command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 93 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp port config notification command.

no lldp port config notification command

The no lldp port config notification command disables config notification. The syntax for the no lldp port config notification command is:

no lldp port <portlist> config notification

The no lldp port config notification command is in the config-if command mode.

reinit-delay Sets reinitialize delay to the default value (2).

tx-delay Sets transmission delay to the default value (2).

notification-interval Sets notification interval to the default value (5).

Table 93 lldp port config notification command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.

Table 92 default lldp command parameters and variables


Description



Table 94 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp port config notification command.

default lldp port config notification command

The default lldp port config notification command sets config notification to its default value (disabled). The syntax for the default lldp port config notification command is:

default lldp port <portlist> config notification

The default lldp port config notification command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 94 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp port config notification command.

lldp tx-tlv command

The lldp tx-tlv command specifies the optional TLVs to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs. The syntax for the lldp tx-tlv command is:

lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] [local-mgmt-addr]

The lldp tx-tlv command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 94 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables


Description


Table 95 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables


Description



320985-A

Table 96 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp tx-tlv command.

no lldp tx-tlv command

The no lldp tx-tlv command specifies the optional TLVs not to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs. The syntax for the lldp tx-tlv command is:

no lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] [local-mgmt-addr]

The no lldp tx-tlv command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 97 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp tx-tlv command.

Table 96 lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables


Description


port-desc Port description TLV

sys-name System name TLV

sys-desc System description TLV

sys-cap System capabilities TLV

local-mgmt-addr Local management address TLV

Table 97 no lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables


Description


port-desc Port description TLV.

sys-name System name TLV

sys-desc System description TLV

sys-cap System capabilities TLV

local-mgmt-addr Local management address TLV



default lldp tx-tlv command

The default lldp tx-tlv command specifies the optional TLVs not to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs (by default, the optional TLVs are not included in LLDPDUs). The syntax for the default lldp tx-tlv command is:

default lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] [local-mgmt-addr]

The default lldp tx-tlv command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 97 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp tx-tlv command.

lldp port status command

The lldp port status command sets the LLDPU transmit and receive status on ports. The syntax for the lldp port status command is:

lldp port <portlist> status [rxOnly | txAndRx | txOnly]

The lldp port status command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 98 default lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables


Description


port-desc Port description TLV. (default value is false: not included)

sys-name System name TLV (default value is false: not included)

sys-desc System description TLV (default value is false: not included)

sys-cap System capabilities TLV (default value is false: not included)

local-mgmt-addr Local management address TLV (default value is false: not included)


320985-A

Table 99 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp port status command.

no lldp port status command

The no lldp port status command disables 802.1ab on ports. The syntax for the no lldp port status command is:

no lldp port <portlist> status

The no lldp port status command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 100 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp port status command.

default lldp port status command

The default lldp port status command sets the LLDPU transmit and receive status on specified ports to its default value (txAndRx). The syntax for the default lldp port status command is:

default lldp port <portlist> status

Table 99 lldp port status command parameters and variables


Description


rxOnly

txAndRx

txOnly

Enables LLDPU receive only.

Enables LLDPU transmit and receive.

Enables LLDPU transmit only.

Table 100 no lldp port status command parameters and variables


Description




The default lldp port status command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 101 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp port status command.

show lldp command

The show lldp command displays configuration data for LLDP. The syntax for the show lldp command is:

show lldp [local-sys-data] [mgmt-sys-data] [stats]

The show lldp command is in the exec command mode.

Table 102 describes the parameters and variables for the show lldp command.

Table 101 default lldp port status command parameters and variables


Description


Table 102 show lldp command parameters and variables


Description

local-sys-data Displays local LLDP system data.

mgmt-sys-data Displays LLDP management data.

stats Displays LLDP statistics.


320985-A

Figure 113 displays the output from the show lldp local-sys-data command.

Figure 113 show lldp local-sys-data command output

425>show lldp local-sys-data------------------------------------------------------------------------- LLDP local-sys-data chassis-------------------------------------------------------------------------ChassisIdSubtype ChassisId SysName SysCap Supported Enabled SysDesc-------------------------------------------------------------------------MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:dd 425 B BEthernet Switch 425-48T HW:0C FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0------------------------------------------------------------------------- LLDP local-sys-data port---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Num PortIdSubtype PortId PortDesc------------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:00 port11/2 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:01 port21/3 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:02 port31/4 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:03 port41/5 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:04 port51/6 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:05 port61/7 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:06 port7----More (q=Quit, space/return=Continue)----Sys capability: O-Other; R-Repeater; B-Bridge; W-WLAN accesspoint; r-Router;T-Telephone; D-DOCSIS cable device; S-Station only.



Figure 114 displays the output from the show lldp mgmt-sys-data command.

Figure 114 show lldp mgmt-sys-data command output

Figure 115 displays the output from the show lldp stats command.

Figure 115 show lldp stats command output

show lldp port command

The show lldp port command displays configuration data for LLDP ports. The syntax for the show lldp port command is:

show lldp [port <portlist>] [neighbor] [neighbor-mgmt-addr] [rx-stats] [tx-stats] [tx-tlv]

The show lldp port command is in the exec command mode.

425>show lldp mgmt-sys-data------------------------------------------------------------------------- lldp mgmt-sys-data--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MgmtAddr MgmtIfId MgmtAddrOID-------------------------------------------------------------------------ipV4 10.128.100.100 0 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1-------------------------------------------------------------------------

425>show lldp stats------------------------------------------------------------------------- lldp stats--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LastChange RemTable RemTable RemTable RemTableTime Inserts Deletes Drops Ageouts-------------------------------------------------------------------------00:01:18.00 1 0 0 0-------------------------------------------------------------------------


320985-A

Table 102 describes the parameters and variables for the show lldp port command.

Figure 116 displays the output from the show lldp port neighbor command.

Figure 116 show lldp port neighbor command output

Table 103 show lldp port command parameters and variables


Description


neighbor Displays LLDP neighbors.

neighbor-mgmt-addr Displays LLDP management addresses for neighbors.

rx-stats Displays LLDP receive statistics.

tx-stats Displays LLDP transmit statistics.

tx-tlv Displays LLDP transmit TLVs.

425>show lldp port 1/1 neighbor------------------------------------------------------------------------ lldp neighbor------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Time Index ChassisIdSubtype ChassisId SysCap Supported Enabled

------------------------------------------------------------------------SysName PortIdSubtype PortId PortDesc------------------------------------------------------------------------SysDesc------------------------------------------------------------------------3/1 78 1 MAC address 00:09:68:b2:9d:60 B B425 stacks v360 MAC address 00:09:68:b2:9d:82 port24Ethernet Switch 425-24T HW:0B FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0------------------------------------------------------------------------Sys capability: O-Other; R-Repeater; B-Bridge; W-WLAN accesspoint; r-Router; T-Telephone; D-DOCSIS cable device; S-Station only.



Figure 117 displays the output from the show lldp port neighbor-mgmt-addr command.

Figure 117 show lldp port neighbor-mgmt-addr command output

Figure 118 displays the output from the show lldp rx-stats command.

Figure 118 show lldp port rx-stats command output

Figure 119 displays the output from the show lldp tx-stats command.

425>show lldp port 1/1 neighbor-mgmt-addr------------------------------------------------------------------------ lldp neighbor-mgmt-addr------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Time Index ChassisIdSubtype ChassisId PortIdSubtype PortIdMgmtAddr MgmtIfId MgmtAddrOID------------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 439194 5 MAC address 00:09:97:a2:9d:80 MAC address 00:09:97:a2:9d:98ipV4 10.128.100.13 0 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.2------------------------------------------------------------------------

425>show lldp port 1/1 rx-stats------------------------------------------------------------------------ lldp rx-stats------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Frames Frames Frames TLVs TLVs AgeOutsNum Discarded Errors Total Discarded Unrecognized------------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 0 105 0 0 0------------------------------------------------------------------------


320985-A

Figure 119 show lldp port tx-stats command output

Figure 120 displays the output from the show lldp stats command.

Figure 120 show lldp port tx-tlv command output

Configuring LEDs on the display panel

The blink-leds command allows you to configure the LEDs on the display panel to identify the unit. The syntax of the blink-leds command is:

blink-leds <off> <stop> <unit>

The blink-leds command is in the enable mode.

425>show lldp port 1/1 tx-stats------------------------------------------------------------------------- lldp tx-stats--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Frames-------------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 123-------------------------------------------------------------------------

425>show lldp port 1/1 tx-tlv------------------------------------------------------------------------ lldp port tlvs------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port PortDesc SysName SysDesc SysCap MgmtAddr------------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 true true true true false



Table 104 describes the parameters for the blink-leds command.

Configuring UI button

ui-button enable command

The ui-button enable command enables the UI button.

The syntax for the ui-button enable command is:

ui-button enable

The ui-button enable command is in the privExec mode.

The ui-button enable command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 121 displays a sample output of the ui-button enable command.

Figure 121 ui-button enable command output

Table 104 blink-leds command parameters and variables

Parameters and Variables Description

off Sets the LEDs to stop blinking.

time Indicates the duration for the LEDs to blink in order to identify the unit.

unit Specifies the unit number to which the command is applied.

425-48T(config)#ui-button enable425-48T(config)#


320985-A

ui-button unit command

The ui-button unit command enables UI button on selected unit in the range of <1-8>.

The syntax for the ui-button unit command is:

ui-button unit <unit #>

The ui-button unit command is in the config command mode.

The ui-button unit command has no parameters or variables.

show ui-button

You can check if the UI button is enabled or disabled using the show ui button command. The syntax for the show ui-button command is:

show ui-button

The show ui-button command is in the privExec command mode.

The show ui-button command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 122 displays sample output from the show ui-button command.

Figure 122 show ui-button command output

Note: This command is specific to stacking mode only.

425-48T#show ui-button Unit # Button Mode ------ ------------- 1 Enabled425-48T#



default ui-button command

The default ui-button command restores UI button to its default configuration. The syntax for the default ui-button command is:

default ui-button

The default ui-button command is in the config command mode.

The default ui-button command has no parameters or values.

no ui-button command

The no ui-button command disables the UI button.

The syntax for the no ui-button command is:

no ui-button

The no ui-button command is in the config command mode.

The no ui-button command has no parameters or values.

Upgrading software

You can download the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software image that is located in non-volatile flash memory. To download the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software image, a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server must be present in your network, and the policy switch must have an IP address. To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address, refer to “Assigning and clearing IP addresses” on page 252.

This section covers:

Caution: Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download process. A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image.


320985-A

• “download command”

download command

The download command upgrades the software for the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425. You can upgrade both the software image and the diagnostics image. If you upgrade to a stack configuration, the entire stack will be upgraded, and the new image is loaded onto every unit of the stack.

The syntax for the download command is:

download [address <ip>] {image <image-name>|image-if-newer <image-name>|diag <filename>} [no-reset]

The download command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 105 describes the parameters and variables for the download command.

Note: The system resets after downloading a new image.

Note: You can use the download command without parameters. The system displays the most recently used TFTP serve IP address and file name; if you still want to use these, press Enter You can also change these.

Table 105 download command parameters and variables


Description

address <ip> Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server you want to use. Note: If this parameter is omitted, the system goes to the server specified by the tftp-server command.

image <image-name>

Enter the name of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software image you want to download.

image-if-newer <image-name>

Enter the name of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software image of the newer version you want to download.



The software download process automatically completes without user intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with a new software image. Take care not to interrupt the download process until after it runs to completion (the process can take up to 10 minutes, depending on network conditions).

When the download process is complete, the switch automatically resets and the new software image initiates a self-test. The system returns a message after successfully downloading a new image.

Figure 123 shows a sample output of the download command.

Figure 123 download message for Ethernet Switch 425-48T

During the download process, the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 is not operational. You can monitor the progress of the download process by observing the LED indications.

diag <filename> Enter the name of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 diagnostics image you want to download.

no-reset Download the specified software without resetting the unit.

Table 105 download command parameters and variables


Description

Download Image [/]Saving Image [-]Finishing Upgrading Image


320985-A

319


Chapter 8Ethernet port management using the CLI

This chapter describes how to enable a port, name a port and enable rate limiting. This chapter covers the following topics:

• “Enabling or disabling a port”

• “Naming ports” on page 321

• “Setting port speed” on page 323

• “Enabling flow control” on page 326

• “Enabling rate-limiting” on page 329

• “Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA)” on page 331

Enabling or disabling a port

You can enable or disable a port using the CLI. This section covers the following commands:

• “shutdown command for the port”

• “no shutdown command” on page 320

shutdown command for the port

The shutdown [port <portlist>] command disables the port.

The syntax for the shutdown [port <portlist>] command is:

shutdown [port <portlist>]

320 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

320985-A

Table 106 describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown [port <portlist>] command.

The shutdown [port <portlist>] command is in the config-if command mode.

Figure 124 displays sample output from the shutdown [port <portlist>] command.

Figure 124 shutdown [port <portlist>] command output

no shutdown command

The no shutdown command enables the port. The syntax for the no shutdown command is:

no shutdown [port <portlist>]

The no shutdown command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 106 shutdown [port <portlist>] command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to shut down or disable. Enter the port numbers you want to disable.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command.

425-48T(config-if)#shutdown port 2425-48T(config-if)#

Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI 321


Table 107 describes the parameters and variables for the no shutdown command.

Naming ports

You can name a port using the CLI. This section covers the following commands:

• “name command”

• “no name command” on page 322

• “default name command” on page 322

name command

The name command allows you to name ports or to change the name. The syntax for the name command is:

name [port <portlist>] <LINE>

The name command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 107 no shutdown command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to enable. Enter the port numbers you want to disable.



320985-A

Table 108 describes the parameters and variables for the name command.

no name command

The no name command clears the port names; it resets the field to an empty string. The syntax for the no name command is:

no name [port <portlist>]

The no name command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 109 describes the parameters and variables for the no name command.

default name command

The default name command clears the port names; it resets the field to an empty string. The syntax for the default name command is:

default name [port <portlist>]

The default name command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 108 name command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to name.


<LINE> Enter up to 26 alphanumeric characters.

Table 109 no name command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to clear of names.




Table 110 describes the parameters and variables for the default name command.

Setting port speed

You can set the speed and duplex mode for a port. This section covers:

• “speed command”

• “default speed command” on page 324

• “duplex command” on page 325

• “default duplex command” on page 326

speed command

The speed command sets the speed of the port. The syntax for the speed command is:

speed [port <portlist>] {10|100|1000|auto}

The speed command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 110 default name command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to clear of names.



320985-A

Table 111 describes the parameters and variables for the speed command.

default speed command

The default speed command sets the speed of the port to the factory default speed. The syntax for the default speed command is:

default speed [port <portlist>]

The default speed command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 111 speed command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to configure the speed. Enter the port numbers you want to configure.


10|100|1000|auto Sets speed to:

• 10—10 Mb/s

• 100—100 Mb/s• 1000—1000 Mb/s or 1 GB/s

• auto—autonegotiation

Note: When you set the port speed for autonegotiation, ensure that the other side of the link is also set for autonegotiation.



Table 112 describes the parameters and variables for the default speed command.

duplex command

The duplex command specifies the duplex operation for a port. The syntax for the duplex command is:

duplex [port <portlist>] {full|half|auto}

The duplex command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 113 describes the parameters and variables for the duplex command.

Table 112 default speed command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to set the speed to factory default. Enter the port numbers you want to set.


Table 113 duplex command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port number to configure the duplex mode. Enter the port number you want to configure, or all to configure all ports simultaneously.


full|half|auto Sets duplex to:

• full—full-duplex mode

• half—half-duplex mode• auto—autonegotiation


320985-A

default duplex command

The default duplex command sets the duplex operation for a port to the factory default duplex value. The syntax for the default duplex command is:

default duplex [port <portlist>]

The default duplex command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 114 describes the parameters and variables for the default duplex command.

Enabling flow control

If you use a Gigabit Ethernet with the Ethernet Switch 425, you control traffic on this port using the flowcontrol command. This section covers the following commands:

• “flowcontrol command” on page 327

• “no flowcontrol command” on page 327

• “default flowcontrol command” on page 328

Note: When you set the duplex mode for autonegotiation, ensure that the other side of the link is also set for autonegotiation.

Table 114 default duplex command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to reset the duplex mode to factory default values. Enter the port numbers you want to configure, or all to configure all ports simultaneously. The default value is autonegotiation.




flowcontrol command

The flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and controls the traffic rates during congestion. The syntax for the flowcontrol command is:

flowcontrol [port <portlist>] {asymmetric|symmetric|auto|disable}

The flowcontrol command is in the config-if mode.

Table 115 describes the parameters and variables for the flowcontrol command.

no flowcontrol command

The no flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and disables flow control. The syntax for the no flowcontrol command is:

no flowcontrol [port <portlist>]

The no flowcontrol command is in the config-if mode.

Table 115 flowcontrol command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to configure for flow control.


asymmetric|symmetric|auto|disable

Sets the mode for flow control:

• asymmetric—enables the local port to perform flow control on the remote port

• symmetric—enables the local port to perform flow control

• auto—sets the port to automatically determine the flow control mode (default)

• disable—disables flow control on the port


320985-A

Table 116 describes the parameters and variables for the no flowcontrol command.

default flowcontrol command

The default flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and sets the flow control to auto, which automatically detects the flow control. The syntax for the default flowcontrol command is:

default flowcontrol [port <portlist>]

The default flowcontrol command is in the config-if mode.

Table 117 describes the parameters and variables for the default flowcontrol command.

Table 116 no flowcontrol command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to disable flow control.


Table 117 default flowcontrol command parameters and variables


Description

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to default to auto flow control.




Enabling rate-limiting

You can limit the percentage of multicast traffic, or broadcast traffic, or both using the CLI. For more information about rate-limiting, refer to “Rate Limiting Configuration screen” on page 115.


• “show rate-limit command”

• “rate-limit command” on page 330

• “no rate-limit command” on page 330

• “default rate-limit command” on page 331

show rate-limit command

The show rate-limit command displays the rate-limiting settings and statistics. The syntax for the show rate-limit command is:

show rate-limit

The show rate-limit command is in the privExec command mode.

The show rate-limit command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 125 displays sample output from the show rate-limit command.

Figure 125 show rate-limit command output

425-48T#show rate-limit Packet Type Limit ----------- -----Both 0 pps425-48T#


320985-A

rate-limit command

The rate-limit command configures rate-limiting on the switch.

The syntax for the rate-limit command is:

rate-limit [multicast <pct>] [broadcast <pct>] [both <pct>]

The rate-limit command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 118 describes the parameters and variables for the rate-limit command.

no rate-limit command

The no rate-limit command disables rate-limiting on the switch. The syntax for the no rate-limit command is:

no rate-limit

The no rate-limit command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 118 rate-limit command parameters and variables

Parameters and values Description

multicast <pct>| broadcast <pct>|both <pct>

Applies rate-limiting to the type of traffic. Enter an integer between 1 and 10 to set the rate-limiting percentage:• multicast—applies rate-limiting to

multicast packets

• broadcast—applies rate-limiting to broadcast packets

• both—applies rate-limiting to both multicast and broadcast packets



default rate-limit command

The default rate-limit command restores the rate-limiting value for the switch to the default setting. The syntax for the default rate-limit command is:

default rate-limit

The default rate-limit command is in the config-if command mode.

Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA)

You can control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet switch as part of the auto-negotiation process using the Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA) feature. When auto-negotiation is disabled, the hardware is configured for a single (fixed) speed and duplex value. When auto-negotiation is enabled, the advertisement made by the switch is a constant value based upon all speed and duplex modes supported by the hardware. When auto-negotiating, the switch selects the highest common operating mode supported between it and its link partner.


• “show auto-negotiation-advertisements command”

• “show auto-negotiation-capabilities command” on page 332

• “auto-negotiation-advertisements command” on page 333

• “no auto-negotiation-advertisements command” on page 334

• “default auto-negotiation-advertisements command” on page 335

show auto-negotiation-advertisements command

The show auto-negotiation-advertisements command displays the current autonegotiation advertisements. The syntax for the show auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:

show auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]


320985-A

The show auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the userExec command mode.

Table 119 describes the parameters and variables for the show auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

Figure 126 displays sample output from the show auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

Figure 126 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command output

show auto-negotiation-capabilities command

The show auto-negotiation-capabilities command displays the hardware advertisement capabilities for the switch. The syntax for the show auto-negotiation-capabilities command is:

show auto-negotiation-capabilities [port <portlist>]

The show auto-negotiation-capabilities command is in the userExec command mode.

Table 119 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command


port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want the current autonegotiation advertisements displayed.

425-48T(config-if)#show auto-negotiation-advertisements port 4,8,10Port Autonegotiation Advertised Capabilities---- ----------------------------------------------------------------4 10Full8 10Full10 10Full425-48T(config-if)#



Table 120 describes the parameters and variables for the show auto-negotiation-capabilities command.

Figure 127 displays sample output from the show auto-negotiation-capabilities command.

Figure 127 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command output

auto-negotiation-advertisements command

The auto-negotiation-advertisements command configures advertisements for the switch. The syntax for the auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:

auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>] [10-full] [10-half] [100-full] [100-half] [1000-full] [1000-half] [asymm-pause-frame] [pause-frame] [none]

The auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the interface configuration command mode.

Table 120 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command


port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want the autonegotiation capabilities displayed.

425-48T(config-if)#show auto-negotiation-capabilities port 5,6,10Port Autonegotiation Capabilities---- ----------------------------------------------------------------5 10Full 10Half 100Full 100Half6 10Full 10Half 100Full 100Half10 10Full 10Half 100Full 100Half425-48T(config-if)#


320985-A

Table 121 describes the parameters and variables for the auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

no auto-negotiation-advertisements command

The no auto-negotiation-advertisements command clears all advertisements for the switch. This command is used for testing. The syntax for the no auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:

no auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]

The no auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the interface configuration command mode.

Table 122 describes the parameters and variables for the no auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

Table 121 auto-negotiation-advertisements command


port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want to configure advertisements.

[10-full] [10-half] [100-full] [100-half] [1000-full] [1000-half] [asymm-pause-frame] [pause-frame]

These are speed-duplex-pause settings. Any combination of these settings is allowed, but parameters must be given in the order shown.

none Do not advertise any settings during auto-negotiation.

Note: The use of this command affects traffic and brings down the link.

Table 122 no auto-negotiation-advertisements command


port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want to clear all advertisements.



default auto-negotiation-advertisements command

The default auto-negotiation-advertisements command sets default advertisements for the switch. The syntax for the default auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:

default auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]

The default auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the interface configuration command mode.

Table 123 describes the parameters and variables for the default auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

This feature allows you to customize the capabilities that you advertise. It also allows you to control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet switch as part of the auto-negotiation process.

Table 123 default auto-negotiation-advertisements command


port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want to set default advertisements.


320985-A

337


Chapter 9Configuring the switch using Device Manager

The first four sections of this chapter describe how you can use Device Manager to configure your switch, manage SNTP, and display topology information.

The chapter includes the following information:

• “Viewing Unit information”

• “Viewing switch IP information” on page 339

• “Editing the chassis configuration” on page 343

• “Working with configuration files” on page 358

• “Working with SNTP” on page 362

• “Displaying topology information using Device Manager” on page 364

Viewing Unit information

You can view unit information by using the Unit dialog box.

To open the Unit dialog box:

1 Double-click on a single unit or select the units you want to edit.


• From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.

• From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.

• On the toolbar, click Edit.

338 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

320985-A

The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > Unit dialog box and details about each item on the tab.

Unit tab

To open the Unit tab:

➨ From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.

The Unit dialog box (Figure 128) opens with the Unit tab displayed.

Figure 128 Unit dialog box

Table 124 describes the Unit tab fields.

Rate Limit tab

To open the Rate Limit tab:

Table 124 Unit tab fields

Field Description

Type Specifies the type number.

Descr Specifies the type of switch.

Ver Specifies the hardware version number of the switch.

Sernum Specifies the serial number of the switch.

Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 339


1 From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.

The Unit dialog box opens with the Unit tab displayed (Figure 128 on page 338).

2 Click the Rate Limit tab.

The Rate limit tab opens (Figure 129).

Figure 129 Rate Limit tab

Table 125 describes the Rate Limit tab fields.

Viewing switch IP information

You can view the switch IP information using the IP dialog box.

Table 125 Rate Limit tab fields

Field Description

Traffic Type Specifies the traffic type.

AllowedRatePps Allowed traffic rate packets per second. It is in the range of 0-262143 (0-3FFFFh).

Note: Rate Limiting feature is disabled when AllowedRatePps equals to 0.

Enable When Enable is set to True, the TrafficType can either be multicast, broadcast, or both.

Note: You can not set the Enabled field for both multicast and broadcast TrafficeType to False at the same time. This is illegal configuration.


320985-A

To open the IP dialog box:

➨ From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.

The Edit IP dialog box opens with the Globals tab displayed.

The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > IP dialog box and details about each item on the tab.

Globals tab

To open the Globals tab:

➨ From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.

The IP dialog box opens (Figure 130) with the Globals tab displayed.

Figure 130 Globals tab

Table 126 describes the Globals tab fields.

Table 126 Globals tab fields

Field and MIB association

Description

DefaultTTL Default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. Default value is 64.

ReasmTimeout Maximum number of seconds that received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly by the switch. Default value is 60.



Addresses tab

The Addresses tab shows the IP address information for the device.

To open the Addresses tab:

1 From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.

The IP dialog box opens with the Globals tab displayed (Figure 130 on page 340).

2 Click the Addresses tab.

The Addresses tab opens (Figure 131).

Figure 131 Edit IP dialog box — IP Address tab

Table 127 describes the Address tab fields.

Table 127 Addresses tab fields

Field Description

Addr The device IP address.

NetMask The subnet mask address.

BcastAddr The value of the least-significant bit in the IP broadcast address used for sending datagrams on the (logical) interface associated with the IP address of this entry. For example, when the Internet standard all-ones broadcast address is used, the value will be 1. This value applies to both the subnet and network broadcasts addresses used by the entity on this (logical) interface.

ReasmMaxSize The size of the largest IP datagram that this entity can reassemble from incoming IP fragmented datagrams received on this interface.


320985-A

ARP tab

The ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) tab shows the MAC addresses and the associated IP addresses for the switch.

To open the ARP tab:

1 From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.

The IP dialog box opens with the Globals tab displayed (Figure 130 on page 340).

2 Click the ARP tab.

The ARP tab opens (Figure 132).

Figure 132 Edit IP dialog box — ARP tab

Table 128 describes the ARP tab fields.

Table 128 ARP tab fields

Field Description

Interface The unit and port number.

MacAddress The unique hardware address of the device.

IpAddress The Internet Protocol address of the device used to represent a point of attachment in a TCP/IP internetwork.

Type The type of mapping.



Editing the chassis configuration

You can edit a chassis configuration from the Edit Chassis dialog box.

To open the Chassis dialog box:

1 Select the chassis.


• From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Chassis.

• On the toolbar, click Edit.

The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > Chassis dialog box and details about each field on the tab.

System tab

You can use the System tab to specify tracking information for a device, device descriptions, and so on.

To open the System tab:


2 From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.

The Chassis dialog box opens with the System tab displayed (Figure 133).


320985-A

Figure 133 Edit Chassis dialog box — System tab

Table 129 describes the System tab fields.

Table 129 System tab fields

Field Description

sysDescr The assigned system name.

sysUpTime The time since the system was last booted.

sysContact Type the contact information (in this case, an e-mail address) for the system administrator.

sysName Type the name of this device.

sysLocation Type the physical location of this device.



AuthenticationTraps Click to enable or disable. When you enable, SNMP traps are sent to trap receivers for all SNMP access authentication. When you disable, no traps are received.

To view traps, click the Trap toolbar button.

ReBoot By default, the switch will be in the Running mode. The reboot command initiates a hardware reset.

AutoPVID Click to enable or disable. When you enable, AutoPVID is activated. When you disable, AutoPVID is inactivated.

NextBootMgmtProtocol The transport protocol(s) to use after the next boot of the agent.

CurrentMgmtProtocol The current transport protocol(s) that the agent supports.

BootMode This setting determines how the management interface of

the switch will be assigned an IP address, the next time theswitch boots. The four BootMode options are:

• local - use the IP address contained in the configuration file.

• net - always attempt to get an IP address from the network.

• netWhenNeeded - attempt to get an IP address from the network only when one is not contained in the configuration file.

• netOrLastAddress - attempt to get an IP address from the network and if that fails use the IP address that was in use on this switch before the last reboot.

ImageLoadMode The source from which the agent image is loaded at the next boot.

CurrentImageVersion The version number of the agent image that is currently used on the switch.

LocalStorageImageVersion The version number of the agent image that is stored in flash memory on the switch.

NextBootDefaultGateway The IP address of the default gateway for the agent to use after the next time the switch is booted.

CurrentDefaultGateway The IP address of the default gateway that is currently in use.

Table 129 System tab fields (continued)

Field Description


320985-A

Base Unit Info tab

The Base Unit Info tab provides read-only information about the operating status of the hardware and whether or not the default factory settings are being used.

To open the Base Unit Info tab:



The Chassis dialog box opens with the System tab displayed (Figure 133 on page 344).

3 Click the Base Unit Info tab.

The Base Unit Info tab opens (Figure 134).

Figure 134 Edit Chassis dialog box — Base Unit Info tab

NextBootLoadProtocol The transport protocol to be used by the agent to load the configuration information and the image at the next boot.

LastLoadProtocol The transport protocol last used to load the image and configuration information on the switch.

Table 129 System tab fields (continued)

Field Description



Table 130 describes the Base Unit Info tab fields.

Stack Info tab

Similar to the Base Unit Info tab, the Stack Info tab provides information about the operating status of the stacked switches and whether or not the default factory settings are being used. This tab is enabled for the stacking configuration only.

To open the Stack Info tab:



The Chassis dialog box opens with the System tab displayed (Figure 133 on page 344).

3 Click the Stack Info tab.

The Stack Info tab opens (Figure 135).

Table 130 Base Unit Info tab fields

Field Description

Type The switch type.

Descr A description of the switch hardware, including number of ports and transmission speed.

Ver The switch hardware version number.

SerNum The switch serial number.

LstChng The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current operational state. If the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem, the value is zero.

OperState The operational state of the switch.

Location Type the physical location of the switch.


320985-A

Figure 135 Edit Chassis dialog box — Stack Info tab

Table 131 describes the Stack Info tab fields.

Table 131 Stack Info tab fields

Field Description

Descr A description of the component or subcomponent. If not available, the value is a zero length string.

Location The geographic location of a component in a system modeled as a chassis, but possibly physically implemented with geographically separate devices connected together to exchange managment information. Chassis modeled in this manner are sometimes referred to as virtual chassis. An example value is: '4th flr wiring closet in blg A'. Note: 1. This object is applicable only to components that can be found in either the Board or Unit groups. If the information is unavailable, for example, the chassis is not modeling a virtual chassis or component is not in Board or Unit group, the value is a zero length string.

2. If this object is applicable and is not assigned a value through a SNMP SET PDU when the row is created, the value will default to the value of the object s5ChasComSerNum.

LstChng The value of sysUpTime when it was detected that the component/sub-component was added to the chassis. If this has not occurred since the cold/warm start of the agent, then the value is zero.



Agent tab

The Agent tab provides read-only information about the addresses that the agent software uses to identify the switch.

To open the Agent tab:



The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab displayed.

3 Click the Agent tab.

The Agent tab opens (Figure 136).

OperState The current operational state of the component. The possible values are:

• other—some other state

• notAvail—state not available • removed—component removed

• disabled—operation disabled

• normal—normal operation • resetInProg—reset in progress

• testing—doing a self test

• warning—operating at warning level • nonFatalErr—operating at error level

• fatalErr—error stopped operation

The allowable (and meaningful) values are determined by the component type.

Ver The version number of the component or subcomponent. If not available, the value is a zero length string.

SerNum The serial number of the component or subcomponent. If not available, the value is a zero length string.

Table 131 Stack Info tab fields (continued)

Field Description


320985-A

Figure 136 Edit Chassis dialog box — Agent tab

Table 132 describes the Agent tab fields.

PowerSupply tab

The PowerSupply tab provides read-only information about the operating status of the switch power supplies.

To open the PowerSupply tab:



Table 132 Agent tab fields

Field Description

NextBootIpAddr The IP address to be used the next time the switch is booted.

NextBootNetMask The subnet mask to be used the next time the switch is booted.

LoadServerAddr The IP address of the load server for the configuration file and/or the image file. If not used, then the value is 0.0.0.0.

ImageFileName Name of the image file(s) currently associated with the interface. When the object is not used, the value is a zero length string.

ValidFlag Indicates if the configuration and/or image file(s) were downloaded from this interface and if the file names have not been changed.

BootRouterAddr The IP address of the boot router for the configuration file and/or the image file.

MacAddr The MAC address of the switch.




3 Click the PowerSupply tab.

The PowerSupply tab opens (Figure 137).

Figure 137 Edit Chassis dialog box — Power Supply tab

Table 133 describes the PowerSupply tab fields.

Table 133 Power Supply tab fields

Field Description

Desc The power supply type.

OperStat The operational state of the power supply. Possible values include:

• other: Some other state.• notAvail: State not available.

• removed: Component was removed.

• disabled: Operation disabled.• normal: State is in normal operation.

• resetInProg: There is a reset in progress.

• testing: System is doing a self test.• warning: System is operating at a warning level.

• nonFatalErr: System is operating at error level.

• fatalErr: A fatal error stopped operation.• notConfig: A module needs to be configured. The allowable values

are determined by the component type.


320985-A

Fan tab

The Fan tab provides read-only information about the operating status of the switch fans.

To open the Fan tab:




3 Click the Fan tab.

The Fan tab opens (Figure 138).

Figure 138 Edit Chassis dialog box — Fan tab



Table 134 describes the Fan tab fields.

Banner tab

The Banner tab allows you to specify banner display in TELNET. You can specify either the default banner or a custom banner.

To open the Banner tab:


2 From the main menu, choose Edit > Chassis.


3 Click the Banner tab.

The Banner tab opens (Figure 139).

Table 134 Fan tab fields

Field Description

Desc The fan type.

OperStat The operational state of the fan. Values include:

• other: Some other state.• notAvail: This state is not available.

• removed: Fan was removed.

• disabled: Fan is disabled.• normal: Fan is operating in normal operation.

• resetInProg: A reset of the fan is in progress.

• testing: Fan is doing a self test.• warning: Fan is operating at a warning level.

• nonFatalErr: Fan is operating at error level.

• fatalErr: An error stopped the fan operation• notConfig: Fan needs to be configured. The allowable values are

determined by the component type.


320985-A

Figure 139 Edit Chassis dialog box — Banner tab

To set the default banner:

1 In the Banner tab, click on the static radio button, and then click Apply. This resets the banner in Telnet to the default banner.

To check that the default banner is set in Telnet:

2 In the Main Menu, click on Device > Telnet.

The Telnet window opens (Figure 139) with the default banner displayed.



Figure 140 Telnet window with default banner

To disable the banner:

➨ In the Banner tab, click on the disabled radio button, and then click Apply.

To check that the banner is disabled:

➨ In the Main Menu, click on Device > Telnet.

The Telnet window opens without the banner.

### ### ########### ########## ############# ########### ### #### ### ############# ############ ############# ########### ### ##### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ###### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ############ ### ######### ### ### ### ### ### ### ########### ### ######### ### ### ###### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ##### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### #### ############# ### ### ### ########### ########### ### ### ########### ### ### ### ########### ###########

Enter Ctrl-Y to begin.*************************************************************** *** Ethernet Switch 425-24T *** *** Nortel *** *** Copyright (c) 1996-2005, All Rights Reserved *** *** Release 3.6 *** *** HW:0A FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 *** ***************************************************************


320985-A

Figure 141 Telnet window without banner

Custom Banner tab

The Custom Banner tab allows you to specify the display for a custom banner in Telnet.

To open the Custom Banner tab:


2 From the main menu, choose Edit > Chassis.


3 Click the Custom Banner tab.

The Custom Banner tab opens (Figure 142).


IP Configuration/Setup... SNMP Configuration... System Characteristics... Switch Configuration... Console/Comm Port Configuration... Spanning Tree Configuration... TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration... Software Download... Configuration File... Display System Log... Reset... Reset to Default Settings... Shutdown Command... Command Line Interface... Logout...

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select option



Figure 142 Edit Chassis dialog box — Custom Banner tab

To create a Custom Banner:

1 In the Banner tab, click on the custom radio button, and then click Apply.

2 Click on the Custom Banner tab (Figure 142).

3 In the Custom Banner tab, make the changes to the lines of the banner that you want to create, and click Apply. The custom banner is 15 lines high and can be up to 80 characters long.

To check that the custom banner is set in Telnet:

1 In the Main menu, click on Device > Telnet.

The Telnet window opens (Figure 143) with the custom banner displayed.


320985-A

Figure 143 Telnet window with custom banner

To disable the banner:

➨ In the Banner tab, click the disabled radio button, and then click Apply.

To check that the banner is disabled:

➨ In the Main Menu, click on Device > Telnet.

The Telnet window opens without the banner.

Working with configuration files

This chapter describes how you can view information and upload or download the configuration and image files.

FileSystem dialog box

To open the Edit FileSystem dialog box:

******************************************************************************Ethernet Switches 325/425******************************************************************************

Enter Ctrl-Y to begin. *************************************************************** *** Ethernet Switch 425-24T *** *** Nortel *** *** Copyright (c) 1996-2005, All Rights Reserved *** *** Release 3.6 *** *** HW:0A FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 *** ***************************************************************



➨ From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > File System.

The FileSystem dialog box opens (Figure 144) and displays the Config/Image/Diag tab.

Figure 144 FileSystem - Config/Image/Diag File tab dialog box

Table 135 describes the FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields.

Table 135 FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields

Field Description

LoadServerAddr The IP address of the load server for the configuration file and/or the image file. If not used, then the value is 0.0.0.0.

BinaryConfigFileName

Name of the configuration file currently associated with the interface. When not used, the value is a zero length string.

ImageFileName Name of the image file(s) currently associated with the interface. When the object is not used, the value is a zero length string.

FwFileName (Diag)

Specifies the FWFileName.


320985-A

ASCII config file

To display the ASCII Config file tab:

➨ In the File System dialog box, click on the ASCII Config File tab.

The ASCII Config File tab (Figure 145) opens.

Action • This object is used to download or upload a config file, an image file or diag firmware file. In read operation, if there is no action taken since the boot up, it will return with a value of other. Otherwise, it will return the latest action.

• In a write operation, the values that can be written are:

dnldConfigdnldImg

upIdConfig

dnldFwdnldImgIfNewer

dnldImgNoReset

dnldFwNoReset

• The newly downloaded config, image or diag file will not take effect until the next boot cycle of the device.

Status This object is used to get the status of the latest action as shown by s5AgInfoFileAction. The values that can be read are:

• other — if no action taken since the boot up• inProgress — the operation is in progress

• success — the operation succeeds

• fail — the operation failed

Table 135 FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields (continued)

Field Description



Figure 145 File system - ASCII Config File dialog box

Table 136 describes the ASCII Config File tab fields.

Table 136 ASCII Config File tab fields

Field Description

LoadServerAddr The IP address of the load server for the ASCII configuration file. If not used, then the value is 0.0.0.0.

ASCIIConfigFileName Name of the ASCII configuration file currently associated with the interface. When not used, the value is a zero length string.

ASCIIConfigAutoDownload Specifies automatic ASCII configuration download.

ASCIIConfigAutodldStatus Specifies the current status of the ASCII configuration file download.

ASCIIConfigManualDownload Specifies manual download of an ASCII configuration file.

ASCIIConfigManualdldStatus Specifies the current status of the manual download of an ASCII configuration file.

ASCIIConfigManualUpload Specifies manual upload of an ASCII configuration file.

ASCIIConfigManualUpldStatus Specifies the current status of the manual upload of an ASCII configuration file.


320985-A

Working with SNTP


The system retries connecting with the NTP server a maximum of 3 times, with 5 minutes between each retry. If the connection fails after the 3 attempts, the system waits for the next synchronization time (the default is 24 hours) and begins the process again.

Configuring SNTP

The SNTP dialog box contains the parameters for configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).

To open the SNTP dialog box:

1 From the Main Menu, choose Edit > SNTP.

The SNTP dialog box opens (Figure 146).



Figure 146 SNTP dialog box

Table 137 describes the SNTP dialog box fields.

Table 137 SNTP dialog box fields

Field Description

PrimaryServer Address

The IP address of the primary SNTP server.

SecondaryServer Address

The IP address of the secondary SNTP server.

State Controls whether the device uses the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP), to synchronize the device's clock to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If the value is disabled, the device will not synchronize it's clock using SNTP.If the value is unicast, the device will synchronize shortly after boot time when network access becomes available, and periodically thereafter.

SyncInterval Controls the frequency, in hours, that the device will attempt to synchronize with the NTP servers

ManualSync Request

Specifies that the device to immediately attempt to synchronize with the NTP servers.


320985-A

Displaying topology information using Device Manager

This chapter describes diagnostic information available in Device Manager on the following tabs:

• “Topology tab”

• “Topology Table tab” on page 365

Topology tab

To view topology information:

➨ From the Device Manager menu bar, select Edit > Diagnostics.

The Diagnostics dialog box opens with the Topology tab displayed (Figure 147).

LastSyncTime Specifies the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) when the device last synchronized with an NTP server.

LastSyncSource Specifies the IP source address of the NTP server with which this device last synchronized

NextSyncTime Specifies the the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) at which the next synchronization is scheduled.

PrimaryServer SynchFailures

Specifies the number of times the switch failed to synchronize with the primary server address. However, synchronization with the secondary server address may still occur.

SecondaryServer SynchFailures

Specifies the number of times the switch failed to synchronize with the secondary server address,

CurrentTime Specifies the switch's current Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Note: In order to clear out the PrimaryServerAddress and SecondaryServerAddress, you must first set the State to disabled.

Table 137 SNTP dialog box fields (continued)

Field Description



Figure 147 Diagnostics dialog box — Topology tab

Table 138 describes the Topology tab fields.

Topology Table tab

To view more topology information:

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics.

The Diagnostics dialog box opens with the Topology tab displayed (Figure 147 on page 365).

2 Click the Topology Table tab.

Table 138 Topology tab fields

Field Description

IpAddr The IP address of the device.

Status Whether Nortel topology is on (topOn) or off (topOff) for the device. The default value is topOn.

NmmLstChg The value of sysUpTime the last time an entry in the network management MIB (NMM) topology table was added, deleted, or modified. If the table has not changed since the last cold or warm start of the agent.

NmmMaxNum The maximum number of entries in the NMM topology table.

NmmCurNum The current number of entries in the NMM topology table.


320985-A

The Topology Table tab opens (Figure 148).

Figure 148 Diagnostics dialog box — Topology Table tab

Table 139 describes the Topology Table tab fields.

Table 139 Topology Table tab fields

Field Description

Slot The slot number in the chassis in which the topology message was received.

Port The port on which the topology message was received.

IpAddr The IP address of the sender of the topology message.

SegId The segment identifier of the segment from which the remote agent sent the topology message. This value is extracted from the message.

MacAddr The MAC address of the sender of the topology message.

ChassisType The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message.

BkplType The backplane type of the device that sent the topology message.

LocalSeg Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment as the reporting agent.

CurState The current state of the sender of the topology message. The choices are:

• topChanged —Topology information has recently changed.• heartbeat —Topology information is unchanged.

• new — The sending agent is in a new state.

367


Chapter 10Configuring ports using Device Manager

This chapter describes how to use Device Manager to configure ports on an Ethernet Switch 325/425.

The windows displayed when you configure a single port differ from the ones displayed when you configure multiple ports. However, the options are similar.


• “Viewing and editing a single port configuration”

• “Viewing and editing multiple port configurations” on page 371

Viewing and editing a single port configuration

To view or edit the configuration of a single port:


• Double-click on a single port.

• From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.


• From the toolbar, click Edit.

368 Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager

320985-A

The following sections provide a description of the Edit Port dialog box, and details about the fields in the Interface tab:

• “Interface tab for a single port”

• “Interface tab for multiple ports” on page 372

Interface tab for a single port

The Interface tab shows the basic configuration and status of a single port.

To view the Interface tab:

1 Select the port you want to edit.


• Double-click on the selected port.




The Port dialog box for a single port opens with the Interface tab displayed (Figure 149).

Note: When you edit a single port, tabs that are not applicable are not available for you to select.

When you edit multiple ports, some tabs are not available, and some tabs are available even though the options are not applicable. When the option does not apply for a given port, NoSuchObject is displayed.

Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager 369


Figure 149 Port dialog box — Interface tab

Note: 10/100BASE-TX ports may not autonegotiate correctly with older 10/100BASE-TX equipment. In some cases, the older devices can be upgraded with new firmware or driver revisions. If an upgrade does not allow autonegotiation to correctly identify the link speed and duplex settings, you can manually configure the settings for the link in question.


320985-A

Table 140 describes the Interface tab fields for a single port.

Table 140 Interface tab fields for a single port

Field Description

Index A unique value assigned to each interface. The value ranges between 1 and 512.

Name Specifies a name for the port.

Descr The type of switch and number of ports.

Type The media type of this interface.

Mtu The size of the largest packet, in octets, that can be sent or received on the interface.

PhysAddress The MAC address assigned to a particular interface.

AdminStatus The current administrative state of the device, which can be one of the following:• up

• down

When a managed system is initialized, all interfaces start with AdminStatus in the up state. AdminStatus changes to the down state (or remains in the up state) as a result of either management action or the configuration information available to the managed system.

OperStatus The current operational state of the interface, which can be one of the following:

• up• down

• testing

If AdminStatus is up, then OperStatus should be up if the interface is ready to transmit and receive network traffic. If AdminStatus is down, then OperStatus should be down. It should remain in the down state if and only if there is a fault that prevents it from going to the up state. The testing state indicates that no operational packets can be passed.

LastChange The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current operational state. If the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem, the value is zero.

LinkTrap Specifies whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for this interface

Speed Current speed.

AutoNegotiate Indicates whether this port is enabled for autonegotiation or not.

AdminDuplex The current administrative duplex mode of the port (half or full).

OperDuplex The current mode of the port (half duplex or full duplex).



Viewing and editing multiple port configurations

To view or edit the configurations of multiple ports:

1 Select the ports you want to edit.

Press Ctrl+left click the ports you want to view or configure. A yellow outline appears around the selected ports.






AdminSpeed Set the port’s speed.

OperSpeed The current operating speed of the port.

AutoNegotiationCapability Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a switch can support on a port, and that may be advertised by the port using auto-negotiation

AutoNegotiationAdvertisments Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be advertised during link negotiation.

MltId The MultiLink Trunk to which the port is assigned (if any).

IsPortShared Specifies whether a port is shared. Multiple ports that are logically represented as a single port are shared. Only one shared port may be active at a time.

PortActiveComponent Specifies the physical port components that are active for a shared port.

Note: When you edit multiple ports, some tabs are not available, and some tabs are available even though the options are not applicable. When the option does not apply for a given port, NoSuchObject is displayed.

Table 140 Interface tab fields for a single port (continued)

Field Description


320985-A

Interface tab for multiple ports

The Interface tab shows the basic configuration and status of the selected ports.

To view or edit the Interface tab for multiple ports:

1 Select the ports that you want to edit.

Press Ctrl+left-click the ports that you want to configure. A yellow outline appears around the selected ports.




The Interface tab shows port interface statistics.

Figure 150 Interface tab fields for multiple ports

Table 141 describes the Interface tab fields for multiple ports.

Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports

Field Description

Index A unique value assigned to each interface. The value ranges between 1 and 512.

Port Number of Unit and Port Number.

Name Allows you to enter a character string to name the port

Descr Type of switch and number of ports.

Type Media type for this interface.



Mtu Size of the largest packet, in octets, that can be sent or received on the interface.

PhysAddress MAC address assigned to a particular interface.

AdminStatus Current administrative state of the device, which can be one of the following:

• up• down

When a managed system is initialized, all interfaces start with AdminStatus in the up state. AdminStatus changes to the down state (or remains in the up state) as a result of either management action or the configuration information available to the managed system.

OperStatus Current operational state of the interface, which can be one of the following:

• up

• down• testing

If AdminStatus is up, then OperStatus should be up if the interface is ready to transmit and receive network traffic. If AdminStatus is down, then OperStatus should be down. It should remain in the down state if and only if there is a fault that prevents it from going to the up state. The testing state indicates that no operational packets can be passed.

LastChange Value of the time the interface entered its current operational state. If the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem, the value is zero.

LinkTrap Specifies whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for this interface

Speed The estimate bandwidth of the interface in bits per second (bps). For interfaces that do not vary in bandwidth or have no way to estimate the bandwidth, this object should contain the nominal bandwidth. If the bandwidth of the interface is greater than the maximum value reported by the object, then the object displays its maximum value (4,294,967,295). For a sub-layer that has no concept of bandwidth, the object should be zero.

AutoNegotiate Indicates whether the port is enabled (checked) for autonegotiation or not.

AdminDuplex The current administrative duplex mode of the port (half or full).

OperDuplex Indicate current duplex value of the port.

AdminSpeed Set the speed of a port: none, mbps10, and mbps100

OperSpeed The current operating speed of the port.

Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports (continued)

Field Description


320985-A

AutoNegotiationCapability

Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a switch can support on a port, and that may be advertised by the port using auto-negotiation

AutoNegotiationAdvertisments

Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be advertised during link negotiation.

MltId The MultiLink Trunk to which the port is assigned (if any).

IsPortShared Specifies whether a port is shared. Multiple ports that are logically represented as a single port are shared. Only one shared port may be active at a time.

PortActiveComponent

Specifies the physical port components that are active for a shared port.

Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports (continued)

Field Description

375


Chapter 11Administering the switch using Web-based management

The administrative options available to you are:

• “Viewing system information”

• “Quick Start” on page 377

• “Configuring system security” on page 379

• “Rebooting the Ethernet Switch 325/425” on page 379

• “Changing the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to system defaults” on page 381

• “Logging out of the management interface” on page 382

Viewing system information

You can view an image of the Ethernet Switch 325/425 or an image of your entire stack configuration, information about the host device (or stack) and, if provided, the contact person or manager for the switch. The System Information page is also the Web-based management interface home page.

To view system information:

➨ From the main menu, choose Administration > System Information.

The System Information page opens (Figure 151).

Note: You may create or modify existing system information parameters using the System page. For more information on configuring system information, see “Modifying system settings” on page 389.

376 Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management

320985-A

Figure 151 System Information page

Table 142 describes the items on the System Information page.

Table 142 System Information page items

Item Description

sysDescription The default description of the Ethernet Switch 325/425.

sysUpTime The elapsed time since the last network management portion of the system was last re-initialized.

sysName The name created by the network administrator to identify the switch, for example, Finance Group.

sysLocation The location name created by the network administrator to identify the switch location, for example, first floor.

sysContact The name, email, address, and telephone number of the person to contact about switch operation.

Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management 377


Quick Start

The Quick Start feature allows the administrator of the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to make the initial setup by consolidating multiple setup pages into a single page. The Quick Start screen will allow the administrator to configure the following information:

• Switch/Stack IP address

• Subnet mask

• Default gateway

• SNMP Read community

• SNMP Write community

• SNMP Trap IP addresses and communities (up to four)

• New default VLAN

During the initial setup mode, all ports in the switch or stack are assigned to the new default VLAN.

A port-based Quick Start VLAN is created if the new default VLAN does not exist. All ports are removed from the current default VLAN and assigned to the Quick Start VLAN. The PVIDs for all ports are changed to the Quick Start VLAN. The Quick Start VLAN is also designated as the management VLAN.

To configure the initial settings using the Quick Start feature:

1 From the main menu, select Administration > Quick Start.

The Quick Start page is displayed (Figure 152).


320985-A

Figure 152 Quick Start page

2 Click on the Submit button after making the required settings.

Table 143 describes the items on the Quick Start page.

Table 143 Items on the Quick Start page

Section Item Description

IP In-Band Switch IP Address

Specify a new IP address for the switch.

In-Band Subnet Mask

Enter a new subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specify an IP address for the default gateway.



Configuring system security

For information on configuring system security, please refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

Rebooting the Ethernet Switch 325/425

You can reboot a standalone switch or an entire stack without erasing any configured switch parameters. While rebooting, the switch initiates a self-test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests. The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress.

To reboot the Ethernet Switch 325/425 without making changes (since your last Submit request):

Community String

Read-Only Community String

Specify a character string to identify the community string for the SNMPv1 Read-Only community, for example, public or private.

The default value is public.

Read-Write Community String

Specify a character string to identify the community string for the SNMPv1 Read-Write community, for example, public or private.The default value is private.

Trap Receiver Index Select the number of the Trap Receiver to create or modify.

IP address Specify the network address for the SNMP Manager that is to receive the specified Trap.

Community Type the Community String for the specified Trap Receiver.

VLAN Quick Start VLAN Specify the IP of the port-based Quick Start VLAN.

Table 143 Items on the Quick Start page

Section Item Description


320985-A

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset.

The reset warning message displays (Figure 153).

Figure 153 Reset page message

2 Click OK.

To reboot the Ethernet Switch 425-24T in its stack mode without making changes (since your last Submit request):

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset.

The Reset page opens (Figure 154).

Figure 154 Reset page



2 Click Submit. If you do not click Submit, any changes you make will be lost.

Changing the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to system defaults

You can change a standalone switch, a specific unit in a stack configuration, or an entire stack, replacing all configured switch parameters with the factory default values.

During the process of changing to default settings, the switch initiates a self-test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests. The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress.

To change the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to system defaults:

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset to Default.

The reset to default warning message displays (Figure 155).

Figure 155 Reset to Default page message

Note: If you have not configured system password security, a reset returns you to the home page, as shown in Figure 72 on page 200. If you have configured system password security, a reset returns you to a log on page (for details on configuring management passwords, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)).

Caution: If you choose change to default settings, all configured settings are replaced with factory default settings when you click Submit. For more information about factory default settings, see Appendix C, “Default settings,” on page 431.


320985-A

2 Click OK.

To change the Ethernet Switch 425 in its stacking mode to system defaults:

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset to Default.

The Reset to Default page opens (Figure 156).

Figure 156 Reset to Default page

2 Click Submit.

Logging out of the management interface

To log out of the Web-based management user interface:

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Logout.

A logout message displays.

Figure 157 Logout message




• Click OK to log out.

• Click Cancel to return to the Web-based management interface home page.

Note: If you have not configured system password security, a reset returns you to the home page, as shown in Figure 72 on page 200. If you have configured system password security, a reset returns you to a log on page (for details on configuring management passwords, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)).


320985-A

385


Chapter 12Configuring the switch using Web-based management

The switch configuration options available to you are:

• “Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings”

• “Modifying system settings” on page 389

• “Configuring switch port autonegotiation speed” on page 390

• “Configuring high speed flow control” on page 393

• “Downloading switch images” on page 394

• “Downloading ASCII configuration files” on page 396

• “Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server” on page 397

• “Enabling and disabling autosave” on page 400

• “Configuring port communication speed” on page 400

• “Configuring Rate Limiting” on page 402

Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings

You can configure the BootP mode settings, create and modify the In-band stack and In-band switch IP addresses and In-band subnet mask parameters, and configure the IP address of your default gateway.

To configure BootP, IP, and gateway settings:

Note: Settings take effect immediately when you click Submit.

386 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

320985-A

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > IP.

The IP page opens (Figure 158).

Figure 158 IP page

Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 387


Table 144 describes the items on the IP page.

Table 144 IP page items

Section Item Range Description

Boot Mode Setting

BootP Request Mode

BootP When Needed (default) Choose this mode to inform the switch to send a BootP request when the switch IP address stored in nonvolatile memory is the factory default value. If the stored IP address differs from the factory default value, the switch uses the stored network parameters. If the switch cannot find a BootP server, it tries five more times to find one and then defaults to the factory settings

BootP Always Choose this mode to inform the switch to ignore any stored network parameters and send a BootP request, each time it boots. If the BootP request fails, the switch boots with the factory default IP configuration. This setting disables remote management if no BootP server is set up for the switch, but allows the switch to boot normally.

BootP Disabled Choose this mode to inform the switch to use the IP configuration parameters stored in non-volatile memory, each time the switch boots. If a BootP configuration is in progress when you issue this command, the BootP configuration stops.


320985-A

2 Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list.

BootP or Last Address Choose this mode to inform the switch at each startup, to obtain its IP configuration using BootP. If the BootP request fails, the switch uses the network parameters stored in its non-volatile memory.

Note: Valid parameters obtained in using BootP always replace current information stored in the non-volatile memory.

Note: Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests, the BootP process times out if a reply is not received within 7 minutes (approximately). When the process times out, the BootP request mode automatically changes to BootP Disabled mode. To restart the BootP process, change the BootP request mode to any of the three following modes: BootP When Needed, BootP Always, or to BootP or Last Address.

IP Setting In-Band Stack IP Address

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type a new stack IP address in the appropriate format.


XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type a new switch IP address in the appropriate format.

Note: When the IP address is entered in the In-Band IP Address field, and the In-Band Subnet Mask field value is not present, the software provides an in-use default value for the In-Band Subnet Mask field that is based on the class of the IP address entered in the In-Band IP Address field.

In-Band Subnet Mast

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type a new subnet mask in the appropriate format.

Gateway Setting

Default Gateway

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type an IP address for the default gateway in the appropriate format.

Table 144 IP page items (continued)

Section Item Range Description



3 Click Submit.

Modifying system settings

You can create or modify the system name, system location, and network manager contact information.

To configure system settings:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > System.

The System page opens (Figure 159).

Figure 159 System page

Note: The configurable parameters on the System page are displayed in a read only format on the System Information home page.


320985-A

Table 145 describes the items on the System page.

2 Type information in the text boxes.

3 Click Submit.

Configuring switch port autonegotiation speed

You can configure a specific switch port or all switch ports to autonegotiate for the highest available speed of the connected station or you can set the speed for selected switch ports (autonegotiation is not supported on 1000 Mb/s fiber optic ports).

To configure a switch port’s autonegotiation speed:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Port Management.

The Port Management page opens (Figure 160).

Table 145 System page items


System Description

The factory set description of the hardware and software versions.

System Object ID The character string that the vendor created to uniquely identify this device.

System Up Time The elapsed time since the last network management portion of the system was last re-initialized.

Note: This field is updated only when the screen is redisplayed.

System Name 1..255 Type a character string to create a name to identify the switch, for example Finance Group.

System Location 1..255 Type a character string to create a name for the switch location, for example, First Floor.

System Contact 1..255 Type a character string to create the contact information for the network manager or the selected person to contact regarding switch operation, for example, [email protected]

Note: To operate correctly with the Web interface, the system contact should be an e-mail address.



Figure 160 Port Management page

Table 146 describes the items on the Port Management page.

Table 146 Port Management page items


Port The switch port number of the corresponding row. The values that you set in each switch row affect all switch ports and, when the switch is part of a stack, the values that set in the stack row affect all ports in the entire stack (except the GBIC port or fiber optic ports when installed).

Trunk The trunk group that the switch port belongs to as specified in the Trunk Member fields on the MultiLink Trunk page.

Status (1) Enabled(2) Disabled

Choose to enable or disable the port. You can also use this field to control access to any switch port.

The default setting is Enabled.


320985-A

2 In the upper-left corner, click on the unit number of the Ethernet Switch 425 stack to manage.

The page is updated with the information for the selected switch.

3 In the port row of your choice, select from the lists.

4 Click Submit.

Link The current link state of the corresponding port as follows:

Up: The port is connected and operationalDown: The port is not connected or is not operational.

Link Trap (1) On(2) Off

Choose to control whether link up/down traps are sent to the configured trap receiver from the switch.

The default setting is On.

Autonegotiation (1) Enabled(2) Disabled

Choose to enable or disable the autonegotiation feature.

Choosing to enable autonegotiation sets the corresponding port speed to match the best service provided by the connected station, up to 100Mb/s in full-duplex mode.

Note: Autonegotiation also enables auto sensing on 10/100 ports.

The default setting is Enabled.

Speed / Duplex (1) 10Mbs / Half(2) 10Mbs / Full(3) 100Mbs / Half(4) 100Mbs / Full(5) 1000Mbs / Full

Choose the Ethernet speed you want the port to support.

The default setting is 10 Mbs/Half when autonegotiation is disabled and 1000 Mb/s full-duplex for gigabit ports only.

Table 146 Port Management page items




Configuring high speed flow control

You can view the High Speed Flow Control parameters for Ethernet Switch 325/425 in this page.

To configure high speed flow control:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > High Speed Flow Control.

The High Speed Flow Control page opens (Figure 161).

Figure 161 High Speed Flow Control page

Table 147 describes the items on the High Speed Flow Control page.

Table 147 High Speed Flow Control page items


Port The switch port number of the corresponding row.

Autonegotiation (1) Enabled

(2) Disabled

Displays if the autonegotiation feature is enabled or disabled.

When enabled, the port advertises support only for 1000Mb/s operation in full-duplex mode.

Flow Control (1) Enabled

(2) Symmetric

(3) Asymmetric

Displays current settings of flow control.


320985-A

2 In the upper-left corner, click on the unit number for viewing the GBIC configuration.

Downloading switch images

You can download the Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image to non-volatile flash memory. To download the Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image, a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server must be present in your network, and the policy switch must have an IP address. To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address, refer to “Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings” on page 385.

To download a switch image:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Software Download.

The Software Download page opens (Figure 162).

Figure 162 Software Download page

Caution: Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download process. A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image.



Table 148 describes the fields on the Software Download page.


3 Click Submit.

The software download process automatically completes without user intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with a new software image. Take care not to interrupt the download process until after it runs to completion (the process can take up to ten minutes, depending on network conditions).

When the download process is complete, the switch automatically resets and the new software image initiates a self-test.

During the download process, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 will not be operational. You can monitor the progress of the download process by observing the LED indications.

Table 149 describes the LED indications displayed during the software download process.

Table 148 Software Download page fields

Fields Range Description

Current Running Version The version of the current running software.

Local Store Version The local version of the software in the flash memory.

Diagnostics Filename 1..30 Type the diagnostics filename.

TFTP Server IP Address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type the IP address of your TFTP load host.

Download Option (1) No(2) Image(3) Diagnostics

Choose the software image to load.

Note: The LED indications described in Table 149 apply to a 24-port switch model. Although a 48-port switch provides similar LED indications, the LED indication sequence is associated within the 48-port range.


320985-A

Downloading ASCII configuration files

The ASCII Config Download feature allows you to upload an ASCII configuration file from a personal computer to the Ethernet Switch 325/425. In the current implementation, you will require a TFTP server to upload an ASCII configuration file to the Ethernet Switch 325/425. But with this feature the requirement of a TFTP server is eliminated. This feature allows you to upload an ASCII configuration file using the HTTP protocol.

To download the ASCII configuration file to the Ethernet Switch 325/425.

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Ascii Config Download.

2 The Ascii Configuration File Download page opens (Figure 163).

Figure 163 Ascii Configuration file download page

Table 149 LED Indications during the software download process

Phase Description LED Indications

1 The switch downloads the new software image and programs it.

100 Mb/s port status LEDs (ports 18 to 24 only): The LEDs begin to turn on in succession on each ASIC as follows: ASIC 1 from port 1 to port 12 and return, ASIC 2 from with port 24 to port 13 and return, ASIC 3 from port 25 to port 36 and return, ASIC 4 from port 48 to port 37 and return.

2 The switch resets automatically. After the reset completes, the new software image initiates the switch self-test, which comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests.

Note: The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress.



Table 150 describes the items displayed on the ASCII Configuration File Download page.

Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server

You can store switch and stack configuration parameters on a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server. You can retrieve the configuration parameters of a standalone switch or an entire stack and use the retrieved parameters to automatically configure a replacement switch or stack.

To store a switch or stack configuration, you must set up the file on your TFTP server and set the filename read/write permission to enabled.

To download the Ethernet Switch 325/425 configuration file, a properly configured TFTP server must be present in your network, and the Ethernet Switch 325/425 must have an IP address.

To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address, refer to “Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings” on page 385.

To store or retrieve a switch or stack configuration file:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Configuration File.

The Configuration File Download/Upload page opens (Figure 164).

Table 150 Ascii Configuration file download page items

Item Description

Ascii Configuration File Allows you to select the ASCII config file located on a personal computer.

Last Manual Configuration Status

Displays the status of the download.

Submit Click on this button to upload the ASCII configuration file from the personal computer to the Ethernet Switch 325/425.


320985-A

Figure 164 Configuration File Download/Upload page

Table 151 describes the Configuration File Setting items on the Configuration File Download/Upload page.


3 Click Submit.

Table 151 Configuration File Setting items


Configuration Image Filename

1..32 Type the configuration file name.

TFTP Server IP Address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type the IP address of the TFTP load host.


(1) Yes(2) No

Choose whether or not to copy the configuration image to the server.


(1) Yes

(2) No

Choose whether or not to retrieve the configuration image from a server. If you choose Yes, the download process begins immediately and, when completed, causes the switch or stack to reset with the new configuration parameters.



Requirements for storing and retrieving configurationparameters on a TFTP server

The following requirements apply when storing and retrieving configuration parameters on a TFTP server:

• The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone switch configuration parameters to other standalone switches or to copy stack configuration parameters to other stack configurations.

• For example, you cannot duplicate the configuration parameters of a unit in a stack configuration and use it to configure a standalone switch.

• A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used to configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware revision and model type as the donor standalone switch.

• A configuration file obtained from a stack unit can only be used to configure other stacks that have the same number of switches, firmware version, model types, and physical IDs as the stack the donor stack unit resides in.

• Reconfigured stacks are configured according to the unit order number of the donor unit. For example, the configuration file parameters from a donor unit with physical ID x are used to reconfigure the unit with physical ID x.

• The configuration file also duplicates any settings that exist for any GBIC that is installed in the donor switch.

• If you use the configuration file to configure another switch that has the same GBIC model installed, the configuration file settings will also apply to and override the existing GBIC settings.

Table 152 describes the parameters that are not saved to the configuration file.


These parameters are not saved: Used in this screen: See page:

In-Band Stack IP Address IP Configuration/Setup 385


In-Band Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

Configuration Image Filename Configuration File Download/Upload 397



320985-A


The Configuration File Download/Upload page (Figure 164) also allows you to enable and disable the autosave feature on the switch or stack.

To enable or disable autosave:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Configuration File.

The Configuration File Download/Upload page opens (Figure 164).

2 Under Autosave Configuration, choose Enabled or Disabled from the drop-down list.

3 Click Submit.

Configuring port communication speed

You can view the current console/communication port settings and configure the console port baud rate to match the baud rate of the console terminal.

To view current console/communication port settings and configure console port speed:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Console/Comm Port.

The Console/Communication Port page opens (Figure 165).

Console Read-Only Switch Password Console/Comm Port Configuration 400





These parameters are not saved: Used in this screen: See page:



Figure 165 Console/Communication Port page

Table 153 describes the items on the Console/Communication Port page.

2 Select from the list.

3 Click Submit.

Table 153 Console/Communication Port page items


Comm Port Data Bits The current console communication port data bit setting.

Comm Port Parity The current console communication port parity setting.

Comm Port Stop Bits The current console communication port stop bit setting.

Console Port Speed 2400480096001920038400

Choose the console port speed baud rate.

Note: The default setting is 9600.

Caution: If you choose a baud rate that does not match your console terminal baud rate, you will lose communication with the configuration interface when you click Submit.


320985-A

Configuring Rate Limiting

Broadcast Rate Limiting is a box-oriented feature which allows you to configure threshold limits for either broadcast or multicast packets ingressing on a port for a given time interval (in packets per second). If the configured threshold exceeds on a port, the switch will drop extra packets received. No SNMP trap or syslog is generated in case of congestion.

Configuring Rate Limiting

To configure Rate Limiting using the Web-based management system:

1 From the main menu, choose Application > Rate Limiting.

The Rate Limiting page opens (Figure 166).

Figure 166 Rate Limiting page

Table 154 describes the items on the Rate Limiting page.

Table 154 Rate Limiting page items

Section Description

Port The port number that corresponds to the selected switch.

Unit The number of the unit in the stack.



2 On the Rate Limiting page, type information in the text boxes, or select from a list.

3 Click Submit.

Packet Type Select the type of packet.

Limit Configure the threshold limit for the selected type of packet.

Table 154 Rate Limiting page items (continued)

Section Description


320985-A

405


Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

This chapter describes how to isolate and diagnose problems with your Ethernet Switch 325/425 and covers the following topics:

• “Interpreting the LEDs”

• “Diagnosing and correcting problems” on page 405

— Normal power-up sequence

— Port connection problems

Interpreting the LEDs

For information on interpreting the LEDs for the Ethernet Switch 325, refer to Figure 4 on page 60. For information on interpreting the LEDs for the Ethernet Switch 425, refer to Figure 8 on page 76.

Diagnosing and correcting problems

Before you execute the problem-solving steps described in this section, cycle the power to the Ethernet Switch 325/425 (disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord); then verify that the switch follows the normal power-up sequence.

Warning: To avoid injury from hazardous electrical current, do not remove the top cover of the device. There are no user-serviceable components inside.

406 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

320985-A

Normal power-up sequence

In a normal power-up sequence, the LEDs appear as follows:

1 After power is applied to the switch, the Pwr (Power) LED turns on within 5 seconds.

2 The switch initiates a self-test, during which the port LEDs display various patterns to indicate the progress of the self-test.

3 After the self-test, the remaining port LEDs indicate their operational status, as described in Table 155.

Vorsicht: Um Verletzungsgefahr durch einen elektrischen Stromschlag auszuschließen, nehmen Sie niemals die obere Abdeckung vom Gerät ab. Im Geräteinnern befinden sich keine Komponenten, die vom Benutzer gewartet werden können.

Avertissement: Pour éviter tout risque d'électrocution, ne jamais retirer le capot de l'appareil. Cet appareil ne contient aucune pièce accessible par l'utilisateur.

Advertencia: A fin de evitar daños personales por corrientes eléctricas peligrosas, no desmonte nunca la cubierta superior de este dispositivo. Los componentes internos no son reparables por el usuario.

Avvertenza: Per evitare lesioni fisiche dovute a scariche pericolose di corrente, non rimuovere mai il coperchio superiore del dispositivo. I componenti interni non possono essere manipolati dall'utente.

Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 407


Port connection problems

You can usually trace port connection problems to either a poor cable connection or an improper connection of the port cables at either end of the link. To remedy these types of problems, make sure that the cable connections are secure and that the cables connect to the correct ports at both ends of the link.

Port connection problems are also traceable to the autonegotiation mode or the port interface.

Autonegotiation modes

Port connection problems can occur when a port (or station) is connected to another port (or station) that is not operating in a compatible mode (for example, connecting a full-duplex port on one station to a half-duplex port on another station).

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 negotiates port speeds according to the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiating standard. The switch adjusts (autonegotiates) its port speed and duplex mode to match the best service provided by the connected station, up to 100 Mb/s in full-duplex mode as follows:

Table 155 Corrective actions

Symptom Probable cause Corrective action

All LEDs are off. The switch is not receiving AC power.

Verify that the AC power cord is fastened securely at both ends and that power is available at the AC power outlet.

The fans are not operating or the airflow is blocked, causing the unit to overheat.

Verify that there is sufficient space for adequate airflow on both sides of the switch.

Note: Operating temperature for the switch must not exceed 40°C (104°F). Do not place the switch in areas where it can be exposed to direct sunlight or near warm air exhausts or heaters.

The Activity LED for a connected port is off or does not blink (and you have reason to believe that traffic is present).

The switch is experiencing a port connection problem.

See “Port connection problems”.

The switch’s link partner is not autonegotiating properly.

408 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

320985-A

• If the connected station uses a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible with the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiating standard, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 cannot negotiate a compatible mode for correct operation.

• If the autonegotiation feature is not present or not enabled at the connected station, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 may not be able to determine the correct duplex modes.

In both situations, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 “autosenses” the speed of the connected station and, by default, reverts to half-duplex mode. If the connected station is operating in full-duplex mode, it cannot communicate with the switch.

To correct this mode mismatch problem:

1 Use the Port Configuration screen to disable autonegotiation for the suspect port (see “Port Configuration screen” on page 109).

2 Manually set the Speed/Duplex field to match the speed/duplex mode of the connected station.

You may have to try several settings before you find the correct speed/duplex mode of the connected station.

If the problem persists:

1 Disable the autonegotiation feature at the connected station.

2 Manually set the speed/duplex mode of the connected station to the same speed/duplex mode you have manually set for the Ethernet Switch 325/425 port.

Port interface

Ensure that the devices are connected using the appropriate crossover or straight-through cable (see Appendix B, “Connectors and pin assignments,” on page 425), or that autonegotiation is active.

409


Appendix AInstalling an SFP Transceiver

SFPs are hot-swappable input and output enhancement products that allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link to Short Wavelength (SX), Long Wave length (LX), and Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexed (CWDM) fiber optic networks.

The Ethernet Switch 425 has two front-panel ports. They are port numbers 25 and 26 on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and port numbers 49 and 50 on the Ethernet Switch 425-48T.

If you insert an SFP GBIC into one on these ports, that port handles gigabit Ethernet speed only. If there are no optional SFPs inserted in to these ports, they function at 10/100/1000 Mbps ports.

This appendix describes technical specifications and installation instructions on Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceivers, which includes the includes Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexed (CWDM) SFPs, that are supported by the Ethernet Switch 425.

This chapter includes the following topics:

• “Guidelines” on page 410

• “Product Description” on page 410

• “Installing SFPs” on page 414

• “Technical Specifications” on page 416

• “How to get help” on page 423

Note: The term SFP is used in this chapter to describe features or technical specifications of an SFP and a CWDM SFP.

410 Installing an SFP Transceiver

320985-A

Guidelines

Before installing an SFP, read the following guidelines:

• SFP GBICs are static sensitive.

To prevent damage from ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD), follow your normal board and component handling procedures.

• SFP GBICs, are dust sensitive.

When you store an SFP GBIC, or when you disconnect it from a fiber optic cable, always keep the dust cover over the SFP GBIC optical bore.

• To clean contaminants from the optical bores of a SFP GBIC, use an alcohol swab or equivalent to clean the ferrules of the optical connector.

• Dispose this product (if necessary) according to all national laws and regulations.

Product Description

This section describes the SFP and label, and provides a model list for 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX SFPs.

This section also describes the Nortel Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexed (CWDM) SFPs and provides a CWDM SFP model list.


• “Locking/extractor mechanisms” on page 411

• “SFP labeling” on page 411

• “SFP models” on page 412

• “CWDM SFP models” on page 413

Warning: Fiber optic equipment can emit laser or infrared light that can injure your eyes. Never look into an optical fiber or connector port. Always assume that fiber optic cables are connected to a light source.

Installing an SFP Transceiver 411


Locking/extractor mechanisms

Depending on the transceiver manufacturer, an SFP transceiver can have various types of locking/extractor mechanisms.

Figure 167 on page 411 shows two types of locking/extractor mechanisms used on SFP and XFP transceivers.

Figure 167 Locking/extractor mechanism

SFP labeling

The Nortel label on a typical SFP contains a Nortel serial number, a bar code, a manufacturer’s code, an interface type, and a part number. See Figure 168 on page 412.


320985-A

Figure 168 Nortel SFP label

SFP models

SFPs are hot-swappable input/output enhancement components designed for use with Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with other Gigabit Ethernet ports over various media types. Table 156 lists and describes the Nortel SFP models that are supported by the Ethernet Switch 425.

Table 156 1000BASE-SFP models

Model number Product Number Description

1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC).

AA1419013 Small Form Factor Pluggable, short wavelength 550 m

1-port 1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: MT-RJ).

AA1419014 Small Form Factor Pluggable, short wavelength 550 m

1-port 1000Base-LX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC).

AA1419015 Small Form Factor Pluggable, long wavelength 5 km



CWDM SFP models

CWDM SFPs are transceivers that link Gigabit Ethernet ports with fiber optic networks. WDM technology consolidates multiple optical channels, using specific wavelengths to expand available bandwidth, on a common optical fiber.

CWDM SFPs are components in the optical routing system, designed to support high speed data communications for Metropolitan Area Networks (MANs). The system uses a grid of eight CWDM optical wavelengths in both ring and point-to-point configurations. All components are color-coded by wavelength. Table 157 lists the Nortel CWDM SFPs and describes their wavelengths, color codes, part numbers, and cable lengths.

Note: The cable distance may vary depending on the quality of fiber optic cable used.

Table 157 Nortel CWDM SFP transceiver list

CWDM SFP Product number Cable length

1470nm/Gray • AA1419025A

• A1419033

• 40 KM

• 70 KM

1490nm/Violet • AA1419026• AA1419034

• 40 KM• 70 KM

1510nm/Blue • AA1419027

• AA1419035

• 40 KM

• 70 KM

1530nm/Green • AA1419028

• AA1419036

• 40 KM

• 70 KM

1550nm/Yellow • AA1419029• AA1419037

• 40 KM• 70 KM

1570nm/Orange • AA1419030

• AA1419038

• 40 KM

• 70 KM


320985-A

Installing SFPs

To install an SFP:

1 Remove the SFP from its protective packaging.

2 Verify that the SFP is the correct model for your network configuration. See Table 156 on page 412 for information on the SFPs models supported.

3 Grasp the SFP between your thumb and forefinger.

4 Insert the SFP into the SFP slot on the module.

See Figure 169 on page 415. Apply light pressure to the SFP until the device clicks and locks into position in the module.

1590nm/Red • AA1419031

• AA1419039

• 40 KM

• 70 KM

1610nm/Brown • AA1419032• AA1419040

• 40 KM• 70 KM

Note: The cable distance may vary depending on the quality of fiber optic cable used.

Caution: SFPs are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If an SFP resists pressure, do not force it; turn it over, and reinsert it.

Table 157 Nortel CWDM SFP transceiver list (continued)

CWDM SFP Product number Cable length



Figure 169 Inserting an SFP

Removing an SFP

To remove an SFP

1 Disconnect the network fiber cable from the SFP connector.

2 Depending on your SFP model, press the locking/extractor mechanism on the SFP to release the SFP.

Note: Your SFP locking/extractor mechanism may be different than the models shown.


320985-A

Figure 170 Removing an SFP

3 Slide the SFP out of the module SFP slot.

4 If the SFP does not slide easily from the module slot, use a gentle side-to-side rocking motion while firmly pulling the SFP from the slot.

5 Attach a dust cover over the fiber optic bores and store the SFP in a safe place until needed.

Technical Specifications


• “SFP specifications” on page 417

• “CWDM SFP specifications” on page 421

Note: If you are discarding the SFP, be sure to dispose the SFP according to national laws and regulations.



SFP specifications

This section provides technical specifications for the SFP models and includes the following topics:

• “SFP physical specifications”

• “1000BASE-SX (LC Type) specifications” on page 418

• “1000BASE-LX (LC Type) specifications” on page 418

• “1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) specifications” on page 420

SFP physical specifications

This section provides technical specifications for the following SFP models:

Table 158 describes general specifications for 1000BASE-SX, and 1000BASE-LX SFPs.

Table 158 Technical specifications for 1000BASE-SX, and 1000BASE-LX SFPs

Specification Description

Dimensions (H x W x D) 0.53 x 0.33 x 2.22 inches(13.4 x 8.5 x 56.4 mm)

Connectors • Multimode fiber optic: LC or MT-RJ

• Single-mode fiber optic: LC or MT-RJ

• Single-fiber LC fiber optic connector


320985-A

1000BASE-SX (LC Type) specifications

The Model 1000BASE-SX SFP provides 1000BASE-SX (850 nm, short wavelength, Gigabit Ethernet) connectivity using LC duplex multimode fiber connectors. The Model 1000BASE-SX SFP supports full-duplex operation only. Table 159 describes standards, connectors, cabling, and distance for the Model 1000BASE-SX SFP.

1000BASE-LX (LC Type) specifications

The Model 1000BASE-LX SFP provides 1000BASE-LX (1310 nm, long wavelength, Gigabit Ethernet) connectivity using LC duplex fiber connectors. The long wavelength optical transceivers used in the LX model provide variable distance ranges using both multimode and single-mode fiber optic cabling. The Model 1000BASE-LX supports full-duplex operation only.

Table 159 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications

Type Specification

Standards Conforms to the following standards:

• 802.3z, 1000BASE-SX

Connectors Duplex LC fiber optic connector

Cabling • 62.5 µm MMF optic cable

• 50 µm MMF optic cable

Distance • 902 ft. (275 m) using 62.5 µm MMF optic cable

• 1804 ft. (550 m) using 50 µm MMF optic cable

Wavelength 850 nm

Optical budget 7 dB

Laser Transmitter characteristics

Minimum launch power -10 dBm

Maximum launch power -4 dBm

Receiver characteristics

Minimum receiver sensitivity -17 dBm

Maximum power input 0 dBm



Table 160 describes standards, connectors, cabling, and distance for the Model 1000BASE-LX SFPs.

Table 160 1000BASE-LX SFP specifications

Type Specification

Standards Conforms to the following standards:

• 802.3z, 1000BASE-LX

Connectors Duplex LC fiber optic connector

Cabling • 62.5 µm MMF optic cable

• 50 µm MMF optic cable

• 10 µm SMF optic cable



• 16405 ft. (5 km) using 10 µm SMF optic cable

Wavelength 1310 nm

Optical budget 10.5 dB


Minimum launch power -9.5 dB

Maximum launch power -3.0 dB


Minimum receiver sensitivity -20.0 dBm

Maximum power input -3.0 dBm


320985-A

1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) specifications

The Model 1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) SFP GBIC provides Gigabit Ethernet connectivity using MT-RJ multi-mode fiber connectors. Table 161 describes standards, connectors, cabling, and distance for the Model 1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) SFP GBIC.

Table 161 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications

Type Specification

Standards Conforms to the following standards:• 802.3z, Ethernet full duplex

Connectors Duplex MT-RJ fiber optic connector

Cabling • 62.5 µm MMF optic cable• 50 µm MMF optic cable




Wavelength 850 nm

Maximum spectral width 0.85 nm

Minimum launch power -9.5 dB

Maximum launch power -4.0 dB


Minimum receiver sensitivity -17.0 dBm

Maximum power input 0 dBm



CWDM SFP specifications

Table 162 describes CWDM SFP (70 km) specifications.

Table 162 CWDM SFP (70 km) specifications

Item Specification

Physical dimensions 0.457 X .604 X 2.18 inches(11.6 X 15.3 X 55.43 mm)

Connectors Duplex LC fiber optic

Cabling SMF, 9 µm

Data rate Nominal range: 1.0625 to 1250 Mbaud

Average launch power minimum: -3 dBmmaximum: +2 dBm

Optical budget 20 dBm

Operating temperature range

0oC to 60oC

Regulatory Class 1 devices per FDA/CDRH and1EC8251 Laser Safety Regulations

Receiver Characteristics


Maximum input power -3 dBm

Note: A minimum attenuation of 5 dBm must be present between the transmitter and receiver. To avoid receiver saturation, you must insert a minimum attenuation of 5 dBm when:

• testing the CWDM SFP in loopback mode.• using short runs of fiber with no intermediate CWDM OADM or

CWDM OMUX.

To determine the expected signal loss for a CWDM OADM, CWDM OMUX, or fiber length, see Installation and Networking Guidelines for Optical Routing.

Given a loss budget of 24 dBm and assuming fiber loss of .25 dB/km, up to 96 km reach is supported with no intermediate CWDM OADM or CWDM OMUX.


320985-A

Table 163 describes CWDM SFP (40 km) specifications.

Table 163 CWDM SFP (40 km) specifications

Item Specification

Physical dimensions 0.457 X .604 X 2.18 inches(11.6 X 15.3 X 55.43 mm)

Connectors Duplex LC fiber optic

Cabling SMF, 9 µm

Average launch power minimum: -4 dBmmaximum: +1 dBm

Data rate Nominal range: 1.0625 to 1250 Mbaud

Optical budget 17 dBm

Operating temperature range 0oC to 60oC

Regulatory Class 1 devices per FDA/CDRH and IEC60825-1 Laser Safety Regulations

Receiver Characteristics


Maximum input power -3 dBm

Note: A minimum attenuation of 5 dBm must be present between the transmitter and receiver. To avoid receiver saturation, you must insert a minimum attenuation of 5 dBm when:

• testing the CWDM SFP in loopback mode.• using short runs of fiber with no intermediate CWDM OADM or

CWDM OMUX.

To determine the expected signal loss for a CWDM OADM, CWDM OMUX, or fiber length, see Installation and Networking Guidelines for Optical Routing.

Given a loss budget of 24 dBm and assuming fiber loss of .25 dB/km, up to 96 km reach is supported with no intermediate CWDM OADM or CWDM OMUX.



How to get help

If you have purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance.

If you have purchased a Nortel service program, contact Nortel Technical Support. To obtain contact information online, go to: www.nortel.com/support. From there, click on Technical Support.From the Technical Support page, you can open a Customer Service Request online or find the telephone number for the nearest Technical Solutions Center.If you are not connected to the Internet, you can call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835) to learn the telephone number for the nearest Technical Solutions Center.

Hard-copy technical manuals

You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free, directly from the Internet. Go to www.nortel.com/support.

Find the product for which you need documentation. Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product.

Use Adobe* Reader* to open the manuals and release notes, search for the sections you need, and print them on most standard printers.

Go to Adobe Systems at the www.adobe.com URL to download a free copy of the Adobe Reader.



http://www.adobe.com


320985-A

425


Appendix B Connectors and pin assignments

This appendix describes the port connectors and pin assignments for the Ethernet Switch 325/425.

RJ-45 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) port connectors

The RJ-45 port connectors (Figure 171) are wired as MDI-X ports to connect end stations without using crossover cables. (See “MDI and MDI-X devices” on page 426 for information about MDI-X ports.) For 10BASE-T connections, use Category 3 (or higher) UTP cable. For 100BASE-TX connections, use only Category 5 UTP cable.

Figure 171 RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connector

1 8

616EA

426 Connectors and pin assignments

320985-A

Table 164 lists the RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connector pin assignments.

MDI and MDI-X devices

Media dependent interface (MDI) is the IEEE standard for the interface to unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable.

For two devices to communicate, the transmitter of one device must connect to the receiver of the other device. The connection is established through a crossover function, which can be a crossover cable or a port that implements the crossover function internally.

Ports that implement the crossover function internally are known as MDI-X ports, where X refers to the crossover function.

The following sections describe the use of straight-through and crossover cables for connecting MDI and MDI-X devices.

Table 164 RJ-45 port connector pin assignments

Pin Signal Description

1 RX+ Receive Data +

2 RX- Receive Data -

3 TX+ Transmit Data +

4 Not applicable Not applicable


6 TX- Transmit Data -



Note: For the transmitter of one device to connect to the receiver of another device, the total number of crossovers must always be an odd number.

Connectors and pin assignments 427


MDI-X to MDI cable connections

Ethernet Switch 325/425 switches use MDI-X ports that allow you to connect directly to end stations without using crossover cables (Figure 172).

Figure 172 MDI-X to MDI cable connections

MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections

If you are connecting the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to a device that also implements MDI-X ports, use a crossover cable (Figure 173).


320985-A

Figure 173 MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections

DB-9 (RS-232-D) Console/Comm Port connector

The DB-9 Console/Comm Port connector (Figure 174) is configured as a data communications equipment (DCE) connector. The DSR and CTS signal outputs are always asserted; the CD, DTR, RTS, and RI signal inputs are not used. This configuration enables a management station (a PC or console terminal) to connect directly to the switch using a straight-through cable.

Figure 174 DB-9 Console port connector

Table 165 lists the DB-9 Console port connector pin assignments.

1 81 8 8 1 8 1

RX+

RX-

TX+

TX-

RX+

RX-

TX+

TX-

MDI-X port

BayStack 420 Switch Switch or hub

Crossover cable MDI-X port

T

R

T

R

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

BS45057B

Ethernet 325/425

5

6 9

1

619EA

Connectors and pin assignments 429


Table 165 DB-9 Console port connector pin assignments

Pin Signal Description

1 CD Carrier detect (not used)

2 TXD Transmit data (output)

3 RXD Receive data (input)

4 DTR Data terminal ready (not used)

5 GND Signal ground

6 DSR Not used

7 RTS Request to send (not used)

8 CTS Not used

9 RI Ring indicator (not used)

Shell Chassis ground


320985-A

1000Base-T pinouts for the Ethernet Switch 425

Table 166 Pin descriptions for 1000Base-T pinouts

Pin MDI MDI-X

1 BI_DA+ BI_DB+

2 BI_DA– BI_DB–

3 BI_DB+ BI_DA+

4 BI_DC+ BI_DD+

5 BI_DC– BI_DD–

6 BI_DB– BI_DA–

7 BI_DD+ BI_DC+

8 BI_DD– BI_DC–

431


Appendix C Default settings

Table 167 lists the factory default settings for the Ethernet Switch 325/425 according to the console interface (CI) screens and fields for the settings.

Table 167 Factory default settings

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

BootP Request Mode BootP when needed “IP Configuration/Setup screen” on page 214

In-Band Stack IP Address 0.0.0.0(no IP address assigned)

In-Band Switch IP Address 0.0.0.0(no IP address assigned)

In-Band Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0(no subnet mask assigned)

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0(no IP address assigned)

Read-Only Community String public “SNMP Configuration screen” on page 219

Read-Write Community String private

Trap IP Address 0.0.0.0(no IP address assigned)

Community String Zero-length string

Autotoplology Enabled

Authentication Trap Enabled

Link Up/Down Trap Enabled

432 Default settings

320985-A

Operation Mode Stack “System Characteristics screen” on page 221

Reset Count 1

Last Reset Type Power Cycle

Power Status Primary Power

sysContact Zero-length string

sysName Zero-length string

sysLocation Zero-length string

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)


Default settings 433


Aging Time 300 seconds MAC Address Table screen (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))

Find an Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 (no MAC address assigned)

MAC Address Security Disabled MAC Address Security Configuration Menu screen (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))

MAC Address Security SNMP-Locked

Disabled

Partition Port on Intrusion Detected

Disabled

Partition Time 0 seconds (the value 0 indicates forever)

DA Filtering on Intrusion Detected Disabled

Generate SNMP Trap on Intrusion Disabled

Clear by Ports NONE

Learn by Ports NONE

Current Learning Mode Not Learning

Trunk blank field MAC Address Security Port Configuration screen (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))

Security Disabled

Port List Blank field MAC Address Security Port Lists screens (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))

Find an Address Blank field MAC Address Security Table screens (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))

MAC Address Blank field (no address assigned)

Allowed Source Blank field

Display/Create MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00




320985-A

EAPOL Administrative Stat Disabled EAPoL Security Configuration Screen (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))

Initialize No

Operational Status Authorized

Administrative Traffic Control Incoming and Outgoing

Operational Traffic Control Incoming and Outgoing

Re-authenticate Now No

Re-authentication Enabled

Re-authentication period 3600 seconds

Quiet Period 60 seconds

Transmit Period 30 Seconds

Supplicant Timeout 30 Seconds

Server Timeout 30 Seconds

Maximum Requests 2 attempts

Create VLAN 1 VLAN Configuration screen (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Delete VLAN blank field

VLAN Name VLAN # (VLAN number)

Management VLAN Yes, VLAN #1

VLAN State Inactive

Port Membership Default (all ports assigned as untagged members ofVLAN 1)

Unit 1 VLAN Port Configuration screen (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Port 1

Filter Untagged Frames No

Port Name Unit 1, Port 1

PVID 1

Tagging Untagged Access

Unit 1 VLAN Display by Port screen (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Port 1

PVID 1 (read only)

Port Name Unit 1, Port 1 (read only)





Unit 1 “Port Configuration screen” on page 109.

Status Enabled (for all ports)

LnkTrap On

Autonegotiation Enabled (for all ports)

Speed/Duplex 100Mbs/Half (when Autonegotiation is Disabled)

Autonegotiation Enabled “High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen” on page 112

Speed/Duplex 100Mbs/Half (when Autonegotiation is Disabled)

Flow Control Disabled

Trunk 1 to 6 (depending on configuration status)

MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Trunk Members (Unit/Port) Blank field

STP Learning Normal

Trunk Mode Basic

Trunk Status Disabled

Trunk Name Trunk #1 to Trunk #6

Traffic Type Rx and Tx MultiLink Trunk Utilization screen (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))




320985-A

Monitoring Mode Disabled Port Mirroring Configuration screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A))

Monitor/Unit Port Zero-length string

Unit/Port X Zero-length string

Limit 0 pps “Rate Limiting Configuration screen” on page 115

Packet Type Both

Snooping Disabled IGMP Configuration Menu screen (see Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A))

VLAN 1

Proxy Disabled

Robust Value 2

Query Time 125 seconds

Set Router Ports Version 1

Static Router Ports Blank

Unit 1 Port Statistics screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A))

Port 1

Display Messages From Volatile System Log screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A))

Display configuration complete? No

Clear Messages From None





Console Port Speed 9600 Baud “Console/Comm Port Configuration screen” on page 223

Console Switch Password Not Required

Console Stack Password Not Required

TELNET/WEB Switch Password Type

None

TELNET/WEB Stack Password Type

None

Console Read-Only Switch Password

user


secure


user


secure

Primary RADIUS Server 0.0.0.0

Secondary RADIUS Server 0.0.0.0

RADIUS UPD Port 1645

RADIUS Shared Secret Null String

Note: The following two fields appear only when the switch is part of a stack configuration.

New Unit Number Current stack order “Renumber Stack Units screen” on page 232

Renumber Units with new setting No

STP Mode IEEE 802.1s Spanning Tree Group Configuration screen in STPG mode (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Bridge Priority 8000 in Hex.

Bridge Hello Time 2 seconds

Bridge Max. Age Time 20 seconds

Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds






320985-A

Participation Normal Learning Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen in STPG mode (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Priority 128

Path Cost 10 or 100

State Topology dependent

Bridge Priority 0x0000 - 0xF000 Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen in STPG mode (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Root Path Cost 0

Maximum Age Time 20 seconds

Forward Delay 15 seconds

Bridge Maximum Age Time 15 seconds

Bridge Priority 0x8000 Spanning Tree Group Configuration screen in RSTP mode (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))




Default Path Cost Type • 32 bits in MSTP/RSTP mode

• 16 bits in legacy STP mode

• Not supported in STPG mode

Priority 128 Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen in RSTP mode (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Path Cost 10 or 100 (1 for Gigabit port) Path Cost = 1000/LAN speed (in Mb/s)





Bridge Priority 0x8000 Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen in RSTP mode (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Root Port 0

Root Path Cost 0






Create STP Group 1 Spanning Tree Group Configuration screen in MSTP mode (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Delete STP Group Blank

Bridge Priority 0x8000


Bridge Maximum Age Time 20 seconds


Add VLAN membership 1

Delete VLAN Membership Blank

STP Group State Active for CIST; InActive for MSTIs 2 to 7.

Participation Normal Learning Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen in MSTP mode (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Priority 128

Path Cost 200000 (20 000 for Gigabit port) Path Cost = 2*1010/(Number of Kilobits/link)

State Topology dependent




320985-A

Bridge Priority HEX: 0x0000 - 0xF000 Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen in MSTP mode (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

Bridge Priority HEX: 0x0000 - 0xF000

Root Port 0

Root Path Cost 0



Bridge Forward Delay 15 seconds

Tx Hold Count 3

Hop Count (Max) 2000

Default Path Cost Type • 32 bits in MSTP/RSTP mode

• 16 bits in legacy STP802.1d mode

• Not supported in STP802.1d mode

Region Name MAC address of the device

TELNET Access Enabled “TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen” on page 234

SNMP Access Enabled

Web Access Enabled, Yes

Login Timeout 1 minute

Login Retries 3

Inactivity Timeout 15 minutes

Event Logging All

Allowed Source IP Address(10 user-configurable fields)

First field: 0.0.0.0(no IP address assigned)

Remaining nine fields: 255.255.255.255(any address is allowed)

Allowed Source Mask

(10 user-configurable fields)

First field: 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)

Remaining nine fields: 255.255.255.255(any address is allowed)





Image Filename Zero-length string “Software Download screen” on page 237

Diagnostics Filename Zero-length string

TFTP Server IP Address 0.0.0.0(no IP address assigned)

Start TFTP Load of New Image No

Configuration Image Filename Zero-length string “Configuration File Download/Upload screen” on page 240

TFTP Server IP Address 0.0.0.0(no IP address assigned)


No


No

ASCII Configuration Filename Zero-length string “ASCII Configuration file Download” on page 244

TFTP Server IP Address 0.0.0.0

Retrieve Configuration File from Server

No

Last Manual Configuration Status Passed

Last Auto Configuration Status Passed

Auto Configuration on Reset Disabled




320985-A

443


Appendix D Sample BootP configuration file

This appendix provides a sample BootP configuration file. The BootP server searches for this file, called bootptab (or BOOTPTAB.TXT, depending on your operating system), which contains the site-specific information (including IP addresses) needed to perform the software download and configuration. You can modify this sample BootP configuration file or create one of your own.

A sample BootP configuration file follows:

444 Sample BootP configuration file

320985-A

# The following is a sample of a BootP configuration file that was extracted # from a Nortel EZ LAN network management application. Note that other BootP daemons can use a configuration file with a different format. # # Before using your switch BootP facility, you must customize your BootP # configuration file with the appropriate data. # # Blank lines and lines beginning with '#' are ignored. # # Legend: # # first field -- hostname # ht -- hardware type # ha -- host hardware address # tc -- template host (points to similar host entry) # ip -- host IP address # hd -- bootfile home directory # bf -- bootfile # EZ dt -- device type # EZ fv -- firmware version # EZ av -- agent version # # Fields are separated with a pipe (|) symbol. Forward slashes (/) are # required to indicate that an entry is continued to the next line. #

Sample BootP configuration file 445


# Caution # # Omitting a Forward slash (/) when the entry is continued to the next # line, can cause the interruption of the booting process or the # incorrect image file to download. Always include forward slashes # where needed. # # Important Note: # # If a leading zero (0) is used in the IP address it is calculated as an # octal number. If the leading character is "x" (upper or lower case), # it is calculated as a hexadecimal number. For example, if an IP address # with a base 10 number of 45 is written as .045 in the BOOTPTAB.TXT file, # the Bootp protocol assigns .037 to the client. # # Global entries are defined that specify the parameters used by every device. # Note that hardware type (ht) is specified first in the global entry. # # The following global entry is defined for an Ethernet device. Note that this # is where a client's subnet mask (sm) and default gateway (gw) are defined. # global1|/ |ht=ethernet|/ |hd=c:\opt\images|/ |sm=255.255.255.0|/ |gw=192.0.1.0|

# # The following sample entry describes a BootP client:

bay1|ht=ethernet|ha=0060fd000000|ip=192.0.0.1|hd=c:\ezlan\images|bf=bps2000_100.img

# Where: # host name: bay1 # hardware type: Ethernet # MAC address: 00-60-FD-00-00-00 # IP address: 192.0.0.0 # home directory of boot file: c:\ezlan\images # boot file: bps2000_100.img

BS425-24T_100.img

446 Sample BootP configuration file

320985-A

global1|/ |ht=ethernet|/ |hd=c:\opt\images|/ |sm=255.255.255.0|/ |gw=192.0.1.0|

# # The following sample entry describes a BootP client: bay1|ht=ethernet|ha=0060fd000000|ip=192.0.0.1 |hd=c:\ezlan\images|bf=Hummingbird_3.5_100.img # Where: # host name: bay1 # hardware type: Ethernet # MAC address: 00-60-FD-00-00-00 # IP address: 192.0.0.0 # home directory of boot file: c:\ezlan\images # boot file: hummingbird_3.5_100.img

447


Appendix E Command List

This appendix provides the complete CLI command list in alphabetical order, with approximate page references for the beginning pages of further explanations.

Note: This information is presented for reference only and should not be considered to be an exact representation.

Table 168 CLI command list

Command Page No.

auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>] [10-full] [10-half] [100-full] [100-half] [1000-full] [1000-half] [asymm-pause-frame] [pause-frame] [none]

page 333

auto-negotiation-capabilities page 332

auto-pvid Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

autotopology page 297

autosave enable page 288

banner [ custom | static | disabled | <1-15> LINE | clear ]

page 280

blink-leds <off> <stop> page 312

boot [default] page 274

clear logging [nv] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

clear-stats [port<portlist>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

448 Command List

320985-A

cli-password {switch|stack} {ro|rw} <WORD> <WORD>

cli-password {switch|stack} {serial|telnet} {none|local|radius}

Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

clock summer-time <zone> [date {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>} {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>}] [<offset>]

page 295

clock time-zone <zone> <hours> <minutes> page 294

cmd-interface {cli|menu} page 279

configure {terminal|network} page 132

configure network [load-on-boot {disable|use-bootp|use-config}]configure network [filename <FILENAME>]

configure network [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]

page 266

configure command page 132

Configuring CANA using the CLI page 331

copy config nvram page 285

copy config tftp [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] filename <WORD>

page 278

copy tftp config [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] filename <WORD>

page 278

copy running-config tftp {<IP Address> <filename>} page 270

default auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]

page 335

default autotopology page 298

default autosave enable page 288

default command page 131

default duplex [port <portlist>] page 326

default eapol guest-vlan Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default flowcontrol [port <portlist>] page 328

default http-port Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

Command List 449


default ip address unit <1-8> page 258

default ip bootp server page 276

default ip domain-name page 265

default lacp aggregation [port <portlist>] enable Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

default lacp mode [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

default lacp priority [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

default lacp system-priority Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

default lacp timeout-time [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

default lldp port <portlist> config notification page 303

default lldp port <portlist> status page 306

default lldp [tx-interval] [tx-hold-multiplier] [reinit-delay] [tx-delay] [notification-interval]

page 301

default lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap]

page 305

default logging System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

default mac-address-table aging-time page 146

default name [port <port.ist>] page 322

default radius-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default rate-limit [port <portlist>] page 331

default logging remote level System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)


Command Page No.

450 Command List

320985-A

default snmp-server authentication-trap Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default snmp-server community [ro|rw] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default snmp-server contact Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default snmp-server host Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default snmp-server location Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default snmp-server name Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default snmp trap link-status [port <portlist>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default spanning-tree [port <portlist>] [stp] [learning] [cost] [priority]

Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

default speed [port <portlist>] page 324

default ssh [dsa-auth|pass-auth|port|timeout] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default telnet-access Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

default ui-button page 315

default vlan igmp <1-4094> | unknown-mcast-no-flood

Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A)

default vlan mgmt Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)


Command Page No.

Command List 451


disable page 133

download [address <ip>] {image <image-name>| image-if-newer <image-name> | diag <filename>} [no-reset]

page 316

duplex [port <portlist>] {full|half|auto} page 323

eapol {disable|enable} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

eapol guest-vlan [vid <1-4094> | enable] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

eapol [port <portlist>] [init] [status authorized|unauthorized|auto] [traffic-control in-out|in] [re-authentication enable|disable] [re-authentication-period <1-604800>] [re-authenticate] [quiet-interval <num>] [transmit-interval <num>] [supplicant-timeout <num>] [server-timeout <num>][max-request <num>]


enable command page 132

Enabling CANA page 331

end command page 134

exit page 134

flowcontrol [port <portlist>] {asymmetric|symmetrid|auto|disable}

page 326

help page 130

http-port <1024-65535> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

interface FastEthernet {<portlist>} page 133

ip address unit <1-8> A.B.C.D page 257

ip address[stack|switch] <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [netmask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]

page 252

ip bootp server {last|needed|disable|always} page 275

ip domain-name [<LINE>] page 265

ip default-gateway <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> page 254


Command Page No.

452 Command List

320985-A

ip name-server <A.B.C.D> page 263

ipmgr {source-ip <1-10> <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>[mask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]}


ipmgr {telnet|snmp|http} [source-ip <1-10> <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [mask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]]


lacp aggregation [port <portlist>] enable Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

lacp key [port <portlist>] <1-4095> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

lacp mode [port <portlist>] {off | passive | active} Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

lacp priority [port <portlist>] <0-255> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

lacp system-priority [0-65535] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

lacp timeout-time [port <portlist>] {short | long} Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

lldp port <portlist> config notification page 302

lldp port <portlist> status [rxOnly | txAndRx | txOnly] page 305

lldp [tx-interval <5-327698>] [tx-hold-multiplier <2-10>] [reinit-delay <1-10>] [tx-delay <1-8192>][notification-interval <5-3600>]

page 300

lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name]

[sys-desc] [sys-cap]

page 303

logging [enable|disable] [level critical|serious|informational] [nv-level critical|serious|informational|none]

System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)


Command Page No.

Command List 453


logging remote address <A.B.C.D> System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

logging remote enable System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

logging remote level {critical|informational|serious|none}


logout page 132

mac-address-table aging-time <time> page 145

mac-security [disable|enable] [filtering {enable|disable}] [intrusion-detect {enable|disable|forever}] [intrusion-timer <1-65535>] [learning-ports <portlist>] [learning {enable|disable}]|mac-address-table|mac-da-filter|security list [snmp-lock {enable|disable}] [snmp-trap {enable|disable}]


mac-security [port <portlist>] {disable|enable|learning}


mac-security mac-address-table address <H.H.H.> {port <portlist>|security-list <1-32>}


mac-security mac-da-filter Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

mac-security security-list <1-32>

mac-security security-list <portlist>


mlt <id> [name <trunkname>] [enable|disable] [member <portlist>][learning {disable|fast|normal}] [bpdu{all-ports|single-port}]


name [port <portlist>] <LINE> page 321

no auto-pvid Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

no auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>] page 334


Command Page No.

454 Command List

320985-A

no autosave enable page 288

no autotopology page 298

no-banner page 281

no clock summer-time page 296

no clock time-zone page 295

no command page 131

no eapol guest-vlan [enable] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no flowcontrol [port <portlist>] page 298

no ip address {stack|switch} page 253

no ip address unit <1-8> page 258

no ip bootp server page 276

no ip default-gateway page 254

no ip domain-name page 265

no ip name-server <A.B.C.D> page 264

no ipmgr {source-ip [<1-10>]} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no ipmgr {telnet|snmp|http} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no lacp aggregation [port <portlist>] enable Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

no lacp system-priority Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

no lldp port <portlist> config notification page 302

no lldp port <portlist> status page 306

no lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap]

page 304

no logging System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)


Command Page No.

Command List 455


no logging remote address System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

no logging remote enable System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

no logging remote level System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

no mac-security Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no mac-security mac-address-table {address <H.H.H>|port <portlist>|security-list <1-32>]


no mac-security mac-da-filter {add|delete}<H.H.H.> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no mac-security security-list <1-32> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no mlt [<id>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

no name [port <portlist>] page 322

no port-mirroring System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

no radius-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no rate-limit [port <portlist>] page 330

no rmon alarm [<1-65535>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

no rmon event System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)


Command Page No.

456 Command List

320985-A

no rmon history [<1-65535>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

no rmon stats [<1-65535>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

no shutdown [port <portlist>] page 320

no snmp server [authentication-trap|community [ro|rw] contact|host [<host-ip> <community-string>] [location|name]


no snmp-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no snmp-server authentication-trap Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no snmp-server community [ro|rw] <community-string>


no snmp-server contact Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no snmp-server host [<host-ip>] [<community-string>]


no snmp-server host <host-ip> {v1|v2c|v3} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no snmp-server location <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no snmp-server name <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no snmp-server user <username> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)


Command Page No.

Command List 457


no snmp-server view <viewname> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no snmp trap link-status [port <portlist>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no ssh Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no ssh dsa-auth Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no ssh dsa-host-key Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no ssh pass-auth Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no sntp enable page 290

no sntp server <primary|secondary> page 292

no spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

no spanning-tree [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

no telnet-access [source-ip [<1-10>]] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

no tftp-server page 278

no ui-button page 315

no vlan <1-4094> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

no web-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)


Command Page No.

458 Command List

320985-A

ping <A.B.C.D or Hostname> page 262

ping <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [datasize <64-4096>]

[{count <1-9999>} | continuous] [{timeout | -t} <1-120>]

[interval <1-60>] [debug]

page 259

port-mirroring mode {disable | Xrx monitor-port <portlist> mirror-port-X <portlist>


qos egressmap ds <0-63> 1p <0-7> Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A)

qos egressmap enable Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A)

radius-server host <address> [secondary-host <address>] port <num> key <string>


radius-server password fallback Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

rate-limit [port <portlist>] {multicast <pct>| broadcast <pct>| both <pct>}

page 330

reload [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel] page 136

renumber unit page 143

restore factory-default [ -y ] page 261

rmon alarm <1-65535> <WORD> <1-2147483647> {absolute|delta} rising threshold <-2147483648-2147483647> [<1-65535>] falling-threshold <-2147483648-2147483647> [<1-65535>] [owner <LINE>]


rmon event <1-65535> [log] [trap] [description <LINE>] [owner <LINE>]


rmon history <1-65535> <LINE> <1-65535> <1-3600> [owner <LINE>]


rmon stats <1-65535> <port> [owner <LINE>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)


Command Page No.

Command List 459


save config page 286

show arp-table page 282

show auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]

page 331

show auto-negotiation-capabilities [port <portlist>] page 332

show autosave page 287

show autotopology nmm-table page 299

show autotopology settings page 298

show banner [ custom | static ] page 281

show config-network page 267

show cli [info|mode|password] page 272

show clock summer-time page 296

show clock time-zone page 296

show eapol Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show eapol guest-vlan Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show http-port Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show interfaces [names] [<portlist>] page 283

show interfaces [<portlist>] config page 284

show ip address [address [stack|switch]] page 256

show ip [bootp] [default-gateway] [address [stack|switch]]

page 255

show ip dns page 262

show ipmgr Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show lacp debug member [portlist] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)


Command Page No.

460 Command List

320985-A

show lacp port [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show lacp stats [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show lacp system Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show lldp [local-sys-data] [mgmt-sys-data] [stats] page 307

show lldp [port <portlist>] [neighbor] [neighbor-mgmt-addr] [rx-stats] [tx-stats] [tx-tlv]

page 309

show logging [config] [critical] [informational] [serious] [sort-reverse]


show mac-address-table [vid <1-4094>] [aging-time][address <H.H.H>] [port <LINE>] [include/exclude <pattern>]

page 144

show mac-security {config|mac-address-table [address <macaddr>]|port|security-lists|mac-da-filter}


show mlt [utilization <1-6>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show port-mirroring System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

show port-statistics [port <portlist>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

show qos egressmap ds <1-63> Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A)

show qos egressmap status Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A)

show radius-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show rate-limit page 329


Command Page No.

Command List 461


show rmon alarm System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

show rmon event System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

show rmon history System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

show rmon stats System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)

show running-config page 269

show snmp-server community Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show sntp page 289

show spanning-tree {config|port} Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree mstp config Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree mstp msti config <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree mstp msti port config <1 - 7> [<portlist>]


show spanning-tree mstp msti port statistics <1 - 7> [<portlist>]


show spanning-tree mstp msti statistics <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree mstp port config [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)


Command Page No.

462 Command List

320985-A

show spanning-tree mstp port statistics [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree mstp statistics Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree mstp status Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree rstp config Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree rstp port config [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree rstp port statistics [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree rstp port status [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree rstp statistics Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show spanning-tree rstp status Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show ssh download-auth-key Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show ssh global Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show ssh session Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show stack-info page 141

show sys-info page 138


Command Page No.

Command List 463


show tech page 139

show telnet-access Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

show terminal page 271

show tftp-server page 277

show ui-button page 314

show vlan configcontrol Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show vlan igmp <1-4094> Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A)

show vlan interface info [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show vlan interface vids [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

show vlan multicast membership <1-4094> Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A)

show vlan vid <1-4094> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

shutdown [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel] page 134

shutdown [port <portlist>] page 319

snmp-server {enable|disable} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

snmp-server authentication-trap {enable|disable} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

snmp-server bootstrap <minimum-secure> | <semi-secure> |<very-secure>



Command Page No.

464 Command List

320985-A

snmp-server community <community-string> [ro|rw] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

snmp-server community <community-string>{read-view <view-name>|write-view <view-name>|

notify-view <view-name>}


snmp-server contact <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

snmp-server host <host-ip> [port <1-65535>]

<community-string>


snmp-server host <host-ip> [port <1-65535>]

{<community-string>|v2c <community-string>|

v3 {auth|no-auth|auth-priv} <username>}


snmp-server location <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

snmp-server name <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

snmp-server user <username> [read-view <view-name>] [write-view <view-name>] [notify-view <view-name>]

[{md5|sha} <password>[read-view <view-name>]

[write-view <view-name>][notify-view <view-name>][{3des|aes|des} <password> [read-view <view-name>]

[write-view <view-name>][notify-view <view-name>]


snmp-server view <view-name> <OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID>]]]]]]]]]


snmp trap link-status [port <portlist>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

sntp enable page 290

sntp server primary address <A.B.C.D> page 291


Command Page No.

Command List 465


sntp server secondary address <A.B.C.D> page 291

sntp sync-interval <0-168> page 293

sntp sync-now page 293

spanning-tree mstp [max-hop <600 - 4000>] [forward-time <4 - 30>] [max-age <6 - 40>] [pathcost-type {bits16 | bits32}][priority {0000 | 10000 | 20000 | … | F0000}] [tx-hold count <1 - 10>] [version {stp-compatible | rstp| mstp}] [add-vlan <1-4094>] [remove-vlan <1-4094>] [msti <1-7>] [region {config-id-sel|region-name|region-version}]


spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port <portlist>]enable


spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port <portlist>]disable


spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port <portlist>] [cost <1 - 200000000>][learning {disable | enable}][priority {00 | 10 | … | F0}]


spanning-tree mstp msti<1 - 7>[priority{0000|1000|…|F000}] [add-vlan <vid>][remove-vlan <vid>][enable]


spanning-tree mstp [port <portlist>] [cost <1 - 200000000>][edge-port {false | true}][hello-time <1 - 10>] [learning {disable | enable}][p2p {auto | force-false | force-true}][priority {00 | 10 | … | F0}] [protocol-migration {false | true}]


spanning-tree mstp region [config-id-sell <0 - 255>] [region-name <1 - 32 chars>][region-version <0 - 65535>]


spanning-tree [port <portlist>] [learning {disable|normal|fast}] [cost <1-65535>] [priority <0-255>]


spanning-tree rstp[forward-time<4 - 30>] [hello-time <1 - 10>][max-age <6 - 40>]

[pathcost-type{ bits16 | bits32}] [priority{0000|10000|20000| …| F0000}] [tx-holdcount<1 - 10>]

[version stp-compatible|rstp}]



Command Page No.

466 Command List

320985-A

spanning-tree rstp [port <portlist>] [cost <1 - 200000000>] [edge-port {false | true}] [learning {disable | enable}] [p2p {auto | force-false | force-true}][priority {00 | 10 | … | F0}] [protocol-migration {false | true}]


speed [port <portlist>] {10|100|1000|auto} page 323

ssh Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

ssh download-auth-key [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] [key-name <file>]


ssh dsa-auth Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

ssh dsa-host-key Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

ssh pass-auth Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

ssh port <1-65535> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

ssh secure Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

ssh timeout <1-120> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

telnet-access [enable|disable] [login-timeout <1-10>] [retry <1-100>] [inactive-timeout <0-60>][logging {none|access|failures|all}]

[source-ip <1-10> <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [mask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]]


terminal speed {2400|4800|9600|19200|38400}|length <1-132>|width <1-132>

page 271

tftp-server <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> page 277


Command Page No.

Command List 467


ui-button enable page 313

ui-button unit <unit #> page 314

username <username> <password> [ro|rw] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

vlan configcontrol <vcc_option> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

vlan create <1-4094> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

vlan delete <1-4094> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

vlan igmp {<1-4094> [snooping {enable|disable}]

[proxy {enable|disable}] [robust-value <value>] [query-interval <time>] [v1-members <portlist>] [v2-members <portlist>]

Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A)

vlan igmp unknown-mcast-no-flood Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A)

vlan members [add|remove] <1-4094> <portlist> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

vlan mgmt <1-4094> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

vlan name <1-4094> <line> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

vlan ports [<portlist>] [tagging {enable|disable|tagAll|untagAll|tagPvidOnly|untagPvidOnly}] [pvid <1-4094>] [filter-untagged-frame {enable|disable}] [priority <0-7>] [name <line>]


web-server{enable|disable} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)

write memory page 286


Command Page No.

468 Command List

320985-A

469


Appendix F Technical specifications

This appendix provides technical specifications for the Ethernet Switch 325/425.

Environmental specifications

Table 169 lists environmental specifications for the Ethernet Switch 325/425.

Electrical parameters

Table 170 lists power electrical parameters for the Ethernet Switch 325/425.

Table 169 Environmental specifications

Parameter Operating specification Storage specification

Temperature 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F) -25° to 70°C (-13° to 158°F)

Humidity 85% maximum relative humidity, noncondensing

95% maximum relative humidity, noncondensing

Altitude 3024 m (10,000 ft) 3024 m (10,000 ft)

Table 170 Electrical parameters

Parameter Electrical specification

Input Voltage 100 to 240 VAC @ 47 to 63 Hz

Input Power Consumption

46 W maximum (Ethernet Switch 325)

50 W maximum (Ethernet Switch 425)

Input Volt Amperes Rating

65 VA maximum

470 Technical specifications

320985-A

Physical dimensions

Table 171 lists physical dimensions for the Ethernet Switch 325

Table 172 lists physical dimensions for the Ethernet Switch 425.

Input current • Ethernet Switch 325:

2 A @ 120 VAC

1 A @ 240 VAC• Ethernet Switch 425

1 A @ 100 VAC

0.5 A @ 240 VAC

Maximum thermal output

75 BTU/hr (Ethernet Switch 325)250 BTU/hr (Ethernet Switch 425)

Table 171 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 325

Parameter Specifications

Height 2 in (4.37 cm)

Width 17.125 in (43.5 cm)

Depth 9.02 in (22.91 cm)

Weight 6.2 lb (2.82 kg)

Table 172 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 425


Height 1.75 in (4.5 cm)

Width 17.125 in (43.5 cm)

Depth 8.0 in (20.32 cm)

Weight 6.2 lb (2.82 kg)

Table 170 Electrical parameters (continued)

Parameter Electrical specification

Technical specifications 471


Performance specifications

Table 173 lists performance specifications for the Ethernet Switch 325.

Table 174 lists performance specifications for the Ethernet Switch 425.

Data rate

The data rate is 10 Mb/s Manchester encoded or 100 Mb/s 4B/5B encoded.

Table 173 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 325


Frame Forward Rate (64-byte packets)

3.6 Million packets per second (Mpps) for the Ethernet Switch 325-24T, and 6.6 Mpps for the Ethernet Switch 325-24G.

Port Forwarding/Filtering Performance(64-byte packets)

• For 10 Mb/s: 14,880 pps maximum


Address Database Size 8,000 entries at line rate

Addressing 48-bit MAC address

Frame Length 64 to 1518 bytes (IEEE 802.1Q Untagged)

68 to 1522 bytes (IEEE 802.1Q Tagged)

Table 174 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 425


Frame Forward Rate (64-byte packets)

Up to 3.2 million packets per second (pps) maximum, learned unicast traffic; 5.1 million packets per second (pps) in a stack configuration

Port Forwarding/Filtering Performance(64-byte packets)



Address Database Size 8,000 entries at line rate

Addressing 48-bit MAC address

Frame Length 64 to 1518 bytes (IEEE 802.1Q Untagged)

68 to 1522 bytes (IEEE 802.1Q Tagged)


320985-A

Network protocol and standards compatibility

The following are protocols and standards used by the Ethernet Switch 425-24T:

• IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T (ISO/IEC 8802-3, Clause 14)

• IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX (ISO/IEC 8802-3, Clause 25)

• IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN Tagging)

• IEEE 802.1z (Gigabit)

• IEEE 802.1d (Spanning tree protocol)

• IEEE 802.1p (Prioritizing)

• IEEE 802.3ad (static only)

Safety agency certification

• The safety certifications follow for the Ethernet Switch 425-24T:

• UL Listed (UL 1950)

• IEC 950/EN60950 (CB report) with all national deviations

• C22.2 No. 950 (CUL)

• UL-94-V1 flammability requirements for PC board

• NOM (NOM-019)

Electromagnetic emissions

• The electromagnetic emission standards for the Ethernet Switch 425-24T:

• US. CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A

• Canada. ICES-003, Issue 2, Class A

• Australia/New Zealand. AS/NZS 3548:1995, Class A

• Japan. V-3/97.04:1997, Class A

• Taiwan. CNS 13438, Class A

• EN55022:1995, Class A

• EN61000-3-2:1995

• EN61000-3-3:1994

Technical specifications 473


Electromagnetic immunity

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 meets the EN50082-1:1997 standard.


320985-A


475

Index

AAbsoluteValue statistics 187

access 125

access levels 175

accessing the CLI 125

Action field 360

Actions menu 178

Addr field 341

Addresses tab 341

AdminDuplex field 370, 373

administrative optionslogging out 382resetting the switch/stack 379resetting to system defaults 381security, configuring

passwords 379

AdminSpeed field 371, 373

AdminStatus field 370, 373

Agent tab 349, 350

age-out time 143

Alarm Manager button 179

Allowed Source IP Address field 237

Allowed Source Mask field 237

AllowedRatePps field 339

alphabetical list of commands 447

Area Chart button 193

area graph example 188

ARP tab 342

ASCII Config file dialog box 360

ASCII Configuration File Download page 396

ASCII Configuration File Download screen 244

ASCII Configuration Filename field 245

ASCIIConfigAutodldStatus field 361

ASCIIConfigAutoDownload field 361

ASCIIConfigFileName field 361

ASCIIConfigManualdldStatus field 361

ASCIIConfigManualDownload field 361

Authentication Trap field 220

AuthenticationTraps field 345

Auto Configuration on Reset field 246

AutoNegotiate field 370, 373

autonegotiation 283, 323description 54modes 407troubleshooting 407

Autonegotiation field 112, 114

auto-negotiation-advertisements command 333

AutoNegotiationAdvertisments field 371, 374

AutoNegotiationCapability field 371, 374

AutoPVID field 345

autosaveenabling and disabling 400

Autosave Configuration screen 247

autosave enable command 288

autosense description 54

autotopology command 297

Autotopology field 220

Average statistics 187

476 Index

320985-A

Bbanner command for displaying banner 280

Banner display control 280

Banner tab 353

Bar Chart button 193

Base Unit Info Tab 346

Base Unit Info tab 346, 347

BcastAddr field 341

BkplType field 366

blinking LEDs 182

blink-leds command 312

boot command 274

Boot Mode Setting field 387

booting the switch 274

BootMode field 345

BootP 255, 274Always mode 217BOOTPTAB.TXT file 443Bootstrap Protocol

choosing a request mode 216Disabled 218Last Address setting 218Last BootP field 215modes 275Request Mode field 215sample configuration file 443When Needed mode 217

bootPconfiguring 385request modes 387

BootRouterAddr tab 350

Broadcast Rate Limiting 115

buttonsdialog boxes 185toolbar 178

Cchassis

configuration, editing 343

ChassisType field 366

check boxes, about 204

CI Main Menu 126

Clear All Port Statistics option 105

CLI 125

CLI command list, alphabetical 447

clock summer-time command 295

clock time-zone command 294

cmd_interface command 279

color-coded ports 182

Comm Port Data Bits field 225

Comm Port Parity field 225

Comm Port Stop Bits field 225

Command Line Interface option 100

command modes 120, 132, 133

communication parameters, setting for Device Manager 172

Community String field 220

community stringsdefault for Device Manager 175entering 176

ConfigFileName field 359

Configurable field 215

configurationdownloading 358

Configuration File Download/Upload page 397

Configuration File Download/Upload screen 240

Configuration Image Filename field 242

configure command 132

configure network command 266

Confirm row deletion field 174

connectivity 262

connectors 425DB-9 console/comm port connector 428RJ-45 port connector 425

Index 477


Console Interface (CI)logging in 231

console interface (CI)main menu 96menus, using 94

Console Password field 226

console portdefault settings 94

Console Port Speed field 225

Console Read-Only Password field 227, 228

Console Read-Write Password field 227, 229

console/comm portconfiguration screen 223illustration 428pin assignments 429

Console/Comm Port Configuration options 98

Console/Communication Port page 400

conventions, text 34

Copy button 185

copy config nvram command 285

copy config tftp command 278

copy configuration file 276

Copy Configuration Image to Server field 243

Copy File tab 358

copy running-config tftp command 270

copy tftp config command 278

crossover cable 427

Cumulative statistics 187

Current Unit Number field 210, 233

CurrentDefaultGateway field 345

CurrentImageVersion field 345

CurrentMgmtProtocol field 345

CurrentTime field 364

CurState field 366

Custom Banner tab 356

customer support 36

Ddata, exporting 191

DB-9 console/comm port connector 428

default access community strings for Device Manager 175

default auto-negotiation-advertisements command 335

default autosave enable command 288

default autotopology command 298

default command 129, 131

default duplex command 326

default flowcontrol command 328

Default Gateway field 216

default ip address unit command 258

default ip domain-name command 265

default ipbootp server command 276

default lldp command 301

default lldp port config notification command 303

default lldp port status command 306

default lldp tx-tlv command 305

default mac-address-table aging-time command 146

default name command 322

default rate-limit command 331

Default read community 174

default settings 431

default speed command 324

Default TTL field 340

default ui-button command 315

Default write community 174

Descr field 338, 347, 348, 351, 353, 370, 372

Device Manager 147installing on UNIX 160installing on Windows 149requirements 147setting properties 172

478 Index

320985-A

Device Manager window 171, 172

Device menu 178

Device Name field 176

device view, summary 179

device, opening 175

diagnostics 315

Disable command 184

disable command 133

disabled port, color 183

Display Event Log option 99

Display Port Statistics option 105

download command 316

duplex command 325

duplex mode 283, 323

EEAPoL Security Configuration option 104

EAPoL with Guest VLAN 46

Edit command 184

Edit menu 178

Edit Selected button 179

Enable command 184

enable command 132

Enable field 173, 339

enable, name 319

end command 134

Ethernet 325/425 Switchconnectors 425

Ethernet Switch 325front panel 57

Ethernet Switch 425front panel 67

Event Logging field 236

exit command 134

Export Data button 185, 191

FFan tab 352

fiber optic networkslinking with Gigabit Ethernet ports 75

File System window 358

FileSystem dialog box 358

flash memory for software image upgrades 54

flow control 326

Flow Control field 114

flowcontrol command 327

format 123, 252

forwarding table 143

FwFileName field 359

Ggateway 252

gateway addresses, configuring 385

Gateway Setting field 388

GBIC 75

General CLI commands 251

Gigabit Ethernet 326

Gigabit Ethernet ports,linking with fiber optic networks 75

Globals tab 340

graphcreating 191modifying 192

Graph command 184

graph dialog box 192

Graph menu 178

Graph Selected button 179, 191

graph types 187

HHardware Unit Information screen 233

help 128, 129

Index 479


Help button 179

help command 130

Help menu 178

Help, Device Manager 196

High Speed Flow Control Configuration option 104

High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen 112

High Speed Flow Control page 393

high speed flow control, configuring 393

Horizontal button 193

hybrid mode 123

Iicons, about 205

Identify Unit Numbers page 211

IEEE 802.3u standard 54

IGMP Configuration option 105

image file 358

ImageFileName field 350, 359, 361

ImageLoadMode field 345

In Use field 215

Inactivity Timeout field 236

In-Band IP Address field 215

In-Band Subnet Mask field 216

Index field 370, 372

Insert button 185

installing the Device Manager software 149

interface command 133

Interface item, ARP 342

Interface tab for a single port 368

Interface tab for multiple ports 372

interfaces 133

IP 252

IP address 252, 253, 257, 258per unit 257

ip address command 252

IP Address tab 341

IP Address to Ping field 216

ip address unit command 257

IP addresses, configuring 385

ip bootp server command 275

IP Configuration option 97

IP Configuration screen 214

ip default-gateway command 254

IP dialog box 339

ip domain-name command 265

ip name-server command 263

IP page 385

IP Setting field 388

IpAddr field 365, 366

IPAddress field 342

IsPortShared field 371, 374

LLast Auto Configuration Status field 246

Last Manual Configuration Status field 246

LastChange field 370, 373

LastLoadProtocol field 346

LastSyncSource field 364

LastSyncTime field 364

LastValue statistics 187

LEDsdescriptions 60, 76display panel 59, 76

LEDs in device view 182

legend, port color 178, 183

Limit field 118

Line Chart button 193

Link field 112

Link Layer Discovery Protocol 40

link status 319

480 Index

320985-A

link, lacking, color 183

LinkTrap field 370, 373

Listen for Syslogs 174

Listen for Traps 174

LLDP 40TLVs 42

lldp command 300

lldp port config notification command 302

lldp port status command 305

lldp tx-tlv command 303

LnkTrap field 112

LoadServerAddr field 350, 359, 361

LocalSeg field 366

LocalStorageImageVersion field 345

Location field 347, 348

Log Scale button 193

logging 248, 289

logging out 382

logging out of Web-based management 382

Login Retries field 236

Login Timeout field 236

logout command 132

Logout option 100

LstChng field 347, 348

MMAC address 138, 139, 143

MAC Address field 233

MAC address forwarding database table 143

MAC Address Security Configuration option 104

MAC Address Table option 104

MacAddr field 350, 366

MacAddress field 342

mac-address-table aging-time command 145

main menuheadings and options 202

icons 203, 205

main menu, console interface 96

ManualSyncRequest field 363

Max Traps in Log field 174

Maximum statistics 187

MDAviewing 181

MDAs 326

MDI-X to MDI cable connections 427

MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections 427

menu bar, Device Manager 177

menus 177

Microsoft Internet Explorer, software version requirements 199

Minimum statistics 187

MLT 283

MltId field 371, 374

Mtu field 370, 373

MultiLink Trunk Configuration option 105

multiple objects, selecting 181

multiple portsediting 371

Nname command 321

Name field 370, 372

naming ports 321

netmask 252, 257

NetMask field 341

Netscape Navigator, software version requirements 199

network administratorcontact information 389, 390

network configurationconfiguring power workgroups and a shared

media hub 87

network protocol/standards compatibility 472

Index 481


network security, protecting system integrity 201

new features 39

new table entry, creating 185

New Unit Number field 210, 233

NextBootDefaultGateway field 345

NextBootLoadProtocol field 346

NextBootMgmtProtocol field 345

NextBootNetMask field 350

NextBootpAddr field 350

NextSyncTime field 364

NmmCurNum field 365

NmmLstChg field 365

NmmMaxNum field 365

no auto-negotiation-advertisements command 334

no autosave enable command 288

no autotopology command 298

no banner command 281

no clock summer-time command 296

no clock time-zone command 295

no command 129, 131

no flowcontrol command 327

no ip address command 253

no ip address unit command 258

no ip bootp server command 276

no ip default-gateway 254

no ip domain-name command 265

no ip name-server command 264

no lldp port config notification command 302

no lldp port status command 306

no lldp tx-tlv command 304

no name command 322

no rate-limit command 330

no shutdown command 320

no sntp enable command 290

no sntp server command 292

no tftp-server command 278

no ui-button command 315

NoSuchObject error message 368, 371

Oobject types 180

objectsediting 186selecting 180

online Help 178, 196

Open Device button 175, 179

Open Device dialog box 175

operating port, color 183

OperDuplex field 370

OperSpeed field 371, 373

OperState field 347, 349, 351, 353

OperStatus field 370, 373

optionsClear All Port Statistics 105Console/Comm Port Configuration 98Display Event Log 99Display Port Statistics 105IP Configuration 97Logout 100MAC Address Table 104MultiLink Trunk Configuration 105Port Configuration 104Port Mirroring Configuration 105Reset 97, 99Reset to Default Settings 99SNMP Configuration 97Software Download 98Spanning Tree Configuration 98Switch Configuration 98System Characteristics 98TELNET Configuration 98VLAN Configuration 104

482 Index

320985-A

PPacket Type field 117

passwords 127

Paste button 185

PhysAddress field 370, 373

ping command 259, 262

polling interval 191

port 319

port autonegotiation speed, configuring 390

port color legend 183

port communication speed, configuring 400

Port Configuration option 104

Port Configuration screen 109

port connections, troubleshooting 407

Port field 111, 113, 366, 372

Port Management page 390

Port Mirroring Configuration option 105

port mirroring configuration rules 53

port number and port list 123

port shortcut menu 184

port, enabling or disabling 319

PortActiveComponent field 371, 374

portlist 123

portnum 123

ports 323color-coded 182controlling 367disabled 183editing 367, 371naming 283, 321selecting 181viewing 367, 371

power cord warnings (multilingual) 63, 80

power cords 62, 79

Power Supply tab 350, 351

power-up sequence 406

Primary RADIUS Server field 230

PrimaryServer Address field 363

PrimaryServer SynchFailures field 364

Print button 185

product support 36

Properties dialog box 172, 173Hotswap Poll Interval field 173If Traps, Status Interval

) field 173Status Poll Interval field 173

publicationsrelated 54

QQoS 178

Quick Start 377

Quick Start page 377

quit 132

RRADIUS password fallback 45

RADIUS Shared Secret field 230

RADIUS UPD Port field 230

Rate Limit tab 338

Rate Limiting 402

Rate Limiting Configuration option 105

Rate Limiting Configuration screen 115

Rate Limiting page 402

rate-limit command 330

Read Community field 176

Read Community, SNMP 176

Read Community, SNMP field 176

Read-Only Community String field 220

Read-Write Community String field 220

Read-Write-All access 176, 185

ReasmMaxSize field 341

Index 483


ReasmTimeout field 340

reboot 379

ReBoot field 345

Refresh Device Status button 179

Register for Traps 174

release notes, obtaining 201

reload command 136

Renumber Stack Units screen 232

renumber unit command 143

Renumber units with new setting? field 233

request mode, choosing 216

requirements 125accessing the CLI 125Device Manager 147power cords 62, 79terminal 125UNIX installation of Device Manager 160Windows installation of Device Manager 149

reset 379

Reset Changes button 185

Reset page 380

Reset to Default Settings option 99

Reset to Defaults page 381, 382

resetting the switch/stack 379

resetting the switch/stack, to system defaults 381

restore factory-default command 261

Retrieve Configuration File from Server field 246

Retrieve Configuration Image from Server field 243

Retry Count field 174

RFC 54

RJ-45 port connectorillustration 425pin assignments 426

Rmon menu 178

Ssave config command 286

scripts 119, 132, 133

Secondary RADIUS Server field 230

SecondaryServer Address field 363

SecondaryServer SynchFailures field 364

Secure Shell 194

security, configuringpasswords 379

SegId field 366

serial port 125

SerNum field 347, 349

Sernum field 338

setting usernames and passwords 127

settings, default 431

SFP GBIC 75

SFP GBIC Support 53

shortcut menusport 184switch unit 183

show arp-table command 282

show auto-negotiation-advertisements command 331

show auto-negotiation-capabilities command 332

show autosave command 287

show autotopology nmm-table command 299

show autotopology settings command 298

show banner command 281

show cli command 272

show clock summer-time command 296

show clock time-zone command 296

show config-network command 267

show interfaces command 283

show interfaces config command 284

show ip address command 256

show ip command 255

484 Index

320985-A

show ip dns command 262

show lldp command 307

show lldp port command 309

show mac-address-table command 144

show rate-limit command 329

show running-config command 269

show sntp command 289

show stack-info command 141

show sys-info command 138, 273

show tech command 139

show terminal command 271, 272

show tftp-server command 277

show ui-button command 314

shutdown command 319

shutdown command for the unit 134

Shutdown option 100

Simple Network Time Protocol 248

single object, selecting 180

Slot field 366

SNMP Access field 235

SNMP Configuration option 97

SNMP Configuration screen 219

SNMP trap port 46

SNMP traps 195

SNTP 248, 289, 363local time zone 249

SNTP dialog box 362

sntp enable command 290

sntp server primary address command 291

sntp server secondary address command 291

sntp sync-interval command 293

sntp sync-now command 293

softwaredownload process 240image upgrades 54

software download

LED indication descriptions 396process 317, 394, 395

Software Download option 98

Software Download page 394

Software Download screens 237

software installationUNIX 160Windows 149

software version requirementsMicrosoft Internet Explorer 199Netscape Navigator 199

software versions 138

software, downloading 315

Spanning Tree Configuration option 98

speed 283, 323

speed command 323

Speed field 370, 373

Speed/Duplex field 112, 114

SSH 194

SSH button 179

SSH session 179

stack 283

Stack field 117, 118

Stack Info tab 348

stack information 141

Stack Information field 208

Stack Information page 207

stack information, viewing 207

Stack Inventory field 209

stack MAC address 89

Stack Numbering page 209

stack numbering, configuring 209

stack up/down configurations 89

Stacked button 193

stacking 44cascade up and down connectors 78considerations 92

Index 485


initial installation 88overview 87stack MAC address 89stacking considerations 89

standalone mode 123

standards 55

Start Ping field 216

Start TFTP Load of New Image field 240

State field 363

statisticsfor a single object 190for multiple objects 191graphing 186single port 190types 187

statistics dialog boxmultiple objects 190

statistics dialog boxes 178

Status field 112, 360, 365

Stop button 185

subnet mask 252, 257

summary optionschanging stack numbering 209identifying unit numbers 211viewing

stack information 207switch information 206

Support heading 201

support, Nortel Networks 36

switch configuration filesnot-saved parameters 399retrieving from a TFTP server 397storing on a TFTP server 397

Switch Configuration Menu 103options 104

Switch Configuration option 98

switch configuration optionsbootP settings 385gateway settings 385

high speed flow control 393IP settings 385network manager contact 389port autonegotiation speed 390port communication speed 400retrieving from a TFTP server 397storing on a TFTP server 397switch images, downloading 394system location 389system name 389

Switch field 118

switch images, downloading 394

switch informationviewing 206

Switch Information page 206

switch port autonegotiation speed, configuring 390

switch stack, selecting 181

switch unit shortcut menu 183

switch, selecting 180

switches supported 33

SyncInterval field 363

sysContact field 344, 376

sysDescr field 344

sysLocation field 344, 376

sysName field 344, 376

System Characteristics option 98

System Characteristics screen 100, 221

System Characteristics screen fieldsBase Unit 101, 222Last Reset Type 102, 222Local MDA Type 102, 222MAC Address 102, 222Operational Mode 101, 222Power Status 102, 222Reset Count 102, 222Size of Stack 101, 222sysContact 102, 223sysDescr 102, 222sysLocation 102, 223

486 Index

320985-A

sysName 102, 223sysObjectID 102, 222sysServices 102, 223sysUpTime 102, 222

system default settings, resetting to 381

System Description field 390

system information 138, 139

System Information page 375

System Location field 390

system location, naming 389

system name, configuring 389

System Object ID field 390

System page 389

system settingsmodifying 389system contact 390system location 390system name 390

System tab 343, 344

System Up Time field 390

sysUpTime field 344, 376

TTab key navigation 129

tables and input forms, about 204

technical specifications 469

technical support 36

Telnet 125

TELNET Access field 235

Telnet button 179, 193

Telnet session 179, 193

TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration option 98

TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen 234

TELNET/WEB Stack Password Type field 226

TELNET/WEB Switch Password Type field 226

terminal 132requirements 125settings 270

terminal command 271

text conventions 34

TFTP 276

TFTP Server IP Address field 239, 242, 245

tftp-server command 277

time zone, setting 249

Timeout field 174

timestamps 248, 289

toolbar, Device Manager 178

tooltip 184

topology 364

Topology Table tab 365

Trace field 174

trafficGigabit Ethernet 326

Traffic Type field 339

Trap IP Address fields 220

trap log 195

Trap Log button 179

Trap Port field 174

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)software download 238

troubleshooting 252access 132, 253, 258locations of Help files 196ping 259, 262port interface 407port numbers 123ports 133power-up sequence 406receiving traps 196SNTP 248, 289stack 143timestamps 248, 289

Trunk field 111

Index 487


Type field 338, 342, 347, 370, 372

types of objects 180

UUI button 68

ui-button enable command 313

ui-button unit command 314

Unit field 111, 113, 117

unit numbers, identifying 211

Unit tab 338

UNIXinstalling Device Manager 160receiving traps 196

upgrading diagnostics 315

upgrading software 315

User Interface button 68

usernames and passwords 127

Using DNS to ping and Telnet 249

VValidFlag tab 350

value, changed 186

Ver field 338, 347, 349

Viewing 367

VLAN Configuration Control 52

VLAN field 379

VLAN menu 178

VLAN port tagging 51

VLANsConfiguration option 104

WWeb Access field 236

Web browser, requirements 199

Web Help file, accessing 201

Web Quick Start 377

Web quick start 377

Web-based managementopening from Device Manager 194

Web-based management interfacehome page, graphic 195, 200logging in 200main menu, icons 203, 205management page 204navigating the menu 201requirements to use 199

window, Device Manager 177

Windowsinstalling Device Manager 149

Write Community field 176

Write Community, SNMP 176

write memory command 286

488 Index

320985-A

nortel bs425

Documents

Transcript of nortel bs425